The URL can be used to link to this page

2002-03-04 Project Manual1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ~~ Project Manual 2002 Northwest Commercial Park City of Albertville, Minnesota SEH No. A-ALBEV 0113 March 4, 2002 =SEM BIDDING DOCUMENTS SHDRT ELLIOTT HENDRICKSON INC Multidisciptined. Set No. Single Source. DOCUMENT 00010 TABLE OF CONTENTS Number Document INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION Addenda (if any) 00001 Title Page 00005 Certification 00010 Table of Contents BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 00100 Advertisement for Bids 00200 Instructions to Bidders 00410 Bid Form Exemption Form .CONTRACT FORMS 00520 Standard Form of Agreement 00611 Construction Performance Bond 00613 Construction Payment Bond 00620 Notice of Award 00630 Notice to Proceed 00640 Change Order 00650 Work Change Directive 00660 Receipt and Waiver of Mechanic's Lien Rights 00670 Certificate of Substantial Completion 00680 Final Statement CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00700 EJCDC Standard General Conditions 00800 Supplementary Conditions 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Table of Contents A-ALBEV 0113 00010 - 1 SPECIFICATIONS Section Title SPECIFICATIONS Division 1-General Requirements O 1110 Summary of Work 01300 Submittals 01315 Project Meetings 01450 Quality Control 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01558 Maintenance of Traffic 01600 Product Requirements 01770 Closeout Procedures Division 2 - Sitework 02010 General Provisions 02100 Site Preparation 02110 Demolition 02115 Site Grading 02120 Erosion Protection 02221 Trench Excavation and Backfill 02300 Bored & Jacked Crossings 02480 Landscape Work 02510 Roadways 02660 Water Distribution Systems 02720. Storm Sewer Systems 02730 Sanitary Sewer Systems 02765 Pavement Markings APPENDIX Soils Investigation Ductile-Iron & Compact Fittings END OF SECTION Table of Contents 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 00010 - 2 A-ALBEV 0113 L~ '~ i. ~ DOCUMENT 00100 Notice is hereby given that sealed bids will be received by the City Administrator until 11:00 a.m., on Wednesday, April 3, 2002 at the office of City Administrator, at 5975 Main Avenue Northeast, PO Box 9, Albertville, MN 55301-0009, at which time they will be publicly opened and read aloud for the furnishing of all labor and material for the construction o£ 2002 Northwest Commercial Park, Albertville, MN. Approximate major quantities are as follows: 52,000 CY Common Excavation 27 EA Standard Manholes 12,000 CY Granular Borrow 7,200 LF 6" -12"PVC Water Main 51,000 CY Aggregate Base 9 EA Hydrants 4,600 TN Bituminous 36 EA 6" - 12" Gate Valves 8,300 LF Concrete Curb & Gutter 200 LF 24" Steel Casing Pipe 2,200 LF 12" - 24"RCP Storm Sewer 32 AC Seeding 6,300 LF 10" -12" PVC Sanitary Sewer Copies of the Construction Documents are on file for review at the following locations: SEH, 1200 25th Avenue South, P.O. Box 1717, St. Cloud, MN 56302-1717 Bids shall be on the forms provided for that purpose and according to the Contract Documents prepared by SEH, 1200 25th Avenue South, P.O. Box 1717, St. Cloud, Minnesota 56302-1717. Bids will only be accepted from Contractors who purchase Contract Documents from the above-named Engineers. Bid forms and Contract Documents may be seen at the office of the City Administrator and at the office of the above-named Engineers. Contractors desiring a copy of the Bid Forms and Contract Documents may obtain them from SEH, in .accordance with the Instructions to Bidders, upon payment of $50/set. Checks should be made out to SEH. No refunds will be provided. Bid security in the amount of 5 percent of the bid must accompany each bid in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. Bids shall be directed to the City Administrator, securely sealed and endorsed upon the outside wrapper, "BID FOR 2002 NORTHWEST COMMERCIAL PARK, ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA, A-ALBEV 0113". The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids, to waive irregularities and informalities therein, and to award the Contract in the best interests of the Owner. Linda Goeb City Administrator Albertville, Minnesota Publish: Construction Bulletin Crow River News North ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Albertville, Minnesota 2002 Northwest Commercial Park SEH No. A-ALBEV 0113 March 8 and 15, 2002 March 11 and 18, 2002 END OF SECTION 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Advertisement for Bids A-ALBEV 0113 00100 - 1 f DOCUMENT 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ' 1. DEFINED TERMS Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders which are defined in the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (No. 1910-8) (1990 Edition) have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. Certain additional terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated below which .are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. 1.1 Bidder -one who submits bid directly to Owner as distinct from asub-bidder, who submits a bid to a bidder. 1.2 Successful Bidder -the lowest, responsible, and responsive bidder to whom Owner (on the basis of Owner's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. 2. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 2.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents in the number and for the deposit sum, if any, stated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid may be obtained from the office of SEH, 1200 25th Avenue South, P.O. Box 1717, St. Cloud, Minnesota 56302-1717. The deposit will not be refunded. 2.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids; neither Owner nor Engineer assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 2.3 -Owner and Engineer in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms do so only for the purpose of obtaining bids on the .Work and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. 3. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS To demonstrate qualifications to perform the Work, each bidder must be prepared to submit within five days after bid opening upon Owner's request detailed written evidence such as financial data, previous experience, present commitments and other such data as may be called for to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the Work. The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of such bidder fails to satisfy the Owner that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Agreement and to complete the Work contemplated therein. 4. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 4.1 It is the responsibility of each bidder before submitting a bid: 4.1.1 To examine thoroughly the Contract Documents and other related data identified in the Bidding Documents (including "technical data" referred to below); 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Instructions to Bidders A-ALBEV 0113 00200 - 1 4.1.2 To visit the site to become familiar with and satisfy bidder as to the general, local and site conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work; 4.1.3 To consider federal, state, and local laws and regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work; 4.1.4 To study and carefully correlate errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies which bidder has discovered in or between the Contract Documents and such other related data; and 4.1.5 To promptly notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies which bidder has discovered in or between the Contract Documents and such other related documents. 4.1.6 The failure or omission of the bidder to do any of the above shall in no way relieve them from any obligation in respect to their bid. 4.2 Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for identification of: 4.2.1 those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the site which have been utilized by Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents. Bidder may rely upon the general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such reports but not upon other data, interpretations, opinions, or information shown or indicated in such reports or otherwise relating to the subsurface conditions- at the site, nor upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. 4.2.2 those Drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface and subsurface structures (except underground facilities) which are at or contiguous to the Site that have been utilized by Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents. Bidder may rely, upon the general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such Drawings but not upon other data, interpretations, opinions or information shown or indicated in such Drawings or otherwise relating to such structures, nor upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. Copies of such reports and Drawings will be made available by Owner to any bidder on request. Those reports and Drawings are not part of the Contract Documents, but the "technical data" contained therein upon which bidder is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraphs 4.2 of the General Conditions has .been identified and. established in Paragraph SC-4.2 of the Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any interpretations or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such data, interpretations, opinions or information. 4.3 Information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing underground facilities at or contiguous to the site is based upon information and data furnished to Owner and Engineer by owners of such underground facilities or others, and Owner and Engineer do not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless it is expressly provided otherwise in the Supplementary Conditions. 4.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective bidders with respect to subsurface conditions, other physical conditions and underground facilities, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing or unanticipated conditions appear in Paragraph 4.2 and 4.3 of the General Conditions. 4.5 Before submitting a bid each bidder will be responsible to obtain such additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface and underground facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction to be employed by bidder and safety precautions and programs incident thereto or which bidder deems necessary to determine its bid for performing and furnishing the Work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Instructions to Bidders 00200 - 2 2002 Northwest Commercial Park A-ALBEV 0113 L~ fl 1 4.6 On request, Owner will provide each bidder access to the site to conduct such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies as each bidder deems necessary for submission of a bid. Bidder shall obtain all necessary permits and shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations, investigations, tests and studies. 4.7 Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of the general nature of the Work that is to be performed at the site by Owner or others (such as utilities and other prime Contractors) that relates to the Work for which a bid is to be submitted. On request, Owner will provide to each bidder for examination access to or copies of Contract Documents (other than portions thereof related to price) for such Work. 4.8 The submission of a bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by bidder that bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception the bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents and applying the specific means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (if any) that may be shown or indicated or expressly required by the Contract Documents, that bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities and discrepancies that bidder has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolutions thereof by Engineer is acceptable to bidder and that the Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performing and furnishing the Work. 5. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS FOR WORK, ETC. The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of--way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work, are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment or storage of materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work are to be obtained and paid for by Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities are to be obtained and paid for by Owner unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 6. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA ' 6.1 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by Engineer as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than ten days prior to the date for opening of bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 6.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by Owner or Engineer. 7. BID SECURITY 7.1 Each bid must be accompanied by bid security made payable to Owner in an amount of five percent of the bidder's maximum bid price and in the form of a certified or bank check or a Bid Bond (on form attached, if a form is prescribed) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraph 5.1 of the General Conditions. 7.2 Bid security must be accompanied by bidder's individual, partnership, or corporate acknowledgment, and by acknowledgment of Corporate Surety. Attorneys-in-fact who sign Bid 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Instructions to Bidders ' A-ALBEV 0113 00200 - 3 Bonds must file with the bond a certified and effective dated copy of their Power of Attorney. Bid Bonds must contain original signatures. 7.3 The bid security of the successful bidder will be retained until such bidder has executed the Agreement, furnished the required Contract security and met the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon the bid security will be returned. If the successful bidder fails to execute and deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Contract security within fifteen days after the Notice of Award, Owner may annul the Notice of Award and the bid security of that bidder will be forfeited. The bid security of the three lowest bidders may be retained by the Owner until the Agreement is signed and substituted with the bonds as set forth in Paragraph 2 of the Bid Form, whereupon bid security furnished by such bidders will be returned. Bid security of other bidders will be returned within seven days after the bid opening. 8. CONTRACT TIME The number of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be substantially completed and also completed and ready for final payment (the term "Contract Time" is defined in Paragraph 1.12 of the General Conditions) are set forth in the Summary of Work and the Agreement. 9. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, are set forth in the Summary of Work and the Agreement. 10. SUBSTITUTE OR "OR-EQUAL" ITEMS The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Project Manual, without consideration of possible substitute or "or-equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in .the Drawings or specified in the Project Manual that a substitute or "or-equal" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by Contractor, if acceptable to Engineer, application for such acceptance will not be considered by Engineer until after the Effective Date of the Agreement. The procedure for submissions of any such application by Contractor and considerations by Engineer is set forth in Paragraphs 6.7.1, 6.7.2 and 6.7.3 of the General Conditions and may be supplemented in the General Requirements. 11. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS 11.1 If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations (including those who are to furnish the principal items of material and equipment) to be submitted to Owner in advance of a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, apparent successful bidder, and any other bidder so requested, shall within five days after bid opening submit to Owner a list of all such subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the Work for which such identification is required. Such list shall be accompanied by an experience statement with pertinent information regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each such subcontractor, supplier, person or organization if requested by Owner. An Owner or Engineer who after due investigation has reasonable objection to any proposed subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, may before the Notice of Award is given request apparent successful bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in bid price. Instructions to Bidders 00200 - 4 2002 Northwest Commercial Park A-ALBEV 0113 t If apparent successful bidder declines to make any such substitution, Owner may award the Contract to the next lowest bidder that proposes to use acceptable subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations. The declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the bid security of any bidder. Any subcontractor, supplier, or other person or organization listed and to whom Owner or Engineer does not make written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to Owner and Engineer subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Agreement as provided in Paragraph 6.8.2 of the General Conditions. 12. BID FORM 12.1 The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents; additional copies may be obtained from Engineer. 12.2 All blanks on the Bid Form must be completed by printing in ink or by typewriter. 12.3 Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or avice-president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal (if any) must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. -The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature. 12.4 Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner, whose title must appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature. 12.5 All names must be typed or printed in ink below the signature. 12.6 The bid must contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda (the numbers of which must be filled in on the Bid Form). 12.7 The address, telephone, and facsimile numbers for communications regarding the bid must be shown. 12.8 Evidence of authority to conduct business as an out-of--state corporation where the Work is to be performed shall be provided in accordance with paragraph 3 above. 13. SUBMISSION OF BIDS 13.1 Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid and shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope, marked with the Project title and name and address of the bidder and accompanied by the bid security and other required documents. If the bid is sent through the mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope must be enclosed in a separate envelope with the notation "BID ENCLOSED" on the face of it. 13.2 Bids arriving after time set will be returned unopened. 13.3 Telephone or facsimile bids and bid bonds will not be considered. 14. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 14.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where bids are to be submitted at any time prior to the opening of bids. 14.2 No bidder may withdraw a bid within the number of days specified on the Bid Form after the actual opening thereof. Should there be reasons why the Contract cannot be awarded within the specified period, the time may be extended by mutual agreement between the Owner and the bidder. 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Instructions to Bidders ' A-ALBEV 0113 00200 - 5 15. OPENING OF BIDS Bids will be opened and read aloud publicly at the place where bids are to be submitted. An abstract of the amounts of the base bids and major alternates will be made available to bidders after the opening bids. 16. BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE All bids will remain subject to acceptance as set forth in paragraph 2 of the Bid Form, but Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any bid and return the bid security prior to that date. 17. AWARD OF CONTRACT 17.1 Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids, including without limitation the rights to reject any or all nonconforming, non-responsive, unbalanced or conditional bids and to reject the bid of any bidder if Owner believes that it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make an award to that bidder, whether because the bid is not responsive or the bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by Owner. Owner also reserves the right to waive all informalities not involving price, time or changes in the Work and to negotiate Contract terms with the successful bidder. Discrepancies between the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of the words. 17.2 In evaluating bids, Owner will consider the qualifications of the bidders, whether or not the bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award. 17.3 Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of bidders, proposed subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to Owner's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 17.4 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest bidder whose evaluation by Owner indicates to Owner that the award will be in the best interests of the Owner. 17.5 If the Contract is to be awarded, Owner will give the successful bidder a Notice of Award within 5 days after the day of award. 18. CONTRACT SECURITY Paragraph 5.1 of the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions set forth Owner's requirements as to Performance and Payment Bonds. When the successful bidder delivers the executed Agreement to Owner, it must be accompanied by the required Performance and Payment Bonds found in this Project Manual (see Sections 00611 and 00613). 19. SIGNING OF AGREEMENT When Owner gives a Notice of Award to the successful bidder, it will be accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with all other written Contract Documents attached. Within fifteen days Instructions to Bidders 00200 - 6 2002 Northwest Commercial Park A-ALBEV 0113 t n 1 L~ r DOCUM ENT 00410 BID FORM Contractor's Name PROJECT IDENTIFICATION: 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Albertville, Minnesota SEH No. A-ALBEV 0113 THIS BID IS SUBMITTED TO: Honorable Mayor and City Council c/o Linda Goeb City Administrator 5485 Main Avenue Northeast P.O. BOX 9 Albertville, MN 55301-0009 1. The undersigned BIDDER proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an agreement with OWNER on the form included in the Contract Documents to perform and furnish all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Bid Price and within the Bid Time indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 2. BIDDER accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of bid security. This bid will remain subject to acceptance for 60 calendar days after the day of bid opening. BIDDER will sign and deliver the required number of .counterparts of the Agreement with the bonds and other documents required by the Bidding Requirements within 15 days after the date of OWNER's Notice of Award. 3. In submitting this bid, BIDDER represents, as more fully set forth in the Agreement, that: a. BIDDER has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents and the following Addenda (receipt of all which is hereby acknowledged): Date Number b. BIDDER has visited the site and become familiar with, and is satisfied as to the general, local and site conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance and furnishing of the Work. c. BIDDER is familiar with, and is satisfied as to all federal, state and local Laws and regulations that may ^ affect cost, progress, performance and furnishing of the Work. -' d. BIDDER has studied carefully all reports of all explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the site and all Drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the site (except underground facilities) which have been 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Bid Form A-ALBEV 0113 00410 - 1 1 t identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.2.1 of the General Conditions. BIDDER accepts the determination set forth in paragraph S.C. 4.2 of the Supplementary Conditions of the extent of the "technical data" contained in such reports and Drawings upon which BIDDER is entitled to rely as provided in paragraph 4.2 of the General Conditions. BIDDER acknowledges that such reports and Drawings are not Contract Documents and may not be complete for BIDDER'S purposes. BIDDER acknowledges that OWNER and ENGINEER do not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of information and data shown or indicated in the Bidding Documents with respect to underground facilities at or contiguous to the site. BIDDER has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for having done so) all such additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface and underground facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by BIDDER and safety precautions and programs incidental thereto. BIDDER does not consider that any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies or data are necessary for the determination of this bid for performance and furnishing of the Work in accordance with the times, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. e. BIDDER is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the site that relates to Work for which this bid is submitted as indicated in the Contract Documents. £ BIDDER has correlated the information known to BIDDER, information and observations obtained from visits to the site, reports and Drawings identified in the Contract Documents and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies and data with the Contract Documents. ~J g. BIDDER has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities or discrepancies that BIDDER has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to BIDDER, and the Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performing and furnishing the Work for which this bid is submitted. h. This bid is genuine and not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, firm or corporation, and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association, organization or corporation. BIDDER has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to submit a false or sham bid. BIDDER has not solicited or induced any person, firm or corporation to refrain from bidding; and BIDDER has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any advantage over any other bidder or over OWNER. i. (Any other representation required by Laws and Regulations.) 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Bid Form A-ALBEV 0113 00410 - 2 fl 1 1 f 1 1 4. BIDDER will complete the Work for the following price(s): UNIT PRICE BID Item No. Item Description Unit of Measure Approximate Quantity Unit Price Amount 1 MOBILIZATION L.S. 1.00 2 TRAFFIC CONTROL L.S. 1.00 3 CLEARING AND GRUBBING TREE 5.00 4 ROCK CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE EACH 2.00 5 SAWCUT BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT LIN FT 2,400.00 6 REMOVE BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT SQ YD 92.00 7 REMOVE CMP CULVERT LIN FT 112.00 8 REMOVE GRAVEL DRNEWAY EACH 1.00 9 SALVAGE & REINSTALL PIPE APRON EACH 3.00 10 SALVAGE & REINSTALL HDPE CULVERT LIN FT 12.00 11 SALVAGE & REINSTALL FENCE LIN FT 30.00 12 SALVAGE & REINSTALL SIGN TYPE C EACH 4.00 13 COMMON EXCAVATION (P) CU YD 27,832.00 14 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION (CV) (P) CU YD 10,709.00 15 SUBGRADE EXCAVATION (EV) CU YD 1,000.00 16 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC, TYPE 5 SQ YD 22,511.00 17 COMMON BORROW (LV) CU YD 4,716.00 18 ~ )LECT GRANULAR BORROW (CV) CU YD 13,876.00 19 COARSE FILTER AGGREGATE TON 1,025.00 20 RIP RAP, CLASS II CU YD 56.20 21 CLASS 5 AGGREGATE BASE (100%) (CV) (P) CU YD 6,172.00 22 CLASS 5 SHOULDERING AGGREGATE (100% CRUSHED LIMESTONE) (CV) (P) CU YD 236.00 23 BITUMINOUS TYPE 31B BASE COURSE TON 3,376.00 24 BITUMINOUS TYPE 41A BINDER COURSE TON 2,023.00 25 BITUMINOUS TYPE 41A WEAR COURSE TON 2,023.00 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Bid Form A-ALBEV 0113 00410 - 3 1 1 [~ n J 1 UNIT PRICE BID Item No. Item Description Unit of Measure Approximate Quantity Unit Price Amount 26 BITUMINOUS TACK COAT GAL 2,025.00 27 BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT SQ YD 23.00 28 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER, B618 LIN FT 8,315.00 29 COMMERCIAL CONCRETE DRIVEWAY APRON S YD Q 10.00 30 12" RCP CLASS V LIN FT 743.00 31 1 S" RCP CLASS V LIN FT 1,176.00 32 18" RCP CLASS V LIN FT 479.00 33 21" RCP CLASS V LIN FT 113.00 34 24" RCP CLASS III LiN FT 34.00 35 30" RCP CLASS III LIN FT 192.00 36 4" PERF. CORR. POLYETHYLENE DRAIN TILE W/O SOCK LIN FT 7,905.00 37 12" RC FES EACH 8.00 38 15" RC FES EACH 20.00 39 18" RC FES EACH 8.00 40 21" RC FES EACH 1.00 41 30" RC FES EACH 4.00 42 STORM SEWER MANHOLE 48" DIA. EACH 1.00 43 TDIYAPE II CATCH BASIN MANHOLE 48" EACH 13.00 44 TYPE II CATCH BASIN EACH 7.00 45 4" X 12" PVC WYE EACH 9.00 46 4" PVC SCH 40 RISER LIN FT 106.00 47 6" X 10" PVC WYE EACH 12.00 48 6" PVC SCH 40 RISER LIN FT 406.00 49 6" PVC SCH 40 SERVICE PIPE LIN FT 518.00 50 8" PVC SDR 26 (20'-25' DEPTH) LIN FT 50.00 51 10" PVC SDR 35 (0-15' DEPTH) LIN FT 1,738.00 52 10" PVC SDR 35 (15'-20' DEPTH) LIN FT 1,742.00 53 10" PVC SDR 26 (20'-25' DEPTH) LIN FT 618.00 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Bid Form A-ALBEV 0113 00410 - 4 1 1 1 t 1 1 UNIT PRICE BID Item No. Item Description. Unit of Measure Approximate Quantity Unit Price Amount 54 12" PVC SDR 26 (20'-25' DEPTH) LIN FT 1,169.00 55 12" PVC SDR 26 (25'-30' DEPTH) LIN FT 1,248.00 56 JACK/BORE 24" STEEL CASING PIPE (0.250" THICKNESS) LIN FT 250.00 57 JACK/BORE 24" STEEL CASING PIPE (0.312" THICKNESS) LIN FT 350.00 58 SANITARY SEWER MANHOLE (0'-10' DEPTH) EACH 31.00 59 EXTRA DEPTH SANITARY SEWER MANHOLE LIN FT 333.00 60 CONNECT TO EXISTING SANITARY SEWER EACH 1.00 61 6" C900 WATER MAIN LIN FT 741.00 62 8" C900 WATER MAIN LIN FT 1,784.00 63 1-0" C900 WATER MAIN LIN FT 490.00 64 12" 0900 WATER MAIN LIN FT 4,474.00 65 6" GATE VALVE AND BOX EACH 21.00 66 8" GATE VALVE AND BOX EACH 5.00 67 10" GATE VALVE AND BOX EACH 1.00 68 12" GATE VALVE AND BOX EACH 8.00 69 HYDRANT EACH 11.00 70 CONNECT TO EXISTING WATER MAIN EACH 5.00 71 DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS LBS 5,242.00 72 3" POLYSTYRENE INSULATION SQ YD 75.00 73 4" SOLID LINE WHITE -EPOXY LIN FT 10,850.00 74 4" DASHED LINE WHITE -EPOXY LIN FT 400.00 75 4" DOUBLE SOLID LINE YELLOW - EPOXY LIN FT 4,310.00 76 4" SOLID LINE YELLOW -EPOXY LIN FT 910.00 77 24" SOLID LINE WHITE -EPOXY LIN FT 40.00 78 24" SOLID LINE YELLOW -EPOXY LIN FT 130.00 79 PVMT MESSAGE (RIGHT TURN, LEFT TURN ARROW) -EPOXY EACH 8.00 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Bid Form A-ALBEV 0113 00410 - 5 [~ 1 1 BIDDER accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of failure to complete the Work within the times specified in the Agreement. UNIT PRICE BID- Item No. Item Description Unit of Measure Approximate Quantity Unit Price Amount 80 PERMANENT BARRIER EACH 3.00 80 SIGN PANELS, TYPE "C" SQ FT 43.75 82 BALE CHECK EACH 27.00 83 SILT FENCE, HEAVY DUTY LIN FT 7,235.00 84 SODDING, TYPE LAWN SQ YD 2,300.00 85 SEEDING ACRE 32.50 86 SEED MIXTURE 90B POUND 1,485.00 87 SEED MIXTURE 15B POUND 27.00 88 SEED MIXTURE 25B POUND 100.00 89 MULCH MATERIAL TYPE 1 TON 65.00 90 DISC ANCHORING ACRE 32.50 91 COMMERCIAL FERTILIZER POUND 6,500.00 Total Bid for all Unit Prices $ Unit Prices have been computed in accordance with paragraph 11.9.2 of the General Conditions. BIDDER acknowledges that quantities are not guaranteed and final payment will be based on actual quantities determined as provided in the Contract Documents. 5. BIDDER agrees that the Work will be substantially complete and ready for final payment, in accordance with paragraph 14.13 of the General Conditions, on or before the dates or within the number of calendar days indicated in the Summary of Work. 6. Communications concerning this bid shall be addressed to the address of BIDDER indicated below. 7. The terms used in this bid which are defined in the General Conditions of the Construction Contract included as part of the Contract Documents have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. DATE SUBMITTED If BIDDER is: 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Bid Form A-ALBEV 0113 00410 - 6 ~~ ~ NNESOTA Department of Revenue Exemption from Surety Deposits for Non-Minnesota Contractors sD-E ~; ~_ m ``: .~ Q..: 3 ~ ~ ~~ ';;_ o' > ' '~ 3 _~.: o: m ~ , y _v .: nc ~~ ~ ' ~i _` , ~'.m m ~~ , C ~1 _N Contractor Minnesota I.D. number Address Phone number i ) City State Zip code Total contract amount Contact person Contract beginning dote: Projected contract completion date: Unit for which work was performed: Address Phone number City Srote ( Zip c) de Contact person Phone number Project location Contract number Business type (check appropriate boxl: ^ Corporation ^ S corporation ^ Partnership ^ Sole proprietor I request a waiver of surety deposit under Minnesota law (M.S. 290.9705) for the following reason: ^ 1 I have provided a cash surety or a bond secured by an insurance company licensed in Minnesota . (Attach o copy of the bonding agreement.) Bonding company Address Period of bond: Bonding Phone nvml ^ 2 I have done cons-ruction work in Minnesota during the past three calendar years and have fully complied with Minnesota law regarding Minnesota income, sales, and withholding taxes. t authorize sending o copy of this to the contracting agency and give the Department of Revenue permission to discuss this case and related taxes with the bonding company. Signature Dote :_ Revenue Department Certification •o-~ 4 6 a The above named out-of-state contractor rs exempt from the surety requirements of Minnesota Statute 290.9705 ~_ t Signature of authorized Revenue Department representative Date ~~ ~ _- Mail the original and one copy to: Minnesota Department of Revenue, Mail Station 6525, St. Paul, MN 55146-6525 Sroc4 No. 5002050 tRev. 6/931 Instructions for Form SD-E Nho should file? anon-Minnesota contractor or subcontrac- ~r has contracted for work in Minnesota, and he amount of the contract is over $100,000, 7e contractor or subcontractor may file Form D-E with the Minnesota Department of revenue. 'orm SD-E will be used to determine whether r not the contractor is exempt from the urety deposit requirements for the state of 4innesota. Nhen to file `the contractor wants to file for an exemp- on from the surety deposit requirements, orm SD-E should be filed at the beginning of ie contract. A separate approval is required ~r each project. How to file In order to submit Form SD-E, you must have a Minnesota business identification number. if you do not have a number, please contact the Department of Revenue for application information. To request a waiver, check the appropriate reason (number 1 or 2 on the form). If the first .reason is checked, you must fill in the information about the bond and attach a copy of the bonding agreement to form SD-E when you send it to the Department of Revenue. Send the form and attachments to the Department of Revenue for certification. If the form is certified by the department, we will return the certified form to you.Then you should keep a copy for your records and give the approved exemption to the contract owner or prime contractor. If the department determines that you are not exempt or you fail to provide a copy of the approved Form SD-E to the contract owner, 8 percent of each payment made to you as the contractor must be deposited with the Department of Revenue. These deposits will be returned when the project is completed, if you have complied with all Minnesota income, withholding, and sales tax laws. To request a refund of your deposit, complete a Refund of Surety Deposits for Non- Minnesota Contractors (Form SD-R)_ Any refunds will be issued at the current interest rate set by the Department of Revenue. r 1 Where to file The contractor should fill out Form SD-E and mail the original and one copy to: Minnesota Department of Revenue Mail Station 6525 St. Paul, MN 55146-6525 Use of information The Department of Revenue requires all the information requested on this form, except your telephone number. All information on this form is guaranteed private by state law. It cannot be given to others without your permission, except to the Internal Revenue Service, other states that guarantee it will be kept private, and certain county or state agencies.. Need help? If you need help or additional information to fill out this form, call 296-6]81 in the Twin Cities area. From elsewhere in Minnesota or from outside the state, call (toll-free) 1-800- 657-3777. r 1 1 r 1 DOCUMENT 00520 EJCDC STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR ON THE BASIS OF A STIPULATED PRICE THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the day of in the year 2002 by and BETWEEN CITY ~' OF ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA, hereinafter called OWNER, and hereinafter called CONTRACTOR. OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: ARTICLE 1. WORK CONTRACTOR shall complete all, .Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as follows: 2001 Northwest Commercial Park, includin radin a e ate base bituminous avement concrete g g g, gam' g P , curb and gutter, water main, sanitary sewer, storm sewer, sanitary sewer lift station, and turf establishment. Also included will be the construction of turn lanes on CSAH 19 (Labeaux Avenue), including grading culverts, street construction, and bituminous paving. ARTICLE 2. ENGINEER The Project has been designed by SEH, who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who is to act as OWNER's representative, who will assume all duties and responsibilities and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work, in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 3. CONTRACT TIME 3.1 The Contractor shall not commence work until written "Notice to Proceed" has been issued b the Owner. Y 3.2 The work for substantial completion will be completed on or before September 1, 2002. Substantial completion will include all pipe work, curb & gutter, base bituminous, all concrete work, and all turf establishment. 3.3 Final completion will be no later than June 15, 2003. ~, 3.4 Liquidated Damages: OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in above paragraph, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expense and difficulties involved in proving in a 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Standard Form of Agreement A-ALBEV 0113 00520 - 1 legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER Seven Hundred Fifty and 00/100 Dollars ($750.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in the above paragraph for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. After Substantial Completion, if CONTRACTOR shall neglect, refuse or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract Time or any proper extension thereof granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER Five Hundred and 00/100 Dollars ($500.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in pazagraph 3.1 for completion and readiness for final payment. ' ARTICLE 4. CONTRACT PRICE 4.1 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds at the unit prices as shown on the attached Contractor's bid, multiplied by the final quantities determined in accordance with Paragraph 9.10 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER, as provided in the General Conditions. 5.1 Progress Payments. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Application for Payment, as recommended by ENGINEER, on or about the 2nd Friday of each month during construction, as provided below. All progress payments will be on the basis of the progress of the Work measured by the schedule of values established in paragraph 2.07.A of the General Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed) or, in the event there is no schedule of values, as provided in the General Requirements. 5.2 Subject to provisions of SC 14.02, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage indicated below, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with paragraph 14.07 of the General Conditions. 95 percent of the Work completed. 5.3 Final Payment: Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with paragraph 14.07 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER, as provided in said pazagraph 14.07. ARTICLE 6. INTEREST All monies not paid when due, as provided in Article 14 of the General. Conditions, shall bear interest at the maximum rate allowed by law at the place of the Project. ARTICLE 7 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS . In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement, CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: Standard Form of Agreement 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 00520 - 2 A-ALBEV 0113 7.1 CONTRACTOR has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, Site, locality, and all local conditions and laws and regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work. 7.2 CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions which are identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions, and accepts the determinations set forth in paragraph SC 4.2 of the Supplementary Conditions of the extent of the technical data contained in such reports and drawings upon which CONTRACTOR is entitled to reply. 7.3 CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for having done so) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in paragraph 7.2 above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at or contiguous to the site, or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, as CONTRACTOR considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraph -4.02 of the .General Conditions. No additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes. 7.4 CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract Documents with respect to existing underground facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said underground facilities. No additional examinations, .investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar .information or data in respect of said underground facilities are or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.03 of the General Conditions. 7.5 CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.6 CONTRACTOR has iven ENG g INFER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies that he has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR. ARTICLE 8. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents which comprise the entire Agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work consist of the following: 8.1 This Agreement (pages 00520-1 to 00520- ,inclusive). 8.2 Exhibits to this Agreement (pages 00410-1 to 00410- ,inclusive). 8.3 Performance and other Bonds, identified as Documents 00611 and 00613. ~~~ 8.4 Noti ce of Award. 2002 Northwes t Commercial Park Standard Form of Agreement A-ALBEV 0113 00520 - 3 8.5 General Conditions (pages 1 to 42, inclusive). 8.6 Supplementary Conditions (pages 00800-1 to 00800- ,inclusive). 8.7 Project Manual bearing the title: 2001 Northwest Commercial Park consisting of Divisions and Sections, as listed in Table of Contents thereof. 8.8 Drawings, consisting of sheets numbered throu h inclusive with the followin eneral title: g ~ gg 8.9 Addenda numbers to ,inclusive. 8.10 CONTRACTOR'S Bid pages to ,inclusive. 8.11 Documentation submitted by CONTRACTOR prior to Notice of Award (pages to , inclusive). 8.12 The following which may be delivered or issued after the Effective Date of the Agreement and are not attached hereto: All Written Amendments and other documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents pursuant to paragraphs 3.4 and 3.5 of the General Conditions. ~, 8.13 The documents listed in paragraph 8.2 et seq. above are attached to this Agreement (except. as expressly noted otherwise above). There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 8. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in paragraph 3.4 and 3.5 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 9. NIISCELLANEOUS 9.1 Terms used in this Agreement will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 9.2 No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but without limitation moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. 9.3 OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its artners, successors, assi s and le al P ~~ g representatives, to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect of all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 9.4 Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue to be valid and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR, who agree that the Contract Documents shall be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision.. Standard Form of Agreement 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 00520 - 4 A-ALBEV 0113 r t t t t r t IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have signed this Agreement in triplicate. One counterpart each has been delivered to OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER. All portions of the Contract Documents have been signed or identified by OWNER and CONTRACTOR or by ENGINEER on their behalf. OWNER: City of Albertville, MN CONTRACTOR: By: Attest: Address for giving notices: 5975 Main Avenue Northeast, P.O. Box 9 Albertville, Minnesota 55301-0009 By: Attest: Address for giving notices: 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Standard Form of Agreement A-ALBEV 0113 00520 - 5 1 Document 00611 Bond Construction Performance Bond Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business): OWNER (Name and Address): CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: Amount: Description (Name and Location): BOND Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): Amount: Modifications to this Bond Form: CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corp. Seal) Company: (Corp. Seal) Signature: Signature: Name and Title: Name and Title: CONTRACTOR A PRIN IPAL S C SURETY Company: (Corp. Seal) Company: (Corp. Seal) j i gnature: S Signature: Name and Title: Name and Title: EJCDC No. 1910-28A (1984 Edition) Prepared through the joint efforts of The Surety Association of America, Engineers' Joint Contract Documents Committee, The Associated General Contractors of America, and the American Institute of Architects. 00611-1 1. The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2. If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except to participate in conferences as provided in Subparagraph 3.1. 3. If there is no Owner Default, the Surety's obligation under this Bond shall arise after: 3.1. The Owner has notified the Contractor and the Surety at its address described in Pazagraph 10 below, that the Owner is considering declazing a Contractor Default and has requested and attempted to arrange a conference with the Contractor and the Surety to be held not later than fifteen days after receipt of such notice to discuss methods of performing the Construction Contract. If the Owner, the Contractor and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner's right. If any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; and 3.2. The Owner has declared a Contractor Default and formally terminated the Contractor's right to complete the contract. Such Contractor Default shall not be declazed eazlier than twenty days after the Contractor and the Surety have received notice as provided in Subparagraph 3.1; and 3.3. The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to the Surety in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract in accordance with the terms of the contract with the Owner. 4. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take one of the following actions: 4.1. Arrange for the Contractor, with consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract; or 4.2. Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or through independent contractors; or 4.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and the contractor selected with the Owners concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Pazagraph 6 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner resulting from the Contractor's default; or 4.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances: 1. After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, tender payment therefor to the Owner; or 2. Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner citing reasons therefor. 5. If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 4 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond fifteen days after receipt of an additional written notice for the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Subparagraph 4.4, and the Owner refuses the payment tendered or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: Short Elliott Hendrickson Inc. P.O. Box 1717 St. Cloud, MN 56302-1717 320.229.4300 6. After the Owner has terminated the Contractor's right to complete the Construction Contract, and if the Surety elects to act under Subparagraph 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3 above, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. To the limit of the amount of this Bond, but subject to commitment by the Owner of the Balance of the Contract Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the Construction Contract, the Surety is obligated without duplication for: 6.1 The responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract; 6.2 Additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor's Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Pazagraph 4; and 6.3 Liquidation damages, or if no liquidated damagesare specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance ornon-performance of the Contractor. 7. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or it heirs, executors, administrators, or successors. 8. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase order and other obligations. 9_ Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of .the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after Contract Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. 10. Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature page. I I. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be perforned, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 12. Definitions. 12.1. Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all property adjustments have been made, including allowance to the Contractor of any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract. 12.2. Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the signature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. 12.3. Contractor Default: Failure to the Contractor, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with the terms of the Construction Contract. 12.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Contractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof AGENT OR BROKER: Name: _ Address: Phone: t 1 M r r 1 1 1 0 f 1 00611-2 Document 00613 Bond # ~ Construction Payment Bond Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business): OWNER (Name and Address): CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: Amount: Description (Name and Location): BOND Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): Amount: Modifications to this Bond Form: CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL. S URETY Company: (Corp. Seal) Company: (Corp. Seal) Signature: Signature: Name and Title: Name and Title: CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corp. Seal) Company: (Corp. Seal) Signature: Signature: Name and Title: Name and Title: ,~ EJCDC No. 1910-28B (1984 Edition) Prepazed through the joint efforts of The Surety Association of America, Engineers' Joint Contract Documents Committee, The Associated General Contractors of America, and the American Institute of Architects, American Subcontractors Association, and the.Associated Specialty Contractors. 00613-1 1. The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2. With respect to the Owner, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor: 2.1 Promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due Claimants, and 2.2 Defends, indemnifies and holds harmless the Owner from all claims, demands, liens or suits by any person or entity who furnished labor, materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, provided the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) of any claims, demands, liens or suits and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens or suits to the Contractor and the Surety, and provided there is no Owner Default. 3: With respect to Claimants, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due. 4. The Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants under this Bond until: 4.1 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor have given notice to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim. 4.2 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor. 1. Have famished written notice to the Contractor and set a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, within 90 days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the claim stating, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim and the name of the party to whom the materials were furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed; and 2. Have either received a rejection in whole or in part from the Contractor, or not received within 30 days of famishing the above notice any communication from the Contractor by which the Contractor has indicated the claim will be paid directly or indirectly, and 3. Not having been paid within the above 30 days, have sent a written notice to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and enclosing a copy of the previous written notice furnished to the Contractor. 5. If a notice required by Paragraph 4 is given by the Owner to the Contractor or to the Surety, that is sufficient compliance. 6. When the Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 4, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take the following actions: 6.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within 45 days after receipt of the claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that aze disputed. 6.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any disputed amounts. 7. The Surety's total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety. 8. Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any Construction Performance Bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: Short Elliott Hendrickson Inc. P.O. Box 1717 St. Cloud, NIN 56302-1717 320.229.4300 funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract aze dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and the Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owner's priority to use the funds for the completion of the work. 9. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants or others for obligations of the Contractor that aze unrelated to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligations to make payments to, give notices on behalf of, or otherwise have obligations to Claimants under this Bond. 10. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or torelated subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. 11. No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant gave the notice required by Subparagraph 4.1 or Clause 4.2 (iii), or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were famished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provision of this Paragraph aze void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a,defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. 12. Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature page. Actual receipt of notice by Surety, the Owner or the Contractor, however accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received at the address shown on the signature page. 13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirements shall be deemed deletedherefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is, that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 14. Upon request by any person or entity appeazing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made. 15. DEFINITIONS 15.1. Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to famish labor, materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Contract. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation in the terms "labor, materials or equipment" that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic's lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials or equipment were famished. 15.2. Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the signature page including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. 15.3.Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Contractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. AGENT OR BROKER: Name: _ Address: Phone: f 1 f r r i i t L 1 00613-2 t DOCUMENT 00620 NOTICE OF AWARD To: Date: Contract: Project: OWNER's Project No. You are notified that your Bid dated , 200_, for the above Contract has been considered. -• You are the apparent Successful Bidder and have been awarded a Contract for the above referenced project. The Contract Price is Dollars ($). Copies of the proposed Agreement accompany this Notice of Award. Additional sets of Project Manuals and Drawings will be sent to you under separate cover and are not part of this Notice. You must comply with the following conditions precedent within fifteen days of the date of this Notice of Award; that is by 1. Deliver the following documents to the ENGINEER: 2 Notice of Award 3 Agreements 2 Performance Bonds and Payment Bonds 2 Certificates of Insurance 2. (List other conditions). N/A Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle OWNER to consider your bid in default, to annul this Notice of Award, and to declare your bid security forfeited. Within fifteen days after you comply with the above conditions, OWNER will return to you one fully- . executed counterpart of the Contract Documents. SEH By: Title: Project Engineer ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE Receipt of the above Notice of Award is hereby acknowledged by this day of , 200 BY Title c: Owner 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DOCUMENT 00630 NOTICE TO PROCEED To: Contract: Project: OWNER's Project No. Dated: You are hereby notified that the Contract Times under the above contract will commence to run on . By that date, you are to start performing your obligations under the Contract Documents. In accordance with Article 3 of the Agreement, the date of Substantial Completion is ,and the date of readiness for final payment is Also, before you may start any Work at the Site, you must: Please return two acknowledged copies of this Notice to Proceed promptly. SEH By: Title: Project Engineer ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE Receipt of the above Notice to Proceed is hereby acknowledged by day of , 200 By Title G:\stds\eng\specs\stc~oud\Word\00630. doc this DOCUMENT 00640 CHANGE ORDER NO. OWNER CONTRACTOR ENGINEER Contract Project SEH DATE OWNER's No You are directed to make the following changes m the Contract Documents: Description: ITIJ~~I UESCIt[PTiON UN1T iTNIT -. COST QUANTITY AyIOUNT Reason for Change Order: Attachments (List of documents supporting change): CHr1IVGE IN CONTRACT TIMES ITEM CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE Substantial Completion _ Ready for Final Payment Original Contract Price: et increase erease om previous. ange Order No. to Contract price prior to the Change Order: Net increase (decrease) of this Change Order: Contract price with all approved Change Orders: RECOMMENDED: SEH PO Box 1717 St. Cloud, MN 56302-1717 By: Title: Date: APPROVED: Owner By: Title: Date: ACCEPTED: Contractor By: Title: Date: DOCUMENT 00650 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE NO. OWNER DATE CONTRACTOR ENGINEER SEH Contract OWNER's No: Project You are directed to proceed promptly with the following change(s): Ttcro Description Unite Unit Cost' Quantity Amount TOTAL $ 0.00 Purpose of Work Change Directive: Attachments: (List of documents supporting change) If OWNER or CONTRACTOR believe that the above change has affected Contract Price, any claim for a Change Order based thereon will involve one or more of the following methods, as defined in the Contract Documents: ~- Unit Price ~--, Lump Sum ~ Cost of the Work Estimated increase (decrease) in the Contract Price: Estimated increase (decrease) in the Contract Time: $ Substantial Completion: days. I c ange mvo ves an increase, t e estuna a amount Ready for Final Payment: days. is not to be exceeded without further authorization. RECOMMENDED: APPROVED: ACCEPTED: SEH Owner Contractor By: By: By: Title: Title:. Title: Date: Date: Date: G:~stds\eng\specs\Stcloud\Word\00650. doc 1 1 ' DOCUMENT 00660 ' RECEIPT AND WAIVER OF MECHANIC'S LIEN RIGHTS ' 1. This is a LEGAL INSTRUMENT and must be executed accordingly by officers of corporations and by partners in co-partnerships. 2. It is important that ALL the blanks be completed and the AMOUNT PAII) BE SHOWN. 3. A receipt similar to this or legal waiver of lien rights will be required for all plumbing, heating, plastering. ' materials, etc. 4. NO ERASURES OR ALTERATIONS ARE ALLOWED. ' DATE: The undersigned hereby acknowledges receipt of the sum of $ CHECK ONLY ONE r 1) as partial payment for labor, skill, and material furnished or to be furnished 2) as payment for all labor, skill, and material furnished or to be furnished (except the sum of $ as retainage or holdback) .. 3) as full and final payment for all labor, skill, and material furnished or to be furnished to the following described real property: (legal description, street address, or project name) and, for value received, hereby waives all rights acquired by the undersigned to file or record mechanic's liens against said real property for labor, skill, or material furnished to said real property (only for the amount paid if box 1 is checked, and except for retainage shown if box 2 is checked); the undersigned affirms that all material furnished by the undersigned has been paid for, and all subcontractors employed by the undersigned have been paid in full, EXCEPT: Company Name ~1 ~I n fl Signature Title Address Address 1 0 DOCUMENT 00670 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION DATE OF ISSUANCE OWNER CONTRACTOR Contact Project Owner's Contract No. ENGINEER'S Project No, This Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to all Work under the Contract Documents or to the following specified parts thereof: The Work to which this Certificate applies has been reviewed by the authorized representatives of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER, and that Work is hereby declared to be substantially complete in accordance with the Contract Documents on DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto. This list may not be all-inclusive, and the failure to include an item in it does not alter the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to complete all the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The items in the tentative list shall be completed or corrected by CONTRACTOR within days of the above date of Substantial Completion. The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Certificate: (For items to be attached, see definition of Substantial Completion as supplemented and other specifically noted conditions precedent to achieving Substantial Completion, as required by Contract Documents.) This Certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents, nor is it a release of CONTRACTOR'S obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Authorized Signatures) RECOMMENDED: SEH By: Title: Date: APPROVED: Owner By: Title: Date: ACCEPTED: Contractor By: Title: Date: r~ ' DOCUMENT 00680 FINAL STATEMENT ' DATE OF ISSUANCE OWNER CONTRACTOR Project Location Project Description ' Owner's Contract No. ENGINEER'S Project No, Agreement Date Notice to Proceed Date ' Date Punch List Corrected Substantial Completion Date Expiration Date of Vegetation Maintenance Period ' Contractor's Statement: To the best of my 1. the above inf 2. all items of w 3. all progress p full all oblig 4. title to all ma ' free and clear Authorized Si natures ~ g ~ RECOMMENDED SEH B: Y Title: Project Engineer Date: ' G:\Stds\eng\Specslstcioud\Word\00680.doc knowledge and belief: ormation is true and correct as indicated; ork have been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents; ayments received from the Owner for work under this Contract have been applied to discharge in ations of the Contractor incurred in connection with said work; and terials and equipment incorporated in said work will pass to the Owner at the time of fmal payment of all liens, claims, security interests, and encumbrances. ACCEPTED Contractor By: Title: Date: This document has important legal consequences- consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its use or codification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated Project and the ontrolling Law_ I~ 1 ~~ 1 STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Prepared by ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCU1VfF.N'I'S COlbIlbiTI'TEE and ~~ Lssued and Published Jointly By / ~, National Society of ~~ Professional Engineers A M E R I C A N CONSULTING Pmlttslonal Enplneerz In Pfiale Practla AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS ENGINEERS COUNCIL PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE ' a practice division of the NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS AMERICAN CONSULTING ENGINEERS COUNCIL AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CML ENGINEERS This document has been approved and endorsod by ' The Associated General ..:'' a Contractors of America ,~ Construction Specifications Institute ~-~ _ ~ ~~ These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Owner-Contractor Agreements (No_ 1910-8-A-1 or 1910- 8-A 2) (1996 Editions). Their provisions are interrelated and a change in one tray necessitate a change in the other. Comments concerning their usage are contained in the EICDC User's Guide (No. 1910-50). For guidance in the preparation of Supplementary Conditions, see Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions (No. 1910-1'n (1996 Edition}. EJCDC No. 1910-8 (1996 Edition) . TABLE OF CONTENTS - - Pam ~TICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY ........................ . ............00700 - 6 1.01 Defined Terms . . ........ . ..... . . ....... . .........................00700 - 6 1.02 Terminology 00700 - 8 TIC LE 2 - PRELIl~IWARY MATTERS ......... . ................................. .00700 - 9 2.01 Delivery of Bondy .................................................00700 - 9 2.02 2.03 Copies of Documents ............................... . . . .............00700 - 9 Commence-nent of Contrail Time; Notice [o Proceed .00700 - 9 2.04 Starting the Work ..................................... . .... . . . ....00700 - 9 2.05 2.06 Before Starting Construction ......................... . . . . . . . . . ........ Preconttruction Conference .00700 - 9 00700 10 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules ....................................... 00700. - 10 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDWG, REUSE . - .:................. 00700 - 10 3.01 Intent ........ - ' • 00700 10 3.02 Reference Standards .... ....... . . . . .............................. = .00700 10 3.03 Reporting and Ruolving Discrepancies .......... ................. .. 00700 - 11 3.04 3.05 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents ........................... Reuse of Documents ............................................... 00700.- I 1 00700 - 11 TIC LE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; 4.01 REFERENCE POWTS ........ - • . . . . . ................. . . . . . . ........ Availability of lands 00700 = 11 00700 - 11 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ........... . . . ..................... . . 00700 12 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ............ . ................:.. 00700 - 12 4.04 . Underground Facilities 00700-13 4.05 :........................................... Reference Points 00700 - 13 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Sue ........... . . . .................. 00700 - 14 TIC LE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE . . . . . ........................ . • - - - ......... 00700 - 15 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds ....... ......... . . . ............ 00700 - 15 5.02 licensed Sureties and Insurers ...... . . . ............................... 00700 - 15 5.03. 5.04 Certificates of Insurance ....... . .... . ...................... ... _ .. .. . ......... . . . .... . ...... . . CONTRACTOR'S Liability Insurance 00700 - 15 00700 - 15 5.05 ....... : OWNER'S Liability Insurance .... ... . ........................ 00700 - 16 5.06 Property Insurance . . ............. ... . .:.... ..:...:.. ....... 00700 - 16 ' 5.07 5.08 Waiver of Rights .......:... . . . . . . . ............................... Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds . 00700 - 17 00700 - 18 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace ........................ 00700 - 18 5.10 ~CLE 6 - Partial Utilizesion, Ac:lhlowledgment ojPropcrty Insurer ........................ CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES .... . ................ . ..... ...... 00700 - 18 00700 - 18 6.01 . Supervision and Supavuendcnce . ...................................... 00700 - 18 6.02 Labor; Working Hours ..................... . ....................... 00700 - 19 6.03. Services, Materials, and Equipment . .. . 00700 - 19 6.04 Progress Schedule .............. ........ .......... 00700 - 19 6.05 Substitutes and 'Or-Equals" .......................................... 00700 - 19 6.06 6.07 Concerning Subconrradors, Suppliers, and Others ............................ Patent Fees and Royalties 00700 - 20 00700 - 21 6.08 Pernits ....................................................... 00700 - 21 6.09 6.10 Laws and Regulations .. ...... . . . . . .... . . . ................ ...... Taxes .......... . . . . ....................................:..... 00700 - 22 00700 - 22 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas .. ..... . . . .......... . . . .................. 00700 - 22 6.12 Record Documenu ............. . .............. - - - ............. 00700 - 22 6.13 . . Safety and Protection 23 00700 6.14 ... . ............................... . .. ...... Safety Representative = 00700 23 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs ....................................:. 00700 - 23 00700 - 3 6.16 Emcrgencies .......................... . . . . ................... . .. 00700 - 23 - - .17 Shop~rawings and Sample ...... . . .. . ............................... 00700 - 23 , 6. l8 6.19 Continuing the Work ...... - - . . . ................ . . . ............... CONIRACTOR's Gcneral Warranty and Guarantee ........................... 00700 - 24 ~ . 00700 - 25 6.20 Indemnification .................... . . . . • • - - - ..................... 00700 - 25 1RTICLE 7 -OTHER WORK .............. . 00700 - 26 7.01 . . . ..................... . • - - - - - ..... Related Work at Sitc ............................................... 00700 - 26 , 7.02 Coordination ................................................... 00700 - 26 1RTICLE 8 -OWNER'S RESPONSIBILFTIES ......................................... 00700 - 26 8.01 Communications to Contractor 00700 - 26 8.02. Replacement of ENGINEER .................................... . ..... 00700 - 26 , 8.03 Furnish Data ..................... . . . ...... ................... 00700 - 26 8.04 8.05 Pay Promptly When Due ...........: . . .............................. - Lands-and Easements; Reports and Tests ...................... . . . ......... 00700 - 26 00700 - 26 8.06 Inrurancc ..................................................... 00700 - 27 8.07 Change Orden .................. ~.. - - - - :: - ..-....:................ 00700 - 27 8.08 Inspections, Teu, and Approvals ....... _ .. .. 00700 - 27 , 8.09 Limitations on OWNER's Responsibilitie .................. . .............. 00700 - 27 . 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ..... . ........ ............. 00700 - 27 8.1I Evidence of Financial Arrangcmenu ....... . ...................... .. 00700 - 27 . . ........................ UtTICLE 9 -ENGINEER'S STATUS DURWG CONSTRUCTION . 00700 - 27 - 9.01 OWNER'S Representative ... . ...............:............. - - - ..... 00700 - 27 9.02 9.03 Yuits to Site. .............. . ..................................... Project Representative ...... . ... . ................ . - - • - - . • - - - ... 00700 - 27 00700 - 27 9.04 Clarifications and Interpretations ......... ............. . ....... . . . ..... 00700 - 28 9.05 Authorized Variations in Work . . . . .................:... - - - ............ 00700 - 28 9.06 Rejecting Defective Work . _ .......... 00700 - 28 9.07 Shop Drawings, Change Orden and Payments .. . . .......................... 00700 - 28 9.08 Determinations for Unit Price Work ....... . .................. . ..... . .... 00700 - 28 9.09 Decisions on Rcquiremenu of Contract Documents and Acccptability of Work . 00700 - 28 9.10 Limitations on ENGINEER'S Authority and Rcsponsibilitiu ......... . . ........... 00700 - 28 ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS ...................... . ............ 00700 - 29 .10.01 10.02 Authorized Changes in the Work .. . ............................ . ....... Unauthorized C7iarigu in the Work .. 00700 - 29 00700 - 29 10.03 Execution of (Mange Orders ..... _ ......: ..... . ..... . ................. 00700 - 29 10.04 Notification to Swery ............... . .............................. 00700 - 29 10.05 Claims and Dispute . • - 00700 - 30 ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; CASH ALLOWANCES; UNTt PRICE WORK .............. 00700 - 30 11.01 Cost of the Work .:......... . .. . ........................... ..... 00700 - 30 11.02 11.03 Cash AUowancu ... . . ..... . ................................... Unit Price Work - 00700 - 32 00700 - 32 ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES ............. 0070U - 33 12.01 12.02 C7iarige of Contract Pricc .............. . . . . . . . ...................... Change of Contract TFmes 00700 - 33 00700 - 33 12.03 Delays Beyond CONTRACTOR'S Control . .... . ........................... 00700 - 33 12.04 Delays Within CONTRACTOR'S Control ................ . . . . • - - ........... 00700 - 34 12.05 Delays Beyond OWNER's and CONTRACTOR'S Control ......... . .............. 00700 - 34 .12.06 Delay Damage ........................................ . ......... 00700 - 34 ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF 13.01 DEFECTIVE WORK ................... . . . . ........................ Notice of Defects ............ . ........ . . . ........................ 00700 - 34 00700 - 34 13.02 Access to Work ............... .._........---...----••---....... 00700-34 13.03 13.04 Tcsu and Inspections ............. . ............... . . . .... . ......... Uncovering Work . ...... . ................. ................ 00700 - 34 00700 - 35 13.05 OWNER May Stop the Work ....... . .. . . . • - - ........ - , • - - ........... _ . 00700 - 35 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Wont . . . .. . ..................... . ... . . 00700 - 35 00700 - 4 13.07 Correction Period ................. . . . . ... . .......... . ............ 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work ............. . .......................... 13.09 OWNER'May Correct Defective Work .............. . ..... . ........ . . . . . . . ~RTICLE 14 -PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ............. . .......... 14.01 Schedule of Values ................................................ 14.02 Progress Payments ....... . . . . .......................... . . . ........ 14.03 CONITt,4CTOR's Warranty of Title 14.04 Substantial Completion .. . ......................................... 14.05 Partiol Utilizvtion ..... . ........................ ............... • 14.06 Final Itrspcaion ... . ................... . . . . • - - ......... • .......... 14.07 ~ Final Payment - - • - - - ... 14.08 Final Completion Delayed ......................... . . . ............... 14.09 Waiver of Claims ........... . .............................. . _ ...:: TICLE 15 -SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION .. . ....................... 00700 - 3S ~ - 00700 - 36 00700 - 36 00700 - 36 00700 - 36 00700 - 37 00700 - 38 00700 - 38 00700 - 39 00700 - 39 00700 - 39 00700 - 40 - 00700 40 00700 - 40 15.01 15.02 15.03 OWNER May Suspend Work .................................... . . . . .. OWNER May Terminate for Cause .......:..... ~..:.- .. - - ................ OWNER May Terminate For Convenience ...................... ....... _ . 00700 - 40 00700 - 40 00700 - 4.1 IS.04 CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate ....... . ................. . ... . . ARTICLE 16 -'DISPUTE RESOLUTION .................. . ... . ...... . • . - - .......... 16.01 Methods and Proccdures ~[tTICLE 17 - MISCEZLANEpUS ...... . ............. . ........................... 17.01 Civittg Noticc .................................. . ................ 17.02 Computation of TFmcs .... . ................... ............ . .... . .. 17.03 C~mulativc Remcdies 17.04 Survival of Obligations ........... _ ........... . . . ................. -17.05 Controlling Law ................................................. 00700 - 41 00700 - 41 00700 - 41 00700 - 42 00700 - 42 00700 - 42 00700 - 42 00700 - 42 00700 - 42 I] 1 00700 - S GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY Contract Times, issued on or afar the Effective Dau of the Agreement. I.Ol Defrned Terms A. Wherever used in the Contract Documents and printed with initial or all capital letters, the arms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. 1. Addenda-Written or graphic instruments issued... prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, wrrect, or change the Bidding Requirements or the Contract Documents. 2. Agreement-The written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering the Work. 3. .lpplication for Payment-,The form acceptable to ENGINEER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR during the worse of the Work is requesting Progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 4. Asbestos-Any material that wntains more than one pcrtxat asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current anion levels estabIishcd by the United States Ocixtpational Safety and Health Administration. S. Bid-The offer or proposal of a bidder submitted on the prescn'bed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. 6. Bidding Documents-The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents ('including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). 7, Bidding Rcquiremarts-The Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid security form, if ate, a~ the Bid form with any supplements. 8. Bonds-Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of sestrity. 9. C7tange Order-A document r~ecommend~d by ENGINEER which is signed by CONTRACTOR and OWNER and suthorizcs an addition, ddctian, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contras Price or the 00700 - 6 10. Nairn-A demand or assertion by OWNER or CONTRACTOR sceking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respes to the terms of the Contract. A demand for monry or services by a third parry is not a Claim. 11. Contract-The entire and inugrated written agrecmertl between the OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work. The Contras supersedes prior negotiatiotu, rcprescntations, or agreements, whether writun or oral. 12. Contract Doc7vnarts-The Contras Documents establish the rights and obligations of the parties and include the Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contras Documents), CONTRACTOR'S Bid ('including documentation accompanying the Bid and a~ post Bid documentation submitted prior to the Notice of Award) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Notice to Procced, the Bonds, these General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings as [he same aze more specifically identified in the Agrcemcnt, together with all Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work Change Dirxtivcs, Fctd Orders, and ENGINEER'S written inurpretadons and clarifications issued on or afar the Effesive Dau of the Agreement. Approved Shop Drawings and the reports and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not Comas Documents. Only printed or hard espies of the items listed in this paragraph are Contras Docamcuu. Files in electronic media format of uzt, data, graphics, and the like that may be fiunished by OWNER to CONTRACTOR are not Contras Documents. 13. Contrnd Price-The moneys payable by OWNER to CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreemcat (subjes to the provisions of paragraph 11.03 in the cast of Unit Price Work). 14. Contnad TFmcs-The member of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve Substantial Completion; and (n~ wmpluc the work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by ENGINEER'S writun rxommcndation of final payment. 15. COMRACTOR-The individual or entity with whom OWNER has entered into the Agrcemcnt. fl ~~ u [I I 16. Cost of the Work-See paragraph 11.O1.A for definition. 17. Drawings-That part of the Contract Documenu prepared or approved by ENGINEER which graphically shows- the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by CONTRACTOR_ Shop Drawings and other CONTRACTOR submittals are not Drawings az so defined. 18. E,~`eclive Date of the Agreement-The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated, it meant the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. 19. ENGINEER-The individual or entity named az such in the Agreement. 20. ENGIIVEER's Cottrultant-An individual or entity having a contract with ENGINEER to furnish services as ENGINEER'S independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. 21. Field Order-A written order issued by ENGI- NEER which requires .minor changes in the Work but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 27. Milestone-A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate comple- tion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work_ 28. Notice ojAward-The written notice by OWNER to the apparent successful bidder stating that upon timely compliance by the apparent successful bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein, OWNER will sign and deliver the Agreement_ 29. Notice to Proceed-A written notice given by OWNER to CONTRACTOR fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to rem and on which CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work under - - -the Contact Documents. 22. General Requiremeras-Sections of Division 1 of the Specifications. The General Requiremenu pertain to all sections of the Specifications. 23. Hazardous Environmental Condition-The presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such quantities or circumstances that may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposod thereto in connection with the Work. 24. Hazardous Waste-The term Hazardous Waztc shall have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) az amended from time to time. 25. Laws and Regulations; laws or Regulations-A~ and all applicable laws,. talcs, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmeatal bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. 26. Liens=Charges, security interesu, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or personal property. 00700 - 7 30. OWNER-The individual, entity, public body, or authority with whom CONTRACTOR has entered into the Agreement and for whom. the Work is to be performed. 31. Partial Utilization-Use by OWNER of a substan- tially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 32. PCBs-Polychlorinated biphenyls. 33. Petroler~m-Petroleum, including crude oil or a~+ fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square inch absohrte). such az oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and oil mixed with other non-Hazardous Waste and crude ot1t. 34. Project-The total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part az may be indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 35_ Project Manual-The bound documentary information prepared for bidding and constructing the Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual, which may be bound in one or more volumes, is contained in the table(s) of contents. 36. Radioactive Material-Source, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defuxd by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq,) az amended from time to time. 37. Resident Pnvjed Representative-The authorized represcntative of ENGINEER who-may be assigned to the Site or any part thereof. 38. Samples-physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be j~8~- 39. Shop Dra-vings-All drawings, diagrams. illustra- tions, schedules, and other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for CON- TRACTOR and submitted by CONTRACTOR to illustrate some portion of the Work. 40. Site-Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by OWNER upon which the Work is to be performed, including righu~f--way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands furnished by OWNER which are designated for the use of CONTRACTOR 41. Spccifrcations-That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. 42. Subcontractor-An individual or entity having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site. 43. Substantial Completion-The time at which the. Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of ENGINEER, the Work (or a specif cd .part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The tei:ms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. 44. Supplementary Conditions-That part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these General Conditions. 45. Supplier-A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with a~ Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor. 4b. Undergrowed Facilities-All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults. tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid parolenm produce, telephone or other communications, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other Liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 47. Unit Price Work-Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 48. Work-The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable pare thereof required to be ,provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction, alI as required by the Contract Documents. 49. Work Cyiange Directive-A written statement to CONTRACTOR issued on or after the Effective Dau of the Agreement and signed by OWNER a~ recommended by ENGINEER ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen subsurface or physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or to emergencies. A Work Change Detective will not change _ the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the change ordered or documented by a Work Change Detective will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change_Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times _ 50. Written Amendment-A written statement modifying the Contract Documents, signed by OWNER and CONTRACTOR on or after the Effective Dau of the Agreement and normally dealing with the nonengincering or nontechnical rather than strictly construction-related aspects of the Contract Documents. 1.02 Terminology- A. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives 1. Whenever in the Contact Documents the terms "as allowed," `as approved," or terms of like effect or import are used, or the adjectives "reasonable," 'suitable," `acceptable," "proper," `satisfactory," or adjectives of lee effect or import are used to deureibe an action or determination of ENGINEER as to the Work, it is intended that such action or determination wt11 be solely to evaluate, in general, the completed Work for compliance with the rcquiremcnu of and information in the Contract Documents and conformance with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The 00700 - 8 ~7 1 .~ use of any such term or adjective shall not be effective to assign to ENGINEER any duty or authority to supervise ~or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the - provisions of paragraph 9.10 or any other provision of the ~Contraet Documents. B. Day 1. The word "day" shall constitute a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the nett midnight. ~C. Defective 1. The word "defective," when modifying the word _.. "Work," refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred ~a in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to ENGINEER'S recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by OWNER at Substantial Completion in accor- dance with paragraph 14.04 or 14.05). D. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide 1. The word "furnish," when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Sitc (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. 2. The word "install," when used in connection with scrvicu, .,,atrtiLc, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, ~or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 3. The words "perform" or "provide," when used m connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 4. When "furnish," "install," "perform," or "pro- vide" is not used in connection with services, materials, or equipment in a content clearly requiring an obligation ~of CONTRACTOR, "provide" is implied. E. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. rds or phrases which have swell-known technical or on industry or trade meaning are used in the Contrail Documents in accordance with such recognized ARTICLE 2 -PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds A. When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed Agreements to OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall also deliver eo OWNER such Bonds as CONTRACTOR may be required to furnish_ 2.02 Copies of Documents A. OWNER shall furnish to CONTRACTOR up to ten copies of the Contract Documents. Additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. 2.03 Comrnencement of Contras Tunes; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Procced may be given at any time within 30 days afar the Effective Date of the Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, whichever date is earlier_ 2.04 Starring the Work A. CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the Contract Times commence to run. 2.05 Before Starting Construction A. CONTRACTOR'S Review of Contract Documents: Before undertaking each part of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check an+d verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field measurements. CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in writing to ENGINEER any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrcpanry which CONTRACTOR may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding with any Work affected thereby; however, CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or ENGINEER for fat~ure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably should have known thereof. B. Preliminary Schedules: Within ten days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified 00700 - 9 in the General Requirements), CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for its timely review: - 1. a preliminary progress schedule indicating the limo (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including arty Milestones specified in the Contract Documents; 1. The progress schedule will be acceptable to ENGINEER if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within any specified Milestones and the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on ENGINEER responsibility for the progress schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work nor interfere with or relieve CONTRACTOR from CONTRACTOR'S full responsibility therefor. 2. a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals which will list cacti required submittal and the times for submitting, reviewing, and processing such submittal; and 3. a preliminary schedule .of values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which- when added together equal the Contras Frio and subdi- vides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. C. Evidence of Insurance: Before a~ Work at the Site is stared, CONTRACTOR and OWNER shall each deliver to the other,. with copies to cacti additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance which either of them or any additional insured may reasonably request) which CONTRACTOR and OWNER respectively are required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5. 2.06 Preconstrucrion Conference A. Within 20 days after the Conu~aci Times start to run, but before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, a~ others as appre~priae will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discttss the schedules referred to in paragraph Z.OS.B, procedures for handking Shop Drawings and other submittals, proctssing~Appliptions for Payment, and maintaining required ra;ords. 2.07 Inilral Acceptance ojSchedules A_ Unless otherwise provided in the Contras Docu- ments, at least un days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conferencx attended by CON- TRACTOR, ENGINEER. and others as appropriae will be held to review for acccptabtTity to ENGINEER as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with paragraph 2.OS.B. CONTRACTOR shall have an additional ten days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and rexubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to CONTRACTOR until acceptable schedules are submitted to ENGINEER. 2. CONTTtACTOR's schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals will be acceptable to ENGINEER if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals. :. 3_ CONT'RACTOR'S schedule of values will be acceptable to ENGINEER as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to component parts of the Work. ARTICLE 3 -CONTRACT DOCK: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE 3.01 Intern A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called foe by all_ B. It is the serest of the Contras Doatments to describe a functionally complete Project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contras Documents. A~ labor, doaimentation, services, mat~r~, or equipment that may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Docu- ments or from prevailing custom . or .trade usage as being required. to produce the intended result will be provided whether or not specifically called for at no additional cost to OWNER. C. Clarifications and interpretations of .the Contrau Documents shall be issued by ENGINEER as provided in Article 9. 3.02 Rcfcratce Standards A. Standards. Specifications, Codes.. Laws. and Regulations 1. Reference ro standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organisation, or association; or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, .shall mean the standard, sQecification, manual, code. or Laws or Regula- tions in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), 1 li ~~ u 00700 - 10 fl 1 except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the 3.04 Contract Documents. 2. No provision of ary such standard, specification, manual or code, or any instruction of a Supplier shall be effective to change the dudes or responsibilities of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, or ENGWEER, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employers from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall any such provision or instruction be effective to assign to OWNER, ENGINEER, or any of ENGINEER's Consultants, agents, or employees any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents.. ~03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies 1. If, during the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and ary provision of ary Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of a~ standard, specification, manual or code, or of any instruction of ary Supplier, CONTRACTOR shall report it to ENGWEER in writing- ai -once. CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergenry as requited by paragraph 6.16.A) until an amendment or supplement to the Contract.Documcnts has been issued by one of the methods indicated in paragraph 3.04; Provided, however, that CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or ENGWEER for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity, or dis- crepanry unless CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably should have known thereof. ~l LJ CI B. Resolving Discrepancies 1 _ Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity; or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and: a. the provisions of any standard, specification, manual, code, or instruction (whether or not specifi- cally incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents); or b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). Amending and Supplementing Contract Documerus A_ The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions. and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof in one or more of the following ways: (i) a Written Amendment; (ii) a Change Order; or (iii) a Work Change Drrcctive. B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more of the following ways: (i) a Field Order; (ii) ENGWEER's approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; or (iii) ENGWEER's written interpretation or clarification. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. CONTRACTOR and any Subcontractor or Supplier or other individual or entity performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with OWNER: (i) shall not have or acquire any ti8e to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of ENGWEER or ENGWEER's Consultant, including elearonic media editions; and (u7 shall not reuse any of such Drawmgs, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other projax without written consent of OWNER and ENGWEER and specific written verification or adaption by ENGWEER_ This prohibition will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work, or termination or completion of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude CONTRACTOR from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record Purposes. ARTICLE 4 - AVAII.ABII.iTY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL COIdDTTIONS; REFERENCE POWTS 4.01 Availability of Lands A. OWNER shall furnish the Site. OWNER shall notify CONTRACTOR of any encumbrances. or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which CONTRACTOR must comply in performing the Work. OWNER will obtain in a timely manner and pay for easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. If CONTRACTOR and OWNER are unable to agree on entitlement W or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Pricy or Contract Times, or both, as a result of any delay in OWNER's furnishing the Site, CONTRACTOR may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 00700 - I 1 B. Upon reasonable written request, OWNER shall furnish CONTRACTOR with a cucrcnt statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed and OWNER's interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic's or construction lice against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations. C. CONTRACTOR shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilitiu or storage of materials and equipment. 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. Reports and Drawings. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. those reports of ezploratiaas and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site that ENGINEER has used in preparing the Contract Docu- ments; and 2. those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) that ENGINEER has used in preparing the Contract Documents. B. Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR on Teclviical Data Authorized: CONTRACTOR may rely upon the general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions_ Except for such reliance on such "technical data," CONTRACTOR may not rely upon or make a~ Claim against OWNER, ENGINEER, or any of ENGINEER'S Consultants with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for CONTRACTOR's purposes, .including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by CONTRACTOR, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such ~ reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any CONTRAtr TOR interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any 'technical data" or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. 00700 - 12 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notice: If CONTRACTOR believes that a~ subsur- face or physical condition at or contiguous to the Site that is uncovered or revealed either: 1. is of such a nature as to establish that any "technical data' on which CONTRACTOR is entitled to rely as provided in paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or 2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents; or --- -3. - differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then CONTRACTOR shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof -and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in c:onncction therewith (except in an emergency as required by paragraph 6.16_A), notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing about .such condition. CONTRACTOR shall not further disturb such condition or perform a~ Work in connection therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so. B. ENGTNEER's Review: After t~eceipt of written notice as required by paragraph 4.03.A, ENGWEER will promptly review the pertinent condition, determine the necessity of OWNER's obtaining- additional- exploration or tests. with respect thereto, and advise OWNER in writing (with a coPY to CONTRACTOR) of ENGINEER'S findings and conclusions. C. Possible Price and 7Fmes Adjustments 1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, wdl be equitably adjusted w the extent that the czistcnce of such differing subsurface or physical condition causes an increase or decrease- in CONTRACTOR'S cost of, or time required for, perfor- mance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a. such condition must med any one or more of the categories described in paragraph 4.03.A; and b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a Unit Price Basis, a~+ adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of paragraphs 9.08 and 11.03. fl 1 2. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to ary adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if: 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 a. CONTRACTOR knew of the existence of such conditions at the time CONTRACTOR trade a final commitment to OWNER in respect of Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or b. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a restilt of airy examinatioq investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for CON- TRACTOR prior to CONTRACTOR'S making such final commitment; or c. CONTRACTOR failed to give the written notice within the time and as required by paragraph 4.03.A. 3. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. However, OWNER, ENGINEER, and ENGINEER's Consultants shall not be liable to CONTRACTOR for any claims,. costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by CONTRACTOR on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. 4.04 Underground Facilities A. Shmvn or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in .the Contract Documents with respect to xisting Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site based on information and data furnished to OWNER or NGINEER by the owners of such Underground Facilities, including OWNER, or by others. Unless it is otherwise ~xpressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions: t 1. OWNER and ENGINEER shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of a~+ such information or data; and 2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility for: a. reviewing and checking all such information and data, b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or , _ indicated in the Contract Documents, c. coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities, including OWNER, during construction, and d. the safety and protection of all such Under- ground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work_ B. Not Shmvn or Indicated 1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not shown or, indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accurary in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an ctnergcncy as required by paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to OWNER and ENGINEER. ENGINEER will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and .document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility. During such time, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility. 2_ If ENGINEER concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is ~ required, a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and document such consequences. An equitable adjustment shall b_ c made in the Contract Price of Contract Times. or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence or location of any Underground Facility that was .not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents and that CONTRACTOR did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of ary such adjustment in Contract Pricy or Contract Times, OWNER or CONTRACTOR nzay make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 4.05 Reference Points A: OWNER shall provide cngincering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in ENGINEER'S judgment are necessary to enable CON- TRACTOR to proceed with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property 00700 - 13 r monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall report to ENGINEER whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replaccmcnt or relocation of such reference points or property motntments-by professionally qualified personnel. Environmental Condition, CONTRACTOR shall immedi- ately: r) secure or otherwise isolate such coition; (ii) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any arcs affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by paragraph 6.16); and (iii) notify OWNER and ENGINEER (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). OWNER shall promptly consult with ENGINEER concerning the ncocssity for OWNER to.rctain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. i 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site A. Rcporu and Drawings: Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of those reports and drawings relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition identified at the Site, if any, that have been utilized by the ENGINEER in the preparation of the Contrct_. Documents. B. Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR on Technical Data Authorized:. CONTRACTOR may rely upon the general accuracy of the `technical data" contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Conriact Doarments. Such `technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliancx on such `technical data," CONTRACTOR may not rely upon or make a~ Claim against- OWNER, ENGINEER or any of ENGINEER's Consultants with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports .and drawings for CONTRACTOR'S purposes, including, but not limited to, atry aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by CONTRACTOR and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any CONTRACTOR interpretation . of or conclusion drawn from a~ `technical data" or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Cone act Documents to be within the scope of the Work.` CONTRACTOR shall be responst3le for a Hazardous Environmental Condition orated with any materials brought to the Site by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else-for whom CON- TRACTOR is responsible. D. If CONTRACTOR encounters a Hazardous Fnviroc:ncntal Condition or if CONTRACTOR or anyone for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible creates a Hazardous E. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such condition or in-any affected area until after OWNER has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered to CONTRACTOR written notice: r) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resttmptian of Work; or (ii) specifying any special conditions under which such Work tray be .resumed safely. If OWNER ~ and CONTRACTOR cannot agrce as to cntitlcmwt to or on the amount or exicnt, if any, of any adjustmrnt in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stop- page or such special conditions under which Work is agrced to be resumed by CONTRACTOR, either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. F_ If after receipt of such written notice CONTRACTOR does not agrce to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then OWNER may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any. of an adjustment in Contracx Price or Contract T'mzcs as a result of. deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a Claim therefor- as provided in paragraph 10.05. OWNER may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by OWNER'S own fortis or others in accordance with Article 7. G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, OWNER shall indemnify and hold harmless CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER'S Consultants and the officers, direcxors, partners,- employces, agents, other consultants. and sube~ractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fens and charges of enginxrs, architear, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resohuion cosu) .arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (ii) was not created by CONTRAC'T'OR or by anyone for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. Nothing f] 1 a 1 ii t n 00700 - 14 `~ this paragraph 4.06.E shall obligate OWNER to indemnify any tndividuai or entity from and against the consequences of t individual's or: entity's own negligence. H. To the fullest exteat permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold css OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER'S Consultants, the officers, directors, partners, employee. agents, other consttltaras, and subcontractors of each and any of them hem against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including t not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, 'tests, attorneys, and other profcss'tonals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or lacing to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by NTRACTOR or by anyone for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. Nothing in this paragraph 4.06.F shall obligate NTRACTOR to indemnify any individual or entity from against the t:ottscquenccs of that individual's or entity's own negligence. I. _ The provisions of paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04.. e not intended to apply to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE S -BONDS AND INSURANCE Al Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish performance and ymcnt Bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and ~cnt of all CONTRACTOR'S obligations under the ntract Documents. These Bonds shall remain in effect at least until one year after the date when final payment mes due, except as provided otherwise by Laws or guIations or by the Contract Docttmcats. CONTRACTOR all also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Contract Documents. B. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by Laws Regulations, and shall be executed by such suretiu as arc in the current list. of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Aoccptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as le Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular (a~cndcd) by the Financial Management Service, Surety nd Branch, U_S. Department of dte Treasury. All Bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy such agent's authority to act. C. If the surety on any Bond furnished by CON- CTOR is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its to do business is terminated in any state where any part o the Project is located or it ceases to meet the. requirements of paragraph S.O1.B, CONTRACTOR shall within 20 days thereafter substitute another•Bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements of paragraphs S.OI.B and 5.02. 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Iruurers A. All Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by OWNER or CONTRACTOR shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that arc duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the ProjeU is located to issue Bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as maybe provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 5.03 . Certiftcatu of Insurance A. CONTRACTOR shall deliver to OWNER, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supple- mentary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other: cviiicnce of insurance requested by OWNER or any other additional insured) which CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and maintain.. OWNER shall deliver to CONTRACTOR, with copiu to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates. of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested. by CONTRACTOR or any other additional insured) which OWNER is required to purchase and maintain. 5.04 COMRACTOR's Liability Insurance A. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and as will provide prota:tion from claims set forth below which may arise otit of or resttlt fiom CONTRACTOR'S performance of the Work and CONTRACTOR'S other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by airy of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts a~ of them may be liable: 1. claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and-other similar employee benefit acts; 2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of CONTRACTOR'S employees; 3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than CONTRACTOR'S employees; 00700 - 15 4. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liabaity coverage which are sus- tainod: (i) by arty person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by CONTRACTOR; oc (ii) by any other person for any other reason; 5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property whcsevcr located, including Loss of use restilting therefrom; and 6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. B. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph 5.04 to be purchased and maintained shall: 1. with respect to insurance required by Paragraphs 5.04.A:3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, include as additional iasureds (subject to.any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) OWNER. ENGINEER, ENGINEER'S Consultants, and any other individuals or evditics idrntified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insureds. and include coverage for the respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, .and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds; and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for. all claims covered thereby; 2. include at least the specific coverages and be written for not Less than the limits of liability provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater; 3. include completed operations insurance; 4, include contracuial liability insurance covering CONTRACTOR'S indemnity obligations under para- graphs 6.07, 6.11, and 6.20; 5. contain a provision or cndorscmcnt that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refilled until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and to cacti other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of instuance fiunished by-the CONTRACTOR pursuant to paragraph 5.03 will so provide); 6_ remain in effect at Icast until final payment and at all times thereafter when CONTRACTOR may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in accordance with paragraph 13.07; and 7. with respect to completed operations insurance; and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, remain in effect for at least two years after final Payment (and CONTRACTOR shall furnish OWNER and each other additional insured identified in the Supple- mentary Conditions, to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued, evidence satisfactory to OWNER and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter). S.OS OWNER's liability Insurance _. A.. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by CONTRACTOR under paragraph 5.04, OWNER, at OWNER's option, may purchase and maintain at OWNER's expense OWNER's own liability inci,ranCe as will protect OWNER against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents. 5.06 Property Insurance A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, OWNER shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall: 1. include the interests of OWNER, CONTRAC- TOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER'S Consultants, and any other individuals or entities idcnti= fled in the Supplementary Conditions. and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an additional insured; 2. be written on a Builder's Risk "all-risk" or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall at least include insttrattct for physical loss of damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false work, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage, and such other pcrt7s or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions; 3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured. property ('including but trot limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects); 00700 - 16 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ;7 '~ 4. cover materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by OWNER prior Zo being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by ENGINEER; ~i 5. allow for ~ partial utilization of the Work by OWNER; 6. include testing and startup; and 7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agrced to in writing by OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER with 30 days written notice to each other additional insured to whom a certifi- - .cafe of insurance has been issued. B. OWNER shall purchase and maintain such boiler and. ry insurance or additional property insurance as may required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and egulations which will include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, GINEER's Consultants, and any other individuals or 'ties identified in the Supplementary Conditions, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be ~ted as an insured or additional insured. C. AlI the policies of insurance (and the certificates or er evidence thereof) required to be purchased and in accordance with paragraph 5.06 will contain a 'on or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be candled or materially changed or renewal refused until at 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER CONTRACTOR and to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurand has been issued and will waiver provisions in accordance with paragraph 5.07. D. OWNER shall not be responsible for purchasing and any Property insurance specified in this graph 5.06 to protect the. interests of CONTRACTOR, ntractors, or others in the Work to the extent of any deductible amounts that are identified in the Supplementary bons. The risk of loss within such identified deduarble oust will be borne by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, or others suffering any such loss, and if any of them wishes insttrance coverage within the limits of such cants, each may purchase and maintain it at the purchaser's own expense. E. If CONTRACTOR requests in writing that other ial insurance be included in the property insurance policies provided under paragraph 5.06, OWNER shall, if ~SStble, inchrde such insurance, and the cost thereof will be ~ged to CONTRACTOR by appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, OWNER shall in writing advise CONTRACTOR whether or not such other insurance has been procured by OWNER. 5.07 Waiver of Rights A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR intend that all policies purchased in accordance with paragraph 5.06 will protect OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER'S Consultants, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of cacti and any of them) in auch policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages eaused by-the perils or causes of loss covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of-any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against a~ of .the insureds or additional insureds thereunder. OWNER and CONTRAC- TOR waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agrnts, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and a~ of them for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER'S Consultanu, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplemen- tary Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, direcxors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by OWNER as trustee or otherwise payable under any policy so issued. B. OWNER waives all rights against CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER'S Consultants, and the officers, directors. Partners. employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of cash and any of them for: 1. loss due to business intemiption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to OWNER'S property or the Wort caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other peril whether or not insurdd by OWNF_R; and 2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting fiom fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by OWNER during partial ttilization pursuant to paragraph 14.05, after Substantial Completion ~~ 00700 - I7 pursuant to paragraph 14.04, or after final payment pursuant to paragraph 14.07. C. Any insurance policy maintained by OWNER cover- ing any Ioss, damage or consequential loss referred to in paragraph 5.07.8 shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery against CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, or ENGINEER'S Consultants and the officers, dtrccxors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them. 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds A. Any insured loss under the politics of insurance- required by paragraph 5.06 wt71 be adjusted with OWNER and made payable to OWNER as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of an3- applicable mortgage clause and of paragraph 5.08.8. OWNER shall deposit in a separate account any money so received and shall distnbtme it in accordance with such agrcc- meat as the parties in interest may reach If no other special. agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on accotmt thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof Covered by an appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. of such party by the Contract Documents, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent Bonds or insurance to protect such other party's interesu at the expense of the party who waz required to provide such ooveragc, and a Change Order shall be issued to adjusE the Contract Price accordinglY• 5.10 Partial Utititation, Aclhtowledgment of Property Insurer A. If OWNER finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in paragraph 14.05, no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers providing the Property insurance pursuant to paragraph 5.06 have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated thereby.. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by endorse- ment on the policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy- ARTICLE 6 -CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES [7 1 1 B. OWNER as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a~ loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing. within 15 days after the occturence of loss to OWNER'S exercise of this power. If such objection be made, OWNER as fiduciary shall make settlement with the insurers in aa;ordance with such agreement az the parties in interest may reach. If no such agreement among the parties in imerat is reached, OWNER as fiduciary shall adjust a~ settle the loss with the insurers and, if tcgttirod in writing by anY PAY in interest, OWNER as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper performance of such duties. 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace A. If either OWNER or CONTRACTOR has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the Bonds or insurance required m be purchased and maintained by the other party in accordance with Article 5 on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract Documcnis, the objecting Party shall so notify the other party in writing. within 10 days after receipt of the certificates (or other .evidence requested) required by paragraph Z.OS.C. OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall each provide to the other such additional information in respect of instance provided az the other may reasonably request. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the Bonds and insurance required 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. CONTRACTOR shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently. devoting such attention thereto and applying such. s1o7Ls and ezpcrttsc az may ~ necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.... __ .CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences. and procedures of construction, but CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for the negligence of OWNER or ENGINEER in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique.. sequence, or proceduee of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Doauncnts- CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to see that the completed Work Complies accurately with the Contract Documents. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall assign a competent resident superin- tendent thereto who shall not be replaced without wntten notice to OWNER and ENGINEER except under extraordinary circttmstanees.. The supermtendcnt well ~ CON'TRACTOR'S representative at the Sitc and shall have authority to act on behalf of CONTRACTOR- A11 communications given to or received from the supcrintcndcnt shall be binding on CONTRACTOR. 00700 - 18 1 1 1 1 6.02 Labor; Working Hours A. CONTRACTOR shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out, and construct the ork as .required by the Contras Documents. CON- tACTOR shall at .all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or erection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and ezccpc as otherwise stated in the niract Documents, all Work at the Stte shall be performed regular working hours, and CONTRACTOR will not pernvt overtime work or the performance of Work on turd.ay, Sunday, or any legal holiday without OWNER's 'ttcn consent (which .will not be tmrcasonably withheld) ven after prior written notice to ENGII~iEER. ~03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Unless otherwise specified in the General Re- cmenu, CONTRACTOR shall provide and assume full ~.sponsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, pliances, fuel, power, light, -heat, telephone, water, tary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities d incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work. B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be of quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the ontract Documents. All warranties and guarantees specifically called for by the Specifications shall expressly to the benefit of OWNER. If required by ENGINEER, ONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence eluding reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment. All materials and pment shall be stored, .applied, installed, connected, red, protected, used,. cicaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, ~cept as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Docu- cnts. .Oil Progress Schedule A_ CONTRACTOR shall adhere to the progress schedule established in accordance with paragraph 2.07 as it may be ~justed from time to time as provided below. I . CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for acceptance (to the extent indicated in paragraph 2.07) proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times (or Milestones). Such adjustments will conform generally to the progress schedule then in effect and additionally will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto. 2. Proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will change the Contiract rtmes (or Milestonul shall be submitted in accordance with the tequircments of Article 12. Such adjustments may only be made by a Change Order or Written Amendment in accordance with Article 12. 6.05 Substitutes and "Or-EquaCr' A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or dcscnbed in the Contract Documents by ruing the name- of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type. fiuiction, appearance, and quality required• Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no lilce, equivalent, or 'or-cclttal" item or no substitution is permitted. other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to ENGINEER for review under the circum- stances described below. 1. "Or-Equal" Items: If in ENGINEER'S sole discretion an rum of material or equipment proposed by CONTRACTOR is fitntxionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by ENGINEER as an "or-equal" item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in ENGINEER'S sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this paragraph 6.OS.A.1, a proposed item of material - or ~ equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if: a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment ENGINEER determines that ('i) it is at kart equal in quality. durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; ('u7 it will reliably perform at least equally well the function imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole, and; b. CONTRACTOR oertifiCs that, (i) there is no increase in cost to the OWNER; and ('ii) i[ will conform substantially, even with deviations, to the detailed regairements of rho item Hamad in the Contract Documents. 2. Substitute Itares a. If in ENGINEEIt's sole ducrction an item of material or equipment proposed by CONTRACTOR does not qualify as an "or-equal" item under 00700 - 19 u paragraph 6.05_A.1, it will be considered a proposed by the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR may substitute item. furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction approved by ENGI- b. CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient NEER. CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information information as provided below to allow ENGINEER to allow ENGINEER, in ENGINEER'S sole discretion, to to determine. that-the item of material or equipment determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that proposed is tssentially equivalent to that named and expressly called for by the Contract Documenu. The prose- . an accxptable substitute therefor. Requests for dare for review by ENGINEER will be similar to that review of proposed substitute items of material or provided in subparagraph 6.OS.A.2. equipment will not be accepted by ENGINEER from anyone other than CONTRACTOR. C. Engutcer s Evaluation: ENGINEER will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or c. The procedure for review by ENGINEER submittal made pursuant to paragraphs 6.OS.A and 6.OS.B. , will be as set forth in paragraph 6.OS.A.2.d, as ENGINEER will be the sole judge of acceptability. No supplemented in the General Requirements and as - "or-equal" or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized ENGINEER may decide is appropriate under the . until ENGINEER'S review is complete, which will be ctrcttms<aaces. - evidenced by either a Change Order for a substitute or an approved Shop Drawing for an "or equal." ENGINEER will d. CONTRACTOR shall first make written advise CONTRACTOR in _ writing of any negative application to ENGINEER .for review of a proposed determination. substitute item of material or equipment that CONTRACTOR seeks to furnish or use. The D. Special Guarantee: OWNER may require CON- . application shall certify that the proposed substitute TRACTOR to furnish at CONTRACTOR'S expense a special item will perform adequately the functions and performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any achieve the results called for by the general design, substitute. be similar in substance to that specified, and be suited to the same. use as that specified. The application E. ENGINEER'S Cost Reimbursement: ENGINEER wt~ll will state the extent, if any, to which the use of the record time requited by ENGINEER and ENGINEER's proposed substitute item will prejudice Consultants in evaluating substitute proposed or submitted by CONTRAC'TOR'S achievement ~ of Substantial CONTRACTOR pursuant to paragraphs 6.OS.A.2 and 6.OS.B Completion on time, whether or not use of the and in malting changes in the Contract Documents (or in the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a provisions of any other detect contract with OWNER for change in any of the Contract. Documents (or in the work on the Project) occasioned. thereby. Whether or not provisions of a~ other diretx contract with OWNER ENGINEER approves a substitute item so proposed or for work on the Project) to adapt-.the design to the submitted by CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall proposed substitute item and whether or not reimburse OWNER for the charges of ENGINEER and incorporation or use of the pmposcd substitute item ENGINF.ER's Consultants for evaluating cacti such proposed in connecxion with the Work is subject to payment of substitute. any license fee or royalty. All variations of the pro- poscd substitute item from that specified will be F. CONTRACTOR'S Expense: CONTRACTOR shall identified in the application, and available provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or ~tgineering, sales. maintenance, repair, and "or~qual" at CONTRACTOR'S expense. ~ replacement services will be indicated. The ~ application will also contain an itemized estimate of 6.06 Concerning Subcontractor, Suppliers, and Others all cosu or credits that will result directly or indi- rectly from ase of such substitute item, including A. CONTRACTOR shall not employ a~ Subcontractor, costs of redesign and claims of other ~acxors Supplier. or other individual or entity (including those affected by any resulting change, all of which will be acceptable to OWNER as indicated in paragraph 6.06.B), considered by ENGINEER in evaluating the proposed whether initially or as a replacement, against whom OWNER substitute item_ ENGINEER tray require CON- may have reasonable objection. CONTRACTOR shall not be TRACTOR to furnish additional data about the pro- required to employ any Subcontractor; Supplier, or other posed substitute item. individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable objxtiom B. Substitute Constntctivn Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure B. if the Supplementary Conditions require the ideality of construction is shown or indicated in and expressly of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or 00700 - 20 - 1 entities to be submitted to OWNER in advance for acceptance by OWNER by a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, and if CONTRACTOR has submitted a list ~thcreof in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, OWNER's acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance ~or objection in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due invcstigation_ CON-- CTOR shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by the differ- nce in the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate Change Order will be issued or Written Amendment signed. No acceptance by OWNER of any such subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, hether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of any right of OWNER or ENGINEER to reject defective Work. C. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to OWNER and ENGINEER for all acts and omissions of the ubcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities rforming or furnishing any of the Work just as CONTRACTOR is responsible for CONTRACTOR'S own and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall ~~,~rcate for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other mdividual or entity any contractual relationship between OWNER or ENGINEER and any such Subcontractor, ~upplicr or other individual or entity, nor shall it create any bligation on the part of OWNER or ENGINEER to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcon- r, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may thcrwise be required by Laws and Regulations. D. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, tippliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract ~th CONTRACTOR. E. CONTRACTOR shall require all Subcontractors, uppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing r furnishing a~ of the Work to communicate with ENGI- NEER through CONTRACTOR. F. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and e identifications of any Drawings shall not control CONTRACTOR in dividing the Work among Subcontractors r Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any ific trade. G. All Work performed for CONTRACTOR by a ubcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or=- Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of OWNER and ENGINEER. Whenever any such agreement is with a Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as an additional insured on the property insurance provided in paragraph 5.06, the agreement between the CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor or Supplier will contain provisions whereby the Subcontrauor or Supplier waives all righu against OWNER, CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, ENGINEER'S Consultants, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property inrnrance applicable to the Work. If the insurers on any such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed by any Subcontractor or Supplier, CONTRAC- TOR will obtain the same. 6.07 Parent Fees and Royalties A. CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others_ If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if to the actual knowledge of OWNER or ENGINEER its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by OWNER in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and the officers, directors, partners, employccc or agents, and other. consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a~ infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the rue in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents. 6.08 Permits A. Unless, otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. OWNER shall assist CONTRACTOR, when necessary, in obtaining such permits 00700 - 21 and licertus: CONTRACTOR shall pay all governmental charges and inspection .fees necessary for the proseartion of the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement. CONTRACTOR shall pay all charges of utility owners fot connections to the Work, and OWNER shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto, such as plant investment fees. 6.09 Laws and Regulations A. CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work_ Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither OWNER nor ENGINEER. shall be responsible for monitoring CONTRACTOR'S compliance with any Laws or Regulations. B. If CONTRACTOR performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all- fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and .other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work; however, it shall not be CONTRACTOR'S primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings arc in accordance with Laws and Regulators, but this shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of CONTRACTOR'S obligations under paragraph 3.03. C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of the Agrxment if there were no Bids) having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work may be the subject of an adjtutment in Contract Price or Contract Times. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agrx on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if alry, of any such adjustment. a Claim maybe made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 6.10 Taxes A. CONTRACTOR shall pay all salts, consumer, use, and other similar taus required to be paid by CONTRAC- 'POR in accordancx with the Laws and Regulations of the pL~ of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility. for aay damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas resulting from the performance of the Work. 2. Should a~ claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution procxding or at law. 3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations; CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultant,. and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, coats, losses, and damages ('including-but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, arrltitecxs, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against OWNER, ENGINEER, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon CONTRACTOR'S performance of the Work. B_ Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work CONTRACTOR shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulatioat of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall con- form to applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work CONTRACTOR shall clean the Site and make it rzady for utilization by OWNER: At the completion of the Work CONTRACTOR shall remove from the Site all tools; appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all- property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. D_ Loading Structures: CONTRACTOR shall trot load nor permit a~ part of any structure to be loaded in any manier that will endanger the structure. nor shall CONTRACTOR subject airy part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. 6.12 Record Documents 1 1 [] 1. CONTRACTOR shall confine construction oquipmcnt, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not A. CONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work 00700 - 22 t~nge Directives, Field Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in good order -and annotated to show es made during construction. These record documents then with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be available to ENGINEER for referencx. Upon completion of the Work, these record Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to GINEER for OWNER. Safety and Proteetton A. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for maintaining and supervising all safety precautions rogtams in connection with the Work. CONTRACTOR s 1 take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage; i~ or loss to: 1.. all persons on the Site or who may be affected ~by the Work; 2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the ~ite; and 3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Including trues, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities, and U~erground Facilities pot designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in ~thc course of construction. B. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable ws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or rty, or to the protection. of persons. or property from ge, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safely and protection. NTRACTOR shall notify owners of adjacent Property and nderground Facilities and other utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate them in the protection, removal, relocation, and cement of their property. All damage, injury, or loss to property referred to in paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by CON- CTOR, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other victual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform a~ of the Work, or anyone for whose acts of them may be liable, shall be remedied by CONTRACTOR (eztxpt damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or o ions of OWNER or ENGINEER or ENGINEER'S Con- ~t, or anyone employed by a~ of them, or anyone for se acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or induccily, in whole or in part, to the fault or t~ligcnce of CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor, lien, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them). CONTRACTOR'S duties and 007 responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and ENGINEER has issued a notice to OWNER' and CONTRACTOR in accordance with paragraph 14.Q7.B that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). 6.14 Safety Repruentarive A. CONTRACTOR shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs. 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 6.16 Emergencies A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, CONTRACTOR is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER prompt written notice if CONTRACTOR believes that a~ significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have bcen caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If ENGINEER determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by CONTRACTOR in response w such an emergency, a Work Change Directive. or Change Order will be issued. 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples A. CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings to ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance with the acceptable schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals. All submittals will be identified as ENGINEER may require and in the number of topics specified in the General Requirements. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respetx to quantities. dimen- sions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show ENGINEER the sctvices, materials, and equipment CONTRACTOR proposes to provide and to enable ENGINEER to review the information for the limited purposes required by paragraph 6.17.E. B. CONTRACTOR shall also submit Samples to ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance with the acceptable schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample 00 - 23 submittals. Each Sampk will be identified clearly as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, and the use for which intrndcd and otherwise as ENGINEER may require to enable ENGINEER to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by paragraph 6.17.E. The tntmbers of each Sample to be submitted will be as specified in the Specifications. C. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals acceptable to ENGINEER as required by paragraph 2.07, any rclat~d Work performed prior to ENGINEER'S review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of CONTRACTOR. D. Submittal Procedures 1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, CONTRACTOR shall have determined and verified: a. all field measurements, quantities, dimen- sions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements,. materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect thereto; b. all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the perfotatance of the Work; c. all information relative to means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construc- tion and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; and d. CONTRACTOR shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Docu- ments. 2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written indication that CONTRACTOR has satisfied CONTRACT'OR'S obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to CONTRACT'OR'S review and approval of that submittal. 3. At the time of cash submittal, CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER specific written notice of such variations, if ate, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted. may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written com- munication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to ENGINEER for review and approval of each such variation. E. ENGINEER'S Review 1. ENGINEER will timely review and approve Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals accxptable to ENGINEER. ENGINEER's review and approval will be only to dctcnazine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. ENGINEER's review and approval will not extend w means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of consttuction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precaution or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 3. ENGINEER'S review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for a~ variation from the require- ments of the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR has in writing called ENGINEER'S attention to each such variation at the time of each submittal as required by paragraph 6.17.D.3 and ENGINEER has given written approval of each such variation by .specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by ENGINEER relieve CONTRACTOR .from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph 6.17.D.1. F. Resubmittal Procedures I . CONTRACTOR shall make corrections required by ENGINEER and shall return the required number. of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. CON- TRACTOR shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by ENGI- NEER on previous submittals. 6.18 Continuing the Work A_ CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with OWNER. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except 00700 - 24 1 t lam' a r t f permitted by paragra h 15.04 or as OWNER and p CONTRACTOR may otherwise agree in writing. ~19 CONTRACI'OR's General Warranty and Guarantee A. CONTRACTOR warranu and guarantees to R, ENGINEER, and ENGINEER'S Consultants that '~'1 Work will be in accordance with the Contras Documents and will not be defective. CONTRACTOR'S warranty and ~tce hereunder ezcIudes defects or damage caused by: 1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than CONTRACTOR, Sub- contractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible; or 2. normal wear and tear under normal usage B. CONTRACTOR'S obligation. to perform and mplete the Work in accordance with the Contract enu shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance th the Contract Documenu or a release of ~NTRACTOR's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documenu: 1. observations by ENGINEER; 2. recommendation by ENGINEER or payment by OWNER of any progress or final payment; 3_ the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by ENGINEER or any payment related thereto by OWNER; 4. use or occ~ancy of the Work or any part thereof by OWNER; S. any acceptance by OWNER or any failure to do ~~ b. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of acceptabil- ity by ENGINEER; 7. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or 8. any correction of defective Work by OWNER. ~0 Indemnification and against all claims, cosu, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architecu, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the pcrform~ncc of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage: 1. is attnbutable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or dcsoniction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom; and 2. is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, orany individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by a~ of them to perform a~ of the- Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or omission of an individual or entity. indem- nified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such individual or entity. B. In a~ and all claims against OWNER or ENGINEER or any of their respective constiltanu, agents, officers, directors, partners, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such etttptoyet) of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of tbem to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under paragraph 620.A shall not be limited in arty way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or bencfiu payable by or for CONTRACTOR or a~ such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual- or entity under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. C. The indemnif cation obligations of CONTRACTOR under paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the liability of ENGINEER and ENGINEER'S Consultants or to the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultanu and subcontractors of each and any of them arising out of: 1. the preparation or approval of. or the failure to prepare or approve, maps, Drawings, opinions, reports. surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or 2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regula- ns, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless ENGINEER, ENGINEER'S Consultanu, and the cers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultanu and subcontractors of each and any of them from oo~oo - u e 1 ARTICLE 7 -OTHER WORK 7.01 Related Work at Site A. OWNER may perform other work related to the Project at the Siu by OWNER's employee, or Ict other dittct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility owners. If such other work is not noted in the Con- tract Documents, then: 1. writun notice thereof will be given to CON- TRACTOR prior to starting any such other work; and 2. if OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if a~+, of air adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times that should be allowed as a result of such other work, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. B. CONTRACTOR shall afford cacti other contractor who is a party to such a direct contracx and each utility. owner (and OWNER, if OWNER is performing the other work with OWNER's cmplayecs) proper and safe access to the Siu and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and .the ezecudon of such other work and shall properly coordinate the Work with theirs. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, CON- TRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting. and patching of the . Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrau with such other work. CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with the written oonscnt of ENGINEER a~ the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of CONTRACTOR under this paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that then are comparable provisions.. for .the benefit of CONTRACTOR in said direct contracts between OWNER and such uti~li'ty owners and other contractors. C. If the proper execution or results of any part of CONTRACTOR'S Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 7, CONTRACTOR shall inspect such other work amt promptly report ~to ENGINEER in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that rtadcr it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of CONTRACTOR'S Work. CONTRACTOR'S failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with CONTRACTOR'S Work except for taunt defecxi and dcficicncics in Stich other work. 7.02 Coordination _ A. If OWNER intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the Siu, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions: 1. the individual or entity who will have authority and responsibtti'ty for coordination of the activities among the various contractors will be identified; 2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and _ 3_ _the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, OWNER shall have sole authority and respon- sibility for such coordination. ARTICLE 8 -OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES B.OI Communications to Co-uractor A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Condi- tions, OWNER shall issue all communications to CONTRACTOR through ENGINEER. 8.02 Replacement of ENGINEER A. In case of termination of the employment of ENGI- NEER, OWNER _ shall .appoint an engineer to whom CONTRACTOR makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former ENGINEER. 8.03 ~ Furnish Data A. OWNER shall promptly furnish the data required of OWNER under the Contract Documents. t i 1 8.04 Pay Promptly When Due A. OWNER shall make payments to CONTRACTOR promptly when they are due as provided in paragraphs 14.02.C and 14.07.C. 8.05 Lands and Easements Reports and Tuu A. OWNER'S duties in respect of providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to OWNER'S identifying and making available to CONTRACTOR copies of reports of explorations it 1 u ~nd tesu of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface at or contiguous to the Site that have been utilized y ENGINEER in preparing the Contract Documents. 8.06 .Insurance A. OWNER's responsibilities, if arty, in respect to pur- chasing and main_tainino liability and property insurance are forth in Article S. .07 Qrange Orders ~A. OWNER is obligated to ezerute Change Orders as cared in paragraph 10.03. 08 Inspections, Tuts, and Approvals A. OWNER's responsibility in respect to certain inspec- 'ons, tests, and approvals is act forth in paragraph 13.03.,B. _09 Limitations on OWNER'S Responsibilities A. The -OWNER shall not supervise, direct, or have nrrol or authority over, nor be responsible for, CONTRACTOR'S means, methods, techniques, sequences, r procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and rs=rams incident thereto, or for any failure of CON- CTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable the performance of the Work. OWNER will not be ~sponsible for CONTRACTOR'S failure to perform the ork in accordance with the Contract Documents. ~.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. OWNER'S responsibr'lity in respect to an undisclosed ous Environmental Condition is act forth in paragraph 06. 8.11 Evidence of Ftnaneiol Ar~egements A. If and to the extent OWNER has agreed to furnish CONTRACTOR reasonable evidence that financial ~rrangemenu have been made to satisfy OWNER'S ~tlegations under the Contract Documents, OWNER's responsibility in respect thereof will be as set forth in the elementary Conditions. 1 ARTICLE 9 -ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING . _ CONSTRUCTION 9.01 OWNER'S Representative A. ENGWEER will be OWNER's representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of ENGINEER as OWNER's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and will not be changed without written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER. 9.02 fruits to Sitc A. ENGINEER will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as ENGINEER .deems nxessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional tha progress that has. been made and the quality of the various aspects of CONTRACTOR'S executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observation, ENGINEER,. for the benefit of OWNER, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. ENGINEER will not be required to make ezhaustivo or contirneous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. ENGINEER'S efforu will be directed toward providing for OWNER a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work .will conform generally W the Contract Documents. On the basis of such vista and observations, ENGINEER will keep OWNER informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard OWNER against defective Work. B. ENGINEER'S visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on_ _ ENGINEER'S authority and responsibility set forth in paragraph 9.10, and particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of ENGINEER'S visits or observations of CONTRACTOR'S Work ENGINEER will not ,supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for CONTRACTOR'S means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safcty precaution and programs incident thereto, or for airy failure of CONTRACTOR to~comply with. Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 9.03 Project Representative A. If OWNER and ENGINEER agree, ENGINEER will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist ENGINEER in providing more ezteasive observation of the Work. The responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of an}+ such Resident Project Representative and assistanu will be as provided in paragraph 9.10 and in the Supplementary Conditions_ If OWNER designates another 00700 - 27 rcpraentative or agent to represent OWNER at the Site who is not ENGINEER'S Consultant, agent br employee, the resptmsibilitics and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be az provided in the Supple- mcntary Conditions- B. In connection with ENGINEER'S authority az to ' Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12. C_ In connccrion with ENGINEER'S authority as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14. 1 9.04 Clarifications and Interpretations A. ENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the require- ments of the Contract Documents as ENGINEER may deter- mine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reawnably inferable from the Contract Documents. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If OWNER. and CON- TRACTOR are unable to agree on cntitlcmcnt to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed as a result of a written clarification or interpretation, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 9.05 Atcthorized Variations in Work A. ENGINEER may authorize minor variations in the Work from the rrqutirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project az a functioning whole az indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on OWNER and also on CONTRACTOR, who shall perform the Work involved promptly. If OWNER and CONTRAC- TOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Tancs, or both, as a result of a 1~ield Order, a Claim may be made therefor az provided in paragraph 10.05. 9.06- Rcjcsing Defective Work A. ENGINEER will have authority to disapprove or rejecx Work which ENGINEER believes to be defective, or that ENGINEER ,believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a fimctioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. ENGINEER will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in paragraph 13.04, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. 9.07 Shop Drawings, Chartge Orders and Payments A. In ~xtian with ENGINEER's authority az to Shop Drawings and Samples. see paragraph 6.17. 9.08 Determinations for Unit Price Work A. ENGINEER will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER will review with CON- TRACTOR the ENGINEER'S preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). ENGINEER'S written decision thereon will be final and- binding (except az modified by ENGINEER to reflect changed faettual conditions or more accurate data) upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR, subject to the provisions of paragraph 10.05. 9.09 Decisions on Regr<irements of Contras Documents and Acceptability of Work A. ENGINEER will be the initial interpreter of .the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the Work, the quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work, the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance of .the Work, and Claims seeking changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times will be referred initially to ENGINEER in writing, in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 10.05, with a request for a formal decision. B. 'When functioning as interpreter and judge under this paragraph 9.09. ENGINEER will. not show partiality to OWNER or CONTRACTOR and will not be liable in connection with .any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. -The rendering of a decision by ENGINEER pursuant to this paragraph 9.09 with respect to any such Claim, dispute, or other matter (except any which have beta waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided in paragraph 14.07) will be a condition prcctclcnt to any exercise by OWNER or CONTRACTOR of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contratx Docaiments or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such Claim, dispute: or other mater. 9.10 Limitations on ENGINEER's Authority and Rarpon- sibi&ties A. Neither ENGINEER's authority or respoasibility under this Article 9 or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by ENGINEER in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority 00700 - 28 1 t 1 L~ 1 1 1 responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance any authority or responsibility by ENGINEER shall create, impose, or give .rise to any duty in contract, tort. or ~erwise owed by ENGINEER to CONTRACTOR, any ubcontractor, any .Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. B. ENGINEER will not supervise, direct, control, or ve authority over or ba responsible for CONTRACTOR'S means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of traction, or the safety precautions a~ programs incident etzto, or for a~ fai3ure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the ork. ENGINEER will .not be responsible for ~ONTRACTOR's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. - C. ENGINEER will not be responsible for the acts or ions of CONTRACTOR or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of aa}+ other individual or entity performing any (~ the Work. D. ENGLNEER's review of the final Application for went and accompanying documentation and all mainte- ce and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, Bonds. certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and er documentation required to be delivered by paragraph .07.A will only be to determine generally that their content mplies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals that the results ~rtified indicate compliance with, the Contract Documents. E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set m this paragraph 9.10 shall also apply to ENGINEER'S cants, Resident Project Representative, and assistants. ~CLE 10 - CHANGES W THE~WORK; CLAIMS 10.01 Authorized C9erntges in the Work A. Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice co a~ surety, OWNER may, at any time or from time time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work ge Dircarve. Upon receipt of any such document, NTRACTOR shall promptly procud with the Work clued .which will be performed under the applicable ditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). B. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any, of an ttstmeni in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided.in '- paragraph 10.05. IO.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respoct to any work performed that is not required by the ContraU Documents as amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in paragraph 3.04, except in the case of an emergency as provided in paragraph 6.16 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.04.B. 10.03 Execution of Change Orders A.._O.WNER-. and CONTRACTOR shall execute appropriate Change Orders recommended by ENGINEER (or Written Amendments) covering: 1. changes in the Work which aze: (i) ordered by OWNER pursuant to paragraph 10.O1.A, ('ii) required because of acceptance of defective Work under pain- graph 13.08.A or OWNER'S correction of defective Work under paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the P~~: 2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; and - 3_ changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraph 10.05; provided that,-in lieu-of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during arty such appeal, CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in paragraph 6.18.A. 10.04 Notification to St<rety A. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be ,given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be CONTRACTOR'S responsibility. The amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change. 00700 - 29 10.05 Claims and Disputes A. Notice: -Written notice stating the genera] nature of .each Claim, dispute, or other matter shall be dclivettd by the claimant to ENGINEER and the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, dispute, or other matter with supporting data shall be delivered to the ENGINEER and the other party to the Contract within 60 days after the start of such event (unless ENGINEER allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim, dispute, or other matter). A Claim for as adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 12.O1.B. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Time shall be prepared in accordance with thc- provisions of paragraph 12.02.B_ Each Claim shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that-the adjust- ment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The opposing Party shall submit any response to ENGINEER and the claimant within 30 days afrer receipt of the claimant's .last submittal (unless ENGINEER allows additional time). B. ENGINEER'S Decision: ENGINEER will render a formal decision in writing within 30 days after receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the .opposing party, if any. ENGINEER'S written decision on such Claim, dispute, or other matter will be final and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR unless: 1. an appeal from ENGINEER's decision is taken within the time limits and in accordance. with the dispute resolution procedures set forth in Article 16; or 2. if no such dispute resolution procedures have been set forth in Article 16, a written notice of intention to appeal from ENGINEER'S written decision is delivered by OWNER or CONTRACTOR to .the other and to ENGINEER within 30 days after the date of such decision, and a formal prodding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction within 60 days after the date of such dxision or within 60 days after Substantial Completion, whichever is later (unless otherwise agreed in writing by OWNER and CONTRACTOR), to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing Party may have with respect to such Claim, dispute, or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations. C. l1 ENGINEER dots not render a formal decision in writing within the time stated in paragraph IO.OS.B, a decision denying the Claim in its entirety shall be deemed to have been issued 31 days after rccxip[ of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any. D. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Tunes (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph 10.05. - ARTTCLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; CASH ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 11.01 Cost of the Work A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs necessarily incurred and paid by CON- TRACTOR in the proper performance of the Work. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjuctmcnt in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to be reimbursed to CONTRACTOR will be only those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the Claim. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by OWNER, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include only the following items, and shall not include any of the costs itemized in paragraph 11.O1.B. 1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of CONTRACTOR in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by OWNER and CONTRACTOR. Such employees shall include without limitation supcrintendcnts, foremen, and other personnel employed full time at the Site. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions, unem- ployment, excise, and payroll taus, workers' compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by OWNER. 2. -Cost of all materials and equipment fiunishcd and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers' field service required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to CONTRACTOR unless OWNER deposits funds with CONTRACTOR with which to make payments, in which case the cash disootmts shall accrue to OWNER. All trade discounts, rebate and- refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to OWNER, and CONTRACTOR shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. 1 1 1 1 t 1 t 00700 - 30 3. Payments made by CONTRACTOR to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and shall deliver such bids to OWNER, who will then determine, with the advice of ENGINEER, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor's Cost of the Work. and fee shall be determined in the same manner as CONTRACTOR'S Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this paragraph 11.01. 4. Cosu of s ial consultanu inclu " but not Pce ( ~g limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories,_ surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed. for services specifically related to the Work. S. Supplemental costs i~luding the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of CONTRACTOR'S employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. b. Cost, including transportation and mainte- nance, of alt materials, supplies, equipment,. machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facili- ties at 'the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value. of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of CONTRACTOR. c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented from CONTRACTOR or others in accordance with rental agrcemcnts approved by OWNER with the advice of ENGINEER, and the t:osu of transportation. loading, unloading, . assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the.terms of said rental agreements. The rental of a~ such equipment, ma- chinery, or parts shall cease when the. use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar fazes related to the Work, and for which CON- TRACTOR is liable, imposed by Laws and Regu- e. Deposits lost for causes other than negli- gence of CONTRACTOR, a~ Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acu any of them may be liable, lations. and royalty paymenu and fees for permiu and -- licenses. f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by CONTRACTOR in connection with the perfor- mance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deduarble amoimu of property insurance established in acxordance with paragraph 5.06.D), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of OWNER. No such losses, damages. and expenses shall be included in the Cast of the Work for the purpose of determining CONTRACTOR'S fee. g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site. h. Minor expenses such as telegrams. long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the Site, expressage, and similar .petty cash items in connection with the Work. i_ When the. Cost of the Work is used to determine the value of a Change Order or of a Claim, ,the cost of premiums for additional Bonds and insurance required because of the changes in the Work or caused by -the event giving rise to the Claim. j. When all. the Work is performed on the basis of .cost-plus, the costs of premiums for all Bonds and insurance CONTRACTOR is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain. B. Cosu Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items: 1. Paymll cosu and- other compensation of CONTRACTOR'S officers, eaccutivcs, principals (of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general manag- ers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, audi- tors, accountants. purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks. and other personnel employed by CONTRACTOR, whether at the Site or in CONTRACTOR's principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in paragraph 11.O1.A.1 or specifically covered by paragraph 11.41.A.4, all of which are to be 00700 - 31 w considered adminicrrative costs covered by the CONTRACTOR'S fee. 2. Expenses of CONTTZACTOR's principal and branch office other than CONT'RACTOR'S office at the Site. 3. Any part of CONTRACTOR'S capital expenses, including interest on CONTRACTOR'S capital employed for the Work and charges against CONTRACTOR for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone dirxtly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be .liable, including but not limited- to, -the - cerrcction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any- damage to property. S. Other overhead or general expense rose of any kind and the costs of any item not .specifically and expressly included in paragraphs 11.01 _A and 11:O1.B. C_ CONTRACTOR'S Fee: When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost-plus, CONTRACTOR'S fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement: When the value of a~ Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is detcrtnincd on the basis of Cost of the- Work, CONTRACTOR'S fee shall be determined as set forth in paragraph 12.O1.C. D. Doarmcntation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to paragraphs 11.O1.A and 11.O1.B, CONTRACTOR will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted acootmting practices and submit in a form acceptable to ENGINEER an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data. . 11.02 Cash AUowanccs A. It is understood that CONTRACTOR has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums as may be acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR agrees that: 1. the allowances include the cost to CONTRAC- TOR (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and 2. CONTRACTOR's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for. the allow- antes have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. - B. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by .ENGINEER to reflect actual amounts due CONTRACTOR on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.03 Urtit Price Work A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price -Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agree- ment. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Prior. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR will be made by ENGINEER subject to the provisions of paragraph 9.08. B_ Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by CONTRACTOR to be adequate to cover CONTRACTOR'S overhead and profit for each separately identified item. C. OWNER or CONTRACTOR may make a Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with paragraph 10.05 if: - 1. ~ the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and 2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect a~ other item of Work; -and 3. if CONTRACTOR believes that CONTRACTOR is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or OWNER believes that OWNER is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are tenable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. 1 t t 1 1 1 00700 - 32 1 CLE 12 -CHANGE OF CO NTRACT PRICE; C ANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 12.01 Change of Coruract Price A. The Contract Price may ody be changed by a e Order or by a Written Amendment. Any Claim for justmcnt in the Contract Price shall be based on written n cc submitted by the party making the Claim to the INEER and the other party to the Contract in accor- dance with the provisions of paragraph 10.05. B. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price.will.. _.__.. b~etermined as follows:- 1. where the Work involved is covered by unit .prices contained in the Contract Doarments, by applica- tion of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of paragraph 11.03 ); or 2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may. include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with paragraph 12.O1.C.2); or 3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and a ce- gr went to a lump sum is not reached under paragraph 12.OI.B.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in paragraph 11.01) plus a CONTRACTOR'S fee for overhead and profit (deter- mined as provided in paragraph 12.O1.C). C. COMTtACTOR's Fee: The CONTRACTOR'S fee fo overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: 1. a mutuall y acceptable fizod fee; or 2. if a fuel fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. for costs 'incurred under paragraphs 11.O1.A.1 and 11.O1.A.2, the CONTRACTOR'S fee shall be l,5 percent; b. for costs incurred under paragraph 11.O1.A:3, the CONTRACTOR'S fee shall be five 1 percent; c_ where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no feed fee is agreed upon, the intent of paragraph 12.O1.C.2.a is that the Subcontrasor who actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under paragraphs 11.O1.A_1 and 11.O1.A.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and CONTRACTOR will each be paid a fce of five percent of the amount paid to the next lower tier Subcontractor, d. no fee shall be payable on the base of eosu . itemised under paragraphs 11.O1.A.4, 11.OI.A.S, and 11.O1.B; __ e... the _ amount of credit to be allowed by CONTRACTOR to OWNER for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in test plus a deduction in CONTRACTOR's fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and f. when both additions and credits are in- volved in any one change. the adjustment in CONTRACTOR'S fce shall be computed vn the basis of the net change in accordance with para- graphs 12.O1.C.2.a through 12.O1.C.2_e, inclu- sive. 12.02 Change of Contract Tomes A. The Contract Times (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice submitted by the party _maldng the claim to the .ENGINEER and the other party to the Contract in accordance with_ the provisions of paragraph 10.05. B. Any adjustment of the Contras Times (or Milestones) covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times (or Milestones) will be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Article 12. . 12.03 Delays Beyond COMRACI'OR's Control A. Where CONTRACTOR is prevenud from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the arntrol of CONTRACTOR, the Contract Times (or Milestones) will be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is-made therefor as provided in paragraph 12.02.A. Delays beyond the control of CONTRACTOR shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by OWNER, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing. other work as contemplated by 00700 - 33 [~ Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, or acts~of God. 12.04 Delays Within COM7tACTOR's Control A. The Contract Times (or Milestotes) will not be extended due to delays within the control of CONTRACTOR. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of CONTRACTOR. 12.OS Delays Beyond OWNER's and COM7ZACTOR's Coiurol A. Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from complet- ing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Mtlestones) due to delay beyond the control of both OWNER and CONTRACTOR, an extension of the Contras Times (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be CONTRACTOR'S sole and exclusive remidy for such delay. 12.06 Delay Damages A. In no event shall OWNER or ENGINEER be liable to CONTRACTOR, any Subcontrasor, any Supplier, or any other person or organization, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from: 1. delays caused by or within the control of CON- TRACTOR; or 2. delays-beyond the control of both OWNER and CONTRACTOR including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, ass of God, or ass or neglect by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7. B. Nothing in this paragraph 12.06 bars a change in Contract Price .pursuant to this Article 12 to compensate CONTRACTOR due to delay, interference, or disruption directly attributable to anions or inasions of OWNER or anyone for whom OWNER is responsible. ARTICLE 13 -TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DE~F~ECTIVE WORK 13.01 Notice of Defecxs A. Prompt notice of all dcfxtive Work of which OWNER or ENGINEER has actual knowledge will be given to CONTRACTOR. All defective Work tray be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13. 13.02 Access to Work A. OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER'S Consultants, other represctitativcs and personnel of OWNER, independent testing laboratories, and govemmcatal agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspecting. and testing. CONTRACTOR shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of CONTRACTOR'S Site safety procedures and programs so that they tray comply therewith as applicable. 13.03 Tests and Inspections A. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. B. OWNER shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents except: 1. for inspxtions, tests, or approvals covered by paragraphs 13.03.C and 13.03.D below; 1 3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Con- tract Documents. 2_ that costs incturcd in connection with tests or inspections conduced pursuant to paragraph 13.04.B shall be paid as provisos in said paragraph 13.04.B; and C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body. CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and famish ENGINEER the required ccrtificatcs of inspection or approval. D. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests, or approvals required for OWNER'S and ENGINEER'S acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; or accxptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to CONTRACTOR'S purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be performed by organizations acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER. 00700 - 34 1 r r t r t 1 t 1 u E. If any Work (or the work'of others) thaE is to be ,tested, orapproved is covered by CONTRACTOR out written concurrence of ENGINEER,- it must, if r tested by ENGWEER, be uncovered for observation. F. Uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.03.E s1~I be . at CONTRACTOR'a expense unless CON- TRACTOR has given ENGINEER timely notice of C CTOR's intention to cover the same and ENGI- has not actod with reasonable promptness in response [ ch notice. 1:~ Uncovering Work A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written t of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by ENGINEER, bncovered for ENGINEER'S observation and replaced at CONTRACTOR'S expense. B. If ENGINEER considers it necessary or advisable covered Work be observed by ENGII~IEER or inspected or tested by others, CONTRACTOR, at . ENGINEER'S rest, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available f observation, inspection, or testing as ENGINEER may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all sary labor, material, and equipment. If it is found that CI"" Work is defective, CONTRACTOR shall pay all nuns, cosu, losses, and damages ('including but not limited M 1 fees and charges Of engineers, architects, attorneys, and o r professionals and all court or .arbitration or other ute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction {including b not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); -and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate d case in the Contract Price. If the parties are .unable to a~x as to the amount thereof, OWNER tray make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. If, however, such W is not found w be defective, CONTRACTOR shall be an increase in the Conhaci Price or an extension of _ ntract Times (or Milestones); or both, directly attribut- able to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, tang, replacement, and t~econstruction. If the parties are blc to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, CONTRACTOR may [Hake a Claim therefor as provided in p ' graph 10.05. 1 S OWNER M to th R' ay S p e ork A. If the Work is defective, or CONTRACTOR fails to st~ply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials. or equipment, or fails to. perform the Work in such a way that mpleted Work .will conform to the Contract ents, OWNER may order CONTRACTOR to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order h~ been eliminated; however, this right of OWNER to stop 00 the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of OWNER to exercise this right for the benefit of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them. 13.06 Corredion or Removal of Defective Work A. CONTRACTOR shall correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by ENGINEER, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. CONTRACTOR shall pay all Claims, cosu, losses, and damages (including but not limited to ail fees and charges of engineers, architects; attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to .such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.07 Correction Period A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time . as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for CONTRACTOR'S use by OWNER or permitted by Laws and Regulations as contemplated in paragraph 6.11.A is found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to OWNER and in accordance. with OWNER'S written instructions: ('i) repair such defective land or areas, or (ii) correct such defective Work or, if the defective Work has been rejected by OWNER, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and ('iu7. satisfac- torily torreci or repair or remove and replace a~ damage to other Work, to the work of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom.. If CONTRACTOR does not promptly comply. with the terms of .such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, OWNER may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced, and all Claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal -and replacement (including but not limited to all cosu of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by CONTRACTOR. B. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placid in continuous service bef~r^ Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that - 3S 700 revise or revoke any such paymrnt recommendation previously made, to such extent as may be accessary in ENGINEER'S opinion to protxt OWNER from loss because: a. the Work is defective, or completed Work ~ been damaged. requiring correction or replace- ment; b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Written Amendment or Change Orders; c. OWNER has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance ..with paragraph 13.09; or d. ENGINEER has actual knowledge of the occurrence of a~ of the events enumerated in para- graph 15.02.A_ C. Payment Becomes Due 1 _ Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to OWNER with ENGINEER'S recom- mendation, the amount rxommcaded will (subjccx to dte provisions of paragraph 14.02.D) become due, and whcn due will be paid by OWNER to CONTRACTOR. D. Reduction in Payment 1. OWNER may refine ~to make payment of the full amount recommended. by ENGINEER because: a. claims have beta made against OWNER on account of CONTRACTOR'S performance or fur- nishing of the Work; b. Liens have bocce filed in won with the Work, except where CONTRACTOR has deliver~cd a specific Bond satisfactory. to OWNER to secure the satisfaction and discharge of stub Liens; c. there are other items entitling OWNER to a scuff against the amount recommended; or d. OWNER has acxual knowledge of the occur- .. rence of any of the events enum'aatod in paragraphs 14.02.B.5_a through 14.02.B.S.c or paragraph 15.02.A_ 2. If OWNER refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by ENGINEER, OWNER must give CONTRACTOR immediate written notice (with a ceP5' to ENGINEER) stating the reasons for such action and PromPt1Y PaY CONTRACTOR any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. OWNER shall promptly pay CONTRACTOR the ' amount so withheld, or a~ adjustment thereto agreed to by OWNER and CONTRACTOR, whcn CONTRAC- TOR corrects to OWNER'S satisfaction the reasons for such action. 3. If it is subsequently determined that OWNER'S refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by paragraph 14.02.C.1. 14.03 COM'RACTOR's Warranty of TFtle A. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and "equipment covered by any Application for. Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to OWNER no later than the .time of payment free and clear of all Liens. 14.04 Substantial Completion A_ When CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work ready for its intended use CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by CONTRACTOR as incomplete) and request that ENGINEER issue a certifcate of Substantial Completion. Promptly thereafter, OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If ENGINEER does not consider the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will notify CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons therefor. If ENGINEER considers the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will prepare and deliver to OWNER a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment OWNER.shall have seven days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which to make written objection to ENGINEER as to any provisions of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such objections, ENGINEER concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, ENGINEER will within 14 days after submission of the tentative certificate to OWNER .notify CONTRACTOR in writing, stating the rrasons therefor. If, after consideration of OWNER'S objections, ENGINEER considers the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will within said 14 days execute and deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as ENGINEER believes justified after consideration of any objections from OWNER. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Comple- tion ENGINEER will deliver to OWNER and CONTRAC- TOR a written recommendation as to division of responsibiIi= 1 fl 1 r 00700 - 38 , es pending -final payment between OWNER and ONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation, safety, protection of the Work, maintenance, heat, utilities, ce, and warranties and guarantees. Unless OWNER CONTRACTOR agree otherwise in writing and so inform, ENGWEER in writing prior to ENGINEER's issuing definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, GINEER's aforesaid recommendation will be binding on OWNER and CONTRACTOR until fuzal payment. B. OWNER shall have the right to exclude ONTRACTOR from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion, but OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR sable access to complete or correct items on the tative list_ OS Parttal Utilization A. Use by OWNER at OWNER's option of any bstantially completed part of the Work which has tfically bcen identified in the Contract Documents, or 'ch OWNER, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the ~rk that can be used by OWNER for its intended purpose ut significant interference with CONTRACTOR'S performance of the remainder of the Work, may be mplished prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work ~ject to the following conditions. 1. OWNER at any time may request CON- TRACTOR in writing to permit OWNER to use any such part of the Work which OWNER believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If CONTRACTOR agrees that such part of the Work is ,~, substantially complete, CONTRACTOR will certify to OWNER and ENGINEER that such part of the Work is substantiaIly complete and request ENGINEER to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. CONTRACTOR at any [lint may notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that CONTRACTOR considers. any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request ENGINEER to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status ~of completion. If ENGINEER does n+ot consider that ...part of the Work to .be substantially complete, ENGINEER will notify OWNER and CONTRACTOR writing giving the reasons therefor. If ENGINEER considers that part of the Work fo be substantially complete, the provisions of paragraph 14.04 will apply wtth respect to certification of Substantial Completion of 'that part of the Work and the division of responsibility m respect thereof and access thereto, t 00700 - 39 2. No occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work ,may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of paragraph 5.10 regarding property insurance. 14.06 Finallnspection A. Upon written notice from CONTRACTOR that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, ENGINEER will promptly make a final inspection with OWNER and CONTRACTOR and will notify CON- TRACTOR in_ writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. CONTRACTOR shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.07 Frnal Payment A. Application for Payment . 1. After CONTRACTOR has, in the opinion of ENGINEER, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified. during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, aII main- tenance and operating instructions, schedules, guaran- tees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents (as provided in paragraph 6.12), and other documents, CONTRACTOR may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. 2. The final Application fot Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance ~~ by subparagraph 5.04.B.7; (ii) consent of the surety, if a~+, to final payment; and ('iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to OWNER) of all Licn rights arising out of or Lams filed in connection with the Work_ 3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Lieas specified in paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved by OWNER, CONTRACTOR may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of CONTRACTOR that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material. and aluipment for which a Lien could be filed; and Cu) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which OWNER or OWNER'S property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, CONTRACTOR may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to OWNER to indemnify OWNER against any Lien. 1 B. Review of Application and Acceptance 1. If, on the basis of ENGINEER's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and ENGINEER'S review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, ENGINEER is satisfied that the Work has ban completed and CONTRACTOR'S other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, ENGINEER will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing ENGINEER'S recommendation of payment and present the Application for Payment to OWNER for pay- ment_ At the same time ENGINEER will also give written notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, ENGINEER will return the Application for Payment to CONTRACTOR, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend., final payment, in which case CON- TRACTOR shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment.. . C. Payment Becomes Due 1. Thirty days after the presentation to OWNER of the Application for Payment and accompanying docu- mentation, the amount recommended by ENGINEER will become due and, when due, will be paid by OWN- ER to CONTRACTOR. 14.08 Final Completion Delayed A. If, through no fault of CONTRACTOR, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if ENGINEER so confirms, OWNER shall, upon receipt of CONTRACTOR'S final Application for Payment and recommendation of ENGINEER, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by OWNER for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph 5.01. the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by CON- TRACTOR to ENGINEER with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not oonstitutc a waiver of Claims. 14.09 Waiver of Qainrs A. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: 1. a waiver of all Claims by OWNER against CONTRACTOR, except Claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing afar final inspection pursuant to paragraph 14.06, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of a~ special guarantees specified therein, or from CONTRACTOR'S continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and 2. a waiver of all Claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER other than those previously made in writing which are still unsettled. _ ARTICLE 15 -SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.01 OWNER May Suspend Work A_ At any time and without cause, OWNER may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to CON- TRACTOR and ENGINEER which wr~l fvt the date on which Work will be resumed. CONTRACTOR shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if CONTRACTOR makes a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 15.02 OWNER May Ternunate for Cause A. The occurrence of any one or more. of the following events will justify termination for cause: 1. CONTRACTOR'S persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents ("including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule established under paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to paragraph 6.04); 2. CONtRACTOR's disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; 3. CONTRACTOR'S disregard of the authority of ENGINEER; or 4. CONTRACTOR's violation in any substantial way of any provisions of the Contract Documents. B. If one or more of the events identified in paragraph 15.02.A occur, OWNER may, after giving CONTRACTOR (and the surety, if any) seven days written notice, terminate 00700 - 40 i 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 r 1 trervices of CONTRACTOR, exclude CONTRACTOR rom the Site, and take possession of the Work and of all CTOR's tools, appliances, construction equipment, chinery at the Site, and use the same to the full extent fey could be used by CONTRACTOR (without liability to TRACTOR for trespass or conversion), incorporate in i ork all materials and equipment stored at the Sitc or for r , h OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR but which aze toned elsewhere, and finish the Work as OWNER may deem tent. In such case, CONTRACTOR shall not be ed to receive any further payment until the Work is inched. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds laims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not ed to all fees and charges of_ engineers, azchitecu, a eys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration r other dispute resolution costs) sustained by OWNER g out of or relating to completing the Work, such excess be paid to CONTRACTOR. If such claims, costs, asses, and damages exceed such unpaid balance, :~~dZRACTOR shall pay the difference to OWNER. Such I ~~, costs, losses, and damages incurred by OWNER will e reviewed by ENGINEER as to their reasonableness and, so approved by ENGINEER, incorporated in a Change r. When exercising any rights or remedies under this a. b OWNER shall not be required to obtain the lowest rice for the Work performed. ~C. Where CONTRACTOR's services have been so ~rminated by OWNER, the termination will not affect any i or remedies of OWNER against CONTRACTOR then ing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or a ent of moneys due CONTRACTOR by OWNER .will o elease CONTRACTOR from liability. 5 O WNER May Terminate For Convenience Upon seven days written notice to CONTRACTOR NGINEER, OWNER may, without cause and without re~udice to any other right or remedy of OWNER, elect to the Contract. In such. case, CONTRACTOR shall e 'd (without duplication of any items): 1. foe completed and acceptable Work executed in ccordance with the Contract Documents prior to the ffective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 2. for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing abor, materials, or equipment as required by the contract Documents in connection with uncompleted ork, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; 3. for all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals - and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred in settlement of terminated contracts . with Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others; and 4. for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. B_ CONTRACTOR shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.04 CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate A. If, through no act or fault of CONTRACTOR, the Work is .suspended for more than 90 consecutive days.by OWNER or under an order of court or other public authority, or ENGINEER fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or OWNER fails for 30 days to pay CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined to be due, then CONTRACTOR may, upon seven days written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER, and provided OWNER or ENGINEER do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Contract and recover from OWNER payment on the same terms as provided in paragraph 15.03. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to -any other right or remedy, if ENGI- NEER has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or OWNER has failed for 30 days to pay CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined to be due, CONTRACTOR may, seven days after wriaen notice to OWNER and ENGINEER, .stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due CONTRACTOR, including interest thereon. The provisions of-this paragraph 15.04 are not intended to preclude CONTRACTOR from making a Claim under paragraph 10.05 for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Tunes or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to CONTRACTOR'S stopping the Work as permitted by this paragraph. ARTICLE 16 -DISPUTE RESOLUTION 16.01 Methods and Procedures A. Dispute resolution methods and procedures, if any, shall be as set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. If no method and procedure has been set forth, and subject to the provisions of paragraphs 9.09 and 10.05, OWNER and CONTRACTOR may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute. 700-41 1 ARTICLE 17 -MISCELLANEOUS 17.01 Giving Notice A. Whenever aII~r provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be dcemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered a[ or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.02 Computation of Tunes A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. 17.03 Qumulative Remedies A. T1ze dudes and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in a~ way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantce, or by other provisions of the Contract Documents, and the provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. 17.04 Survival of Obligations A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of the Agrcement. 17.05 Controlling Law A. This. Contract is to be governed by the law of rho state in which the Project is located. r r 1 1 1 1 1 w 1 00700 - 42 1 Supplementary Conditions These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (No. 1910-8) (1996 Edition) and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings indicated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. SC-4.01- Availability of Lands Add the following language at the end of the fourth sentence of paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions: Contractor shall provide the bond required for the permit to work within the Minnesota Department of Transportation right-of--way. SC-4.02 -Subsurface and Physical Conditions Add the following new paragraph(s) immediately after paragraph 4.02.8: C. A soils, investigation was not completed for this project. D. In the re aration of Drawin sand Project Manual En veer or En ineer's consultants relied P P g J g g upon the following reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the Site: 1. Report dated July 27, 2001, prepared by GME Consultants, Inc., entitled: Preliminary Geotechnical Exploration, Proposed Northwest Industrial Park, GME Project No. 9535, consisting of 45 pages. SC-4.05 -Reference Points Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 4.OSA of the General Conditions to read as follows: B. Contractor shall notify the Resident Project Representative a minimum of 48 hours in advance of the need for construction stakes on the project. Contractor shall provide all additional staking, unless noted otherwise in Section 02010. (~ SC-5.04 -Contractor's Liability Insurance Add the following new paragraph immediately after paragraph 5.04.8: C. The limits of liability for the insurance required by paragraph 5.04 of the General Conditions shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts, or greater where required by ~~ Laws and Regulations: Supplementary Conditions 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 00800 - 2 A-ALBEV 0113 1. Worker's Compensation and related coverages under paragraphs 5.04.A.1 and A.2 of the General Conditions: a. State: Statutory ~' b. Applicable Federal (e.g., Longshoreman's): Statutory c. Employer's Liability: 1) Bodily Injury by Accident $500,000 Each Accident 2. Contractor's General Liabili under ara a hs 5.04.A.3 throu A.6 of the Gen r 1 h' P gr P gh e a Conditions shall include completed operations and product liability. coverages and eliminate the exclusion with respect to property under the care, custody and control of Contractor. In addition, itwill be subject to aper-project aggregate. a. General Aggregate $1,000,000 b. Products -Completed Operations Aggregate $1,000,000 c. Personal and Advertising Injury $1,000,000 d. Each Occurrence (Bodily Injury and Property Damage) $1,000,000 e. Property Damage liability insurance will provide Explosion, Collapse, and ,~ ~ Underground coverages where. applicable. " f. Excess or Umbrella Liability 1) General Aggregate $2,000,000 2) .Each Occurrence $1,000,000 3. Au tomobile Liability under paragraph 5.04.A.6 of the General Conditions: a. Bodily Injury: Each person $1,000,000 Each Accident $1,000,000 b. Property Damage: Each Accident $1,000,000 c. Combined Single Limit of $1,000 000 4. Th e Contractual Liability coverage required by paragraph 5.04.B.4 of the General Conditions shall provide coverage for not less than the following amount s: a. Bodily Injury: Each Accident $1,000,000 ~~ Annual Aggregate $1,000,000 b. Property Damage: Each Accident $1,000,000 Annual Aggregate $1,000,000 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Supplementary Conditions A-ALBEV 0113 00800 - 3 1 5. Other persons or entities to be included on policy as additional insured: City of Albertville, Minnesota, their officers and employees, RLK Kuusisto, their officers and employees, and SEH, their officers and employees. 6. Contractor shall obtain Railroad Protective Liability Insurance before working on railroad right-of- way, per Mn/DOT Spec. 1708. ~~ SC-6.09 -Laws and Regulations Add new paragraphs immediately after paragraph 6.09.C of the General Conditions which are to read as -~ follows: D. .Contractor shall specifically comply with Equal Opportunity Requirements as listed in Minnesota Rules 5000.3535, Standard State Equal Employment Opportunity Construction- . Contract Specifications. E. Contractor shall specifically comply with Minnesota Rules 5000.3550, Disabled Individuals Affirmative Action Clause. SC-10.05 -Claims and Disputes rte, Amend the first sentence of paragraph 1 O.OS.A of the General Conditions to read as follows: A• Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of each Claim, dispute, or other matter shall be delivered by the claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 10 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto- d d d h 10 O5 A i i an as so amen e paragrap . . rema ns n effect.. SC-11 03 -U it P i W k . n r ce or Delete paragraph 11.03.C in its entirety and insert the following in its place: C. The unit price of an item of Unit Price Work shall be subject to re-evaluation and adjustment under the following conditions: 1. if the-total cost of a articular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 25 ercent or more of P p the Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs by more than 25 percent from the estimated ~` quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and 2. if there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and ,~ 3. if Contractor believes that Contractor has incurred additional expense as a result thereof; or if Owner believes that the quantity variation entitles Owner to an adjustment in the unit price, either Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with Article 10 if the parties are unable to agree as to the effect of any such variations in the quantity of Unit Price Work performed. Supplementary Conditions 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 00800 - 4 A-ALBEV 0113 1 SC-13.07 -Correction Period ~' Amend the first sentence of paragraph 13.07.A of the General Condition to read as follows: A. If within 2 years after the date of Final Acceptance (the day the Owner makes final payment) or such longer period of time as maybe prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific ~, provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for Contractor's use by Owner or permitted by Laws and Regulations as contemplated in paragraph 6.11.A is found. to be defective, '~ Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner's written instructions: (i) repair such defective land or areas, or (ii) correct such defective Work or, if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and (iii) satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace ~- any damage to other Work, to the work of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom. and as so amended paragraph 13.07.A remains in effect. SC-14.02.A -Applications for Payments Amend ar p agraph 14.02.A.3 of the General Condrtions to read as follows: The amount of retainage with respect to all progress payments will be as follows: Minnesota Contractors 5% Exempt Non-Minnesota Contractors - 5% Non-Exempt Non-Minnesota Contractors - 5% + 8%* = 13% *State Surety Deposit ,~ Non-Minnesota Contractors are advised to file Form SD-3 with the 1Vlinnesota Department of Revenue to determine their exemption status. and as so amended paragraph 14.02.A.3 remain in effect. SC-14.02.B -Review of Applications Amend the first sentence of paragraph 14.02.B.5 of the General Conditions to read as follows: Engineer ma refuse to recommend the whole or an art of an a Y y p y p yment if the established Contract Time for Substantial Completion has expired or, if in Engineer's opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner referred to in paragraph 14.02.B.2. and as so amended paragraph 14.02.B.5 remains in effect. SC-14.06 -Final Inspection Add the following language after the second sentence of paragraph 14.06.A of the General Conditions: 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Supplementary Conditions A-ALBEV 0113 00800 - 5 1 L~ J If, after such measures are taken, subsequent inspections by Engineer reveal that any of the previously identified particulars remain incomplete or defective, Engineer will again notify Contractor in writing of the remaining particulars. All costs associated with any subsequent ~~ inspections in which said remaining particulars are revealed, will be documented by Engineer and paid by Contractor to Owner. SC-14.07.A -Application for Payment Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 14.07.A.3 of the General Conditions which is to read as follows: 4: Before final application for payment is made for the work, Contractor must make satisfactory showing of compliance with M.S.A. §290.92 which requires the withholding of state income taxes for wages paid employees on this project. Submittal of Certificate of Compliance from the Commissioner of Taxation to the Owner will satisfy this requirement. Contractor is advised that before such certificate can be issued, he must first place on file with the Commissioner of Taxation an affidavit that he has complied with the provisions of M.S.A. §290.92. The required affidavit form will be supplied by the Commissioner of Taxation, Centennial Building, St. Paul, Minnesota, on request. END OF SECTION ~~ Supplementary Conditions 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 00800 - 6 ~ A-ALBEV 0113 ,~ 1 SECTION 01110 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 3) Payment Bond 4) Certificates 1.01 SUNIlVIARY b. Conditions of the Contract: A. Section Includes: 1) General Conditions 2) Supplementary Conditions 1. -Work included in Contract Documents c. S ecifications: P 2. Contract Information 1) Division 1 - General +~ 3. Work Under Other Contracts Requirements 4. Future Work 2) Applicable Technical Sections 5. Work Sequence d. Addenda 6. Contractor Use of Premises e. Contract Modifications 7. Occupancy Requirements 8. Products Ordered in Advance 1.04 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS 9. -Owner Furnished Products A. General Requirements: B. Related Sections: 1. The Owner reserves the right to let other 1. Section 00520 - Standard Form of Agreement separate contracts for Work at the site, or to pursue other Work at the Site with its own personnel. 1.02. WORK INCLUDED IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS B. Work Not Included: 1. Work not included is either marked A. Description of the Project: "NIC," or "by others," on Drawings or 1. 2002 Northwest Commercial Park, is noted in each section of including grading, aggregate base, Specifications. Provide all labor and bituminous pavement, concrete curb and materials required, unless so specifically gutter, water main sanitary sewer, storm noted or marked. sewer, and turf establishment. Also included will be the construction of turn C. Prime Contracts: ~' lanes on CSAH 19 (LaBeaux Avenue) including .grading, culverts, street 1. The Owner will award separate prime construction contracts for other Work at construction and bituminous paving. the site as outlined above 1.03 CONTRACT INFORMATION 1.05 WORK SEQUENCE A. Type of Contract: A. The Contractor shall not commence work ~t i 1. The Owner will award a Single Prime .until written "Notice to Proceed" has been Contract. issued by the Owner. ~ B. Scope of Contract: B. Dates of Substantial Completion: , 1. This Contractor is solely responsible for the Work. 1. The work for substantial completion will 2. The Contract will include: be completed on or before September 1, a. Contract Forms: 2002. Substantial completion will 1) Agreement include all pipe work, curb & gutter, 2) Performance Bond 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Summary of Work ~ A-ALBEV 0113 01110 - 1 1 base bituminous, all concrete work, and 1. Each Contractor shall take complete N all turf establishment. field measurements affecting all existing construction, wiring, piping, and C. Final completion will be no later than June equipment in this Contract and he shall 15, 2003. be solely responsible for proper fit between his Work and existing 1.06 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES structures and other equipment. He shall examine all Work to which he will A. General Requirements: connect, and if any misalignment is 1. Confine operations at Site to areas found, he shall so arrange his Work that permitted under contract or as directed the misalignment is corrected to the by Owner or Engineer. satisfaction of the Engineer. 2. Conform to site rules and regulations 2. Dimensions given on the Drawings affecting Work while engaged in Project related to the existing structures are construction. based on existing construction Drawings 3. Keep existing driveways, and adjacent and it shall be the responsibility of the .streets clear and available to public in Contractor to verify the accuracy of accordance with Owner's or local these dimensions. Any discrepancies authority's requirements. shall be brought to the attention of the 4. Construction personnel may park only in Engineer prior to start of new areas designated by the Owner. construction. 3. Each Contractor will be held responsible B. Damaged Property: for any damage to existing structures, 1. Patch and/or clean existing Work, materials, or equipment because improvements .and restore damage of of his operations and shall repair or property on, or adjacent to, Site replace any damaged structures, Work, occasioned by this Work, including, but materials, or equipment to the. not limited to, lawns, walks, curbs, satisfaction of and at no additional cost pavements, roadways, structures, and to the Owner. utilities which are cut or damaged by 4. Each Contractor shall be responsible for operations and are not designated for all damage to streets, roads, curbs, removal, relocation, or replacement in sidewalks, highways, shoulders, ditches, the course of construction. embankments, culverts, bridges, or other 2. Public Property or Utilities: public or private property, which may be a. Comply with laws, ordinances, caused by transporting equipment, rules, regulations, standards, orders materials, or men to or from Work. The of utility owner or any public Contractor shall make satisfactory and authority having jurisdiction. acceptable arrangements with the 3. Provide written acceptance of agency .having jurisdiction over the restoration work by authority or Owner. damaged property concerning its repair or replacement. C. Existing Underground Utilities: 1. Existing underground utilities, as shown 1.07 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS on the Drawings, are located in accordance with available data but A. General Requirements: locations shall be determined by each 1. Cooperate with Owner to minimize Contractor as the Work proceeds. conflict and to facilitate Owner's Excavation shall be done carefully so as operations. to avoid damaging the existing Work. 2. Schedule the Work to accommodate this requirement. D. Existing Facilities: ~~ Summary of Work 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 01110 - 2 A-ALBEV 0113 B. Owner Occupation During Construction: 1. The Owner will require use of the Site during the Work. 2. The Owner reserves the right to place and install equipment as necessary in completed areas of the project and to use such completed areas prior to Substantial Completion in accordance with the .Supplementary Conditions. Such use shall not constitute acceptance of such portions of the Work or relieve the Contractor of any obligations except for improper use or damage caused by employees or agents of the Owner. 3. Coordinate activities which could cause interruption to the Owner's activities. 1.08 PRODUCTS ORDERED IN ADVANCE A. Storage:. 1. Products will be allowed to be stored at `~ the Site prior to commencement of construction activities. 2. Contractor shall store such items as directed by Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION r 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Summary of Work A-ALBEV 0113 01110 - 3 r i 1 1 r r 1 M ~.J 1 1 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART1 GENERAL. 1.01 SUMMARY E. After Engineer review of submittal, revise and resubmit. as required, identifying changes made since previous submittal. A. Requirements Included: 1. Procedures 2. Construction Progress Schedules 3. Schedule of Values 4. Payment Requests 5. Shop Drawings 6. Tabulation of Subcontractors 7. Tabulation of Suppliers B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01110 -Summary of Work 2. Section 01770 -Closeout Procedures 1.02 PROCEDURES A. Deliver submittals to Engineer at address listed in Project Manual. B. Transmit each item under Engineer - accepted form. Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor, ,major supplier; identify pertinent drawing sheet and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate. Identify deviations from Contract Documents. Provide space for Contractor and Engineer review stamps. C. Submit initial progress schedules and schedule of values in duplicate within 10 days after date. of Owner-Contractor Agreement. After review by Engineer, revise and resubmit as required. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, reflecting changes since previous submittal. D. Comply with progress schedule for submittals related to work progress. Coordinate submittal of related items. 2002 Northwest Commercial Park A-ALBEV 0113 F. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned persons. Instruct recipients to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. 1.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Submit horizontal bar chart with separate bar for each major trade or operation, identifying first work day of each week. 1.04 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Each Contractor, when requested, shall submit within 30 days after award of Contract, his anticipated monthly payment schedule. This schedule shall be updated whenever the actual request varies. more than 10 percent from the. schedule. B. Revise schedule to list change orders, for each application for payment. 1.05 PAYMENT REQUEST A. General: 1. Except as otherwise indicated, sequence of progress payments for each Contractor is to be regular, and each must be consistent with previous applications and payments. It is recognized that certain applications involve extra requirements, including initial applications, applications at times of substantial completion, and final payment applications. 2. Payment schedule will be established at the preconstruction meeting. 3. Forms will be completed by the Engineer. Listing will include amounts Submittals 01300 - 1 of change orders issued prior to first day and similar change-over information of the "period of construction" covered germane to Owner's occupancy, use, by application. operation and maintenance of completed Work. B. Initial Payment Application: The principal 4. Final cleaning of Work. administrative actions and submittals which 5. Application for reduction (if any) of must precede or coincide with each prime retainage, and consent of surety. Contractor's first payment application can be 6. Listing of Contractor's incomplete summarized as follows, but not necessarily Work; recognized as exceptions to by way of limitation: Engineer's certificate of substantial 1. Listing of subcontractor and principal completion. suppliers and fabricators. 2. Cost breakdown. D. Final Payment Application: The 3. Progress schedule (preliminary, if not administrative actions and submittals which final). 4. Evidence satisfactory to Owner that must precede or coincide with submittal of each Contractor's final payment application Contractor's insurance coverages have can be summarized as follows, but not been secured. necessarily by way of limitation: 5. Data needed by Owner to secure related 1. Completion of Project closeout insurance coverages. requirements. 6. Initial progress report, including report 2. _ Completion of items specified for of preconstruction meeting. completion beyond time of substantial 7. Certification that- the Contractor has completion (regardless of whether filed form SD-E (Exemption from special payment application was SureTy Deposits for Out-of--State previously made). Contractors). 3. Transmittal of required Project construction records to Owner. ~' C. Application at Time of Substantial 4. Proof, satisfactory to Owner, that taxes, Completion: Following issuance of fees and similar obligations of ~!+ Engineer's final "certificate of substantial Contractor have been paid. `- completion" on each Contractor's Work, and also in part as applicable to prior certificates 5. Removal of temporary facilities, services, surplus materials, rubbish and on portions of completed Work as similar elements. designated, a "special" payment application 6. Change over of door locks and other may be prepared. The principal provisions for Contractor's access to administrative actions and submittals, which Owner's property (Contractor for must precede or coincide with such special general Work). applications can be summarized as follows, 7. Consent of sureTy for final payment. but not necessarily byway of limitation: 1. Occupancy permits and similar 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS acceptances or certifications by governing authorities and franchised A. Shop Drawings will not be accepted for services, assuring Owner's full access review by the Engineer until after they have and use of completed Work. been checked and approved by ,the 2. Warranties, guarantees, maintenance Contractor, as evidenced by his approval agreements and similar provisions of stamp and signature. Contract Documents. 3. Test/adjust/balance records, B. Submit the number of opaque reproductions maintenance instructions, meter required by Contractor, plus 6 copies to be readings, start-up performance reports, retained by Engineer. '~ Submittals 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 01300 - 2 A-ALBEV 0113 1.07 TABULATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS A. Submit a !ist of subcontractors who will provide work on the Project. B. The submitted list shall. include: 1. Name of subcontractor 2. Address 3. Type of work to be provided ~' 4. Contact person and telephone number 1.08 TABULATION OF SUPPLIERS A. Submit a list of suppliers who will provide materials, equipment or components principal ~o the work. ,~ B. The submitted list should include: 1. Name of supplier 2. Address 3. Equipment, material or component to be provided 4. Contact person and telephone number ;~ PART2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION ~~ 2002 Northwest Commercial Park A-ALBEV 0113 Submittals 01300 - 3 1 SECTION 01315 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 GENERAL b. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement if not previously completed. 1.01 .SUMMARY c. Distribution of Contract Documents. d. Use of Premises by Owner and A. Section Includes: Contractor: 1. Procedures for Administration of Project 1) Owner's requirements and Meetings: occupancy a. Pre-Construction Conference 2) Construction facilities provided b. Progress Meetings c. Pre-installation Conferences by Owner (if any) 3) Temporary utilities provided by Owner (if any) B. Related Sections: 4) Use of Premises office, work 1. Document 00200 - Instructions to and storage areas Bidders e. Security and housekeeping 2. Section 01300 -Submittal Procedures procedures. f. Submittals: 1.02- PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 1) Final list of subcontractors, suppliers, products A. General: 2) Schedule of Values 1. Scheduled by Owner/Engineer at project 3) Progress Schedule site after Notice of Award, prior to 4) Designation of responsible- commencement of construction for: personnel: a. Execution of Owner-Contractor a) Contractor's principal staff Agreement and exchange of and consultants preliminary submittals if not b) Contractor's superintendent previously completed. or job foreman acting as b. Clarification of Owner and Contractor's Site Contractor responsibilities in the use Representative of the -Site and review of c) Owner's and Contractor's administrative procedures. designated individuals B Attendees: authorized to sign Change . Orders, Field Modifications 1. Owner, Engineer, Consultants, and monthly pay requests. Contractors, major subcontractors, other g. Procedures for processing: concerned parties .represented by 1) Field decisions persons familiar with and authorized to 2) Submittals: conclude matters relating to work. a) Shop Drawings b) Product Data C. Agenda: c) .Samples 1. Items of significance that could affect 3) Substitutions progress including, but not limited to: 4) Applications for Payments a. Submittal of executed bonds and 5) Proposal requests insurance certificates. 6) Change Orders ~ 7) Contract Closeout `~ 2002 Northwest Comm ercial Park Project Meetings A-ALBEV 0113 01315 -1 1 h. Schedules: c. Field observations, problems and 1) Tentative construction schedule decisions 2) Critical work sequencing 3) Progress meetings d. Identification of problems which impede planned progress i. Procedures for testing e. Review of submittal schedule and j. Procedures for maintaining Record status of submittals Documents £ Review of off-site fabrication. and k. Requirements for startup of delivery schedules equipment: g. Maintenance of progress schedule 1) Inspection and acceptance of h. Corrective measures to regain equipment put into service projected schedules during construction period. i. Planned progress during succeeding 1. Equipment deliveries and priorities work period m. Contractor responsibilities: j. Coordination of projected progress 1) Safety procedures k. Maintenance of quality and work 2) First Aid standards 1. Effect of proposed changes on 1.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS progress schedule and coordination m. Other business relating to the Work A. General: Engineer:. 1. Schedule and administer periodic 1.04 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES construction progress meetings throughout progress of work. A. General: 2. Make physical arrangements, prepare 1. When required in individual. agenda and distribute with notice of specification Sections, or as requested each meeting to participants 2 days in by the Contractor, convene astart-up advance of meeting date. conference at the Site prior to accepting 3. Preside at meetings, record meetings work of the Section. and distribute copies 2 days to participants, and entities affected by B. .Attendees: decisions at the meetings. 1. Require attendance of entities directly affecting, or affected by, work of the B. Attendees: Section. 1. Contractor, job superintendent, subcontractors and suppliers, other entities concerned with current progress C. Notification: 1. Notify attendees 2 days in advance of or involved in planning, coordination or meeting date. performance of future activities; Owner, Engineer, professional consultants as D. Agenda: ;~ appropriate to agenda. Attendees shall 1. Review conditions of installation. be familiar with project and authorized 2. Review preparation and installation to conclude matters relating to progress. procedures. 3. Coordinate with related work. C. Agenda: 1. Items of significance that could affect progress, including topics for discussion PART 2 PRODUCTS as appropriate to current status of project, minimally: Not Used a. Approval of minutes of last meeting b. Review of Work progress +~ Protect Meetings 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 01315 - 2 A-ALBEV 0113 J ii ~I SECTION 01450 QUALITY CONTROL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Selection and Payment 2. Quality Assurance 3. Contractor Submittals 4. Laboratory Responsibilities 5. Laboratory Reports 6. Limits on Testing Laboratory Authority 7. Contractor Responsibilities 8. Schedule of Inspections and Tests 9. Retesting B. Related Sections: 1. Document 00700 -General Conditions: Inspections, testing, and' approvals required by public authorities. 2. Section 01300 -Submittal Procedures: Manufacturer's certificates. 3. Section 01770 -Closeout Procedures: Project Record Documents. C. Individual Specification Sections: 1. Inspections and tests .required, and standards for testing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSUASTM D3740 - Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. B. ANSUASTM E329 - Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction. 1.03 SELECTION AND PAYMENT testing. The Contractor will be charged for retesting of materials failing the original test. B. The Contractor is responsible for the costs of all pressure and testing of water main conductivity (see Section 2660 for bacteriological testing of water main.) C. Employment of testing laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of ANSUASTM E329 and ANSUASTM D3740. B. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in state in which Project is located. C. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer Specialist on staff to review services. D. Testing Equipment: 1. Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards (NBS) Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. 1.05 LABORATORY. REPORTS A. After each inspection and test, submit two copies of laboratory report to Engineer, and to Contractor. Written test reports shall be submitted to Engineer and Contractor no later than 3 working days after completion of inspection or test. ' A. .Contractor will employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform specified inspection and field 0 B. Include: 1. Date issued 2. Project title and number 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Quality Control A-ALBEV 0113 01450 - 1 3. Name of inspector E. Employ services of a separate qualified ' 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection testing laboratory. Arrange with laboratory 5. Identification of product and and pay for additional samples and tests Specifications Section required by Contractor beyond specified ' 6. Location in the Project , requirements. 7. Type of inspection or test 8. Date of test 1.08 SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS AND ' 9. Results of tests TESTS (TESTING DONE BY OWNER) 10. Conformance with Contract Documents A. Provide laboratory testing in accordance , C. When requested by Engineer, provide with the following schedule. interpretation of test results. 1. A minimum of 1 compaction .test and associated laboratory Proctor Tests, 1.06 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY where directed by the Engineer, for each ' AUTHORITY 2001inear feet of trench backfilling. 2. Immediately prior to construction of A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or aggregate base, a minimum of 1 , enlarge on requirements of Contract compaction test for each 200 linear feet Documents. of subgrade with corresponding Proctor Tests if the subgrade material varies, as ' B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any determined by the Engineer. portion of the Work. 3. A minimum of 1 compaction test for each 200 linear feet of aggregate ' C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of surfacing or aggregate base, with a Contractor. Proctor Test for each class of aggregate, and additional tests if the gradation ' D. Laboratory has no authority to stop the .varies, as determined by the Engineer. Work. 4. A minimum of 1 gradation and 2 extractions for every -500 tons of , 1.07 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES bituminous mixture placed. 5. At least 2 tests shall be performed on all A. Deliver to laboratory at designated location other testing designated by the Engineer. adequate samples of materials. proposed to ' be used that require testing, along with 1.09 RETESTING proposed mix designs. A. Where results of quality control services B. Cooperate with laboratory personnel and prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate provide access to the Work and to ' compliance of related work with manufacturer s facilities. requirements of the contract documents, ' retests are responsibility of Contractor, C. Provide incidental labor and facilities to regardless of whether the original test was provide .access to Work to be tested, to Contractor's responsibility. Retesting will be , obtain and handle samples at the site or at at the rate of 2 retests for each failed test. source of products to be tested, to facilitate Retest of work revised or replaced by tests and inspections, storage and curing of Contractor is Contractor's responsibility. , test samples. .Retesting costs invoiced to the Owner will be deducted from Contract amount by D. Notify Engineer and laboratory 24 hours Supplemental Agreement or Change Order.. prior to expected time for operations. ' requiring inspection and testing services. Quality Control 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 01450 - 2 A-ALBEV 0113 ' SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ' PART 1 GENERAL 3. Any Trade requiring power with different characteristics than provided 1.01 SUNIlVIARY shall arrange and pay for access to such power. A. Section Includes: 4. The Contractor shall provide, install and 1. Administrative and procedural maintain safe, adequate lighting system ' requirements and limitations for: a. Temporary Utilities: required for safety, security, and ff i t ti f k e ic en prosecu on o wor . 1) Electricity and Lighting 5. When permanent power and lighting 2) Telephone systems are in operation, they may be ' 3) Construction Water used for construction purposes. 4) Sanitary Facilities 5) First Aid B. Te lephone: b. Barriers 1. The Contractor shall maintain telephone c. Protection: on-site for use of Contractors, 1) Shoring and Bracing subcontractors, and others who have ' 2) Enclosures legitimate need for telephone 3) Installed Work communication in pursuit of work of 4) Security this Project. Long distance calls are to S) Fire Protection be by credit card. ' d. Access Roads and Parking Areas e. Temporary Controls: C. Construction Water: 1) Noise 1. The Owner will pay for water used for 2) Construction Debris and construction purposes. Rubbish a. Water must be obtained at a f. Field Offices and Sheds connection approved by the Owner, where usage .can be metered and B. Related Sections: system sanitation can be maintained. 1. Section 01110 -Summary of Work 2. The Contractor shall verify location of ' 2. Section 01770 -Closeout Procedures temporary water supply on or near site and shall install piping, hoses, fittings, 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE etc., required to distribute it as required ' by the Work. A. Regulatory Requirements: 3. If a subcontractor needs a larger source 1. As a minimum, comply with local, state of water, the subcontractor requiring the ' and federal requirements. water is responsible for the source and distribution. 1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 4. Maintain distribution system so as to avoid damage to existing or new A. Electricity and Lighting: construction. 1. The Contractor shall pay for electricity 5. Avoid damage to permanent plumbing used for construction purposes. at source of temporary water. ' 2. The electrical service shall be provided and installed by the Contractor. D. Sanitary Facilities: 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Temporary Facilities and Controls A-ALBEV 0113 01500 - 1 1. Provided and relocated as necessary by Contractor for convenient use by workers engaged in this work. E. Emergency first-aid facilities shall be provided by Contractor in accordance with all federal, state, and local laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, and regulations: 1.04 BARRIERS A. General: 1. Provide barriers as required to: a. Prevent public entry to construction areas. b. Protect existing facilities, designated plantings and trees, and adjacent properties from damage from construction activities. B. Access: 1. Provide barricades and covered walkways as required for public rights- of-way, for public access to, and emergency egress from, existing buildings. 1.05 PROTECTION A. Shoring and Bracing: 1. Provide temporary shoring, bracing, protection as required for installation and protection of Work. Assure adequacy of such items. Repair or replace damaged Work occasioned by inadequate temporary supports. Leave temporary shoring and bracing in place until permanent construction is complete to point . where installed Work is properly supported. 1. Provide security program and facilities ' to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism and theft. D. Fire Protection: 1. Fire extinguishers shall be non-freeze , type such as A-B-C rated dry chemical of not less than 10-pound capacity. 2. Provide and maintain in working order during the entire construction period, a ' minimum of 1 fire extinguisher in the construction area. 3. Contractors who maintain enclosed ' sheds on the premises shall provide and maintain, in an accessible location, a minimum of one non-freezing type ' extinguisher in each shed. 1.06 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING AREAS A. Access Roads: 1. Maintain temporary roads accessing public thoroughfares to serve construction areas. 2. Existing on-site- roads may be used for construction traffic. 3. Provide detours if necessary to maintain unimpeded traffic flow. 4. Extend .and/or relocate as the Work progresses. 5. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. B. Parking: 1. Contractor shall provide parking space for all employees on the site at location indicated on Drawings or established by the Engineer. 2. All vehicles not in use shall be locked. B. Installed Work: 1. Provide temporary protection for installed products; control traffic in immediate area to minimize damage. 2. Prohibit traffic and storage on subgrade prepared .aggregate base and uncompacted pavement. C. Security: 1.07 TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Noise Control: 1. Avoid the use of tools or equipment which produce harmful noise. 2. Restrict the use of noise-making tools and equipment to hours of use that will minimize noise complaints from persons or firms near project site. Temporary Facilities and Controls 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 01500 - 2 A-ALBEV 0113 0 I I' 0 0 0 0 3. Provide -noise suppression barriers on equipment that must be operated in performance of the Work. B. Construction Debris and Rubbish: 1. Contractor shall provide and pay for dumpsters and waste disposal. 2. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish. C. Dust Control: a. Provide chemicals or water to work areas and access roads to prevent wind-blown soil from leaving the site. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Design, install, maintain Temporary Facilities and Controls as needed for safe, proper completion of work. 3.02 REMOVAL A. General: 1. Maintain temporary facilities and controls as long as needed for safe, proper completion of Work: 2. Remove as rapidly as progress of Work will permit; remove prior to Substantial Completion. B. Cleaning and Repair: 1. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities and controls. 2. Clean and repair .permanent systems used for temporary heat, light, power, or sanitation to satisfaction of Owner. END OF SECTION 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Temporary Facilities and Controls A-ALBEV 0113 01500 - 3 u SECTION 01558 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC PART1 GENERAL C. Minnesota Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MMUTCD) 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Procedures and equipment for safely maintaining and controlling traffic within and near the project site during construction. D. MMUTCD, Temporary Traffic Control Zone Layouts (Field Manual), January 2001 E. Mn/DOT Standard Signs Manual F. Mn/DOT Standard Plate No. 8000 - Standard Barricades B. Method of Measurement: ' 1. Measure all required procedures and G. Minnesota Traffic Engineering Manual, July equipment on a lump sum basis. 1993. 2. No measurement will be made for individual items or equipment (except as 1.03 DEFINITIONS otherwise noted). 3. Procedural and equipment revisions A. Long Term Restriction: resulting from minor changes or field 1. A traffic restriction or lane closure ' adjustments will be considered which is in effect during construction incidental. without regard to the time restrictions stated in 1.07 B. ' C. Basis of Payment: 1. Payment for the maintenance of traffic B. Short Term Restriction: ' shall be at the Contract Unit Price as listed on the Bid Form. All associated 1. A traffic restriction or lane closure which is in effect only during the work items shall be considered Contractor's work hours and is incidental. consistent with the time restrictions ' 2. Progress payment amounts will be stated in 1.07 B. determined by the percentage of the total contract completed based on the 1.04 SUBMITTALS ' following schedule: A. Pre-Construction: of Contract 1. Traffic Control Plan as detailed in 1.07 Completed % of Item Paid C. 0 0 2. Names, addresses and phone numbers of 25% 40% 2 local persons who will respond to S0% 70% requests for maintenance as detailed in ' 75% 90% 1.08 D. 100% (Final) 100% B. Permits: 1.02 REFERENCES 1. Obtain any and all permits necessary from the County to allow for signing, A. Mn/DOT 1404 -Maintenance of Traffic barricading and work within the County ' right-of--way as necessary to complete B. Mn/DOT 1710 -Traffic Control Devices the project. 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Maintenance of Traffic A-ALBEV 0113 01558- 1 2. Obtain any and all permits necessary from Mn/DOT to allow for signing, barricading and work with Mn/DOT right-of--way as necessary to complete the project. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Operations: 1. Conduct all operations in accordance with the Field Manual. B. Flaggers: 1. Provide qualified flaggers familiar with applicable traffic laws and regulations and properly trained in the responsibilities of traffic control, including provisions spelled out in the Field Manual (Flagging Handbook). 2. Flaggers shall be properly clothed and equipped, including shirt or blouse, slacks or trousers, sturdy shoes, fluorescent orange hard hat, fluorescent orange vest (reflectorized at night), a 2- way radio, and an approved "Stop- Slow" paddle or standard. 3. Uniformed off duty police/ patrol officers using hand signals may be used as flaggers. They shall be equipped with a fluorescent orange vest and hard hat during flagging operations. 1.06 SITE CONDITIONS A. Parking of Contractor/Worker Vehicles: 1. Do not park vehicles in a manner or location which: a. Interferes with traffic flow. b. Conflicts with resident or consumer parking. c. Obstructs any traffic control device. d. Lies within the project limits unless so approved by the Engineer. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Closure and Detour Requests: 1. Submit request for short term lane closure to the Engineer at least 24 hours prior to time of closure, consistent with the provisions detailed in 1.07 B. 2. Submit request to close street and divert traffic to the Engineer at least 3 working days prior to time of closure. 3. Authority to divert or close shall be subject to Engineer's approval. 4. Provide notice for all closures and detours as stated in 3.01 A. 5. Delete Mn/DOT 1404.3 "Contractor's Request for Detour" and substitute the following: B. The Contractor may request that through traffic be detoured consistent with the provisions and restrictions found elsewhere in this section of the Special Provisions. The request shall contain all information needed to justify the request and select the routes to be established. If arrangements can be made that are satisfactory to the agencies having jurisdiction over the roads to be used, the contracting authority may then, at its sole discretion, establish an approved detour subject to the following conditions: 1. The Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, shall design, provide, install, maintain, and remove. all the necessary traffic control devices on the detour roads. 2. The Contractor shall reimburse the City for all expenses incurred in maintaining and restoring the detour roads, except for snow removal. 3. The Contractor shall fulfill their obligations for maintenance of local traffic by furnishing, placing, and maintaining all traffic control devices and other traffic protection measures required of him on the roads undergoing improvements. C. Restrictions: 1. Work which interferes with traffic operations described in this specification shall not be performed during the following times: a. -From 6:00 a.m. to 8:00 a.m. - Monday thru Friday inclusive. b. From 4:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m. - Monday thru Friday inclusive. c. From 12:00 noon on the day before to 9:00 a.m. the day following any 0 1 1 i~ Maintenance of Traffic 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 01558- 2 A-ALBEV 0113 consecutive combinations of after the contract award and 5 days Saturday, Sunday and legal holiday. prior to initiating any construction. 2. Lane closures will not be permitted b. As construction progresses, provide during inclement weather or when the an updated traffic control plan for Engineer determines that such closure the next 2 weeks of work to the will be a hazard to traffic. Engineer (on a weekly basis) for ' 3. Flagpersons shall be utilized on any approval and/or suggested roadway that is restricted to 1 lane for modifications. traffic, except as approved by the c. Information to be included in the Engineer. plan: 4. Furnish, install and maintain all proper 1) Planned sequence of signing, flagpersons (as appropriate) and construction operations warning devices in order to: 2) Proposed street closures or a. Close or restrict :traffic on a restrictions and estimated dates. roadway. 3) Provisions for routing detoured. b. Provide adequate detour information. traffic. 4) Signs and devices to be used. c. Protect the work, the workers and d. The traffic control plan shall reflect the motorist. the restrictions detailed in Paragraph d. Inform the motorist of pending B. construction and direct the motorist 2. Acceptance: through the work zone. a. Each traffic control plan is subject 5. Maintain access to individual residences to acceptance, rejection or suggested and businesses fronting roadways at all revision by the Engineer. times, unless otherwise approved by the b. No construction operations may affected property owner and the begin without the complete approval Engineer. of the plan. 6. Access to individual properties fronting c. Revisions: a roadway under construction may be 1) All revisions to the traffic maintained on inplace or permanent control plan area subject to the roadway, or via an Engineer approved approval of the Engineer. gravel surface. 7. Any drop-off where traffic will cross 1.08 MAINTENANCE from or to the inplace surface or from or to the milled surface. shall be tapered and/or chamfered so as to provide for A. Responsibility: 1. Maintain all traffic control devices, on a safe passage of traffic. 24 hour basis, throughout the term of the 8. Provide for protection of traffic from contract, including work suspensions. open excavations as described in 2. Repair or replace as necessary: 3.02.B.2. a. Devices that are damaged or moved. 9. Conduct operations to allow continual b. Lights that cease to function fire and police access to all areas within properly. the project. c. Barricade weights that are damaged 10. The above restrictions may be modified or fail to stabilize the barricade. as necessary to insure safe traffic operations. B. Inspection: 1. Check all devices twice daily, including D. Traffic Control Plan: 1. Content: once at the end of the work day. 2. Conduct 1 night (after work hours) a. Submit an overall traffic control inspection of all devices per week. ' plan for approval within 10 days 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Maintenance of Traffic A-ALBEV 0113 01558- 3 3. Immediately correct all deficiencies in alignment visibility and reflectivity. C. Drums: 1. Provide drum-like channelizers in C. Notice: accordance with the MMUTCD, 1. Furnish names, addresses, and phone Appendix B, and the Minnesota Traffic numbers of 2 local persons who will Engineering Manual 8-8.03.02. respond to requests for maintenance to the following: D. Ballast: a. The Engineer. 1. Sandbags will be the only acceptable b. The City Public Works Department weight to stabilize traffic control c. Wright County Department of devices. ' Public Works 2. During freezing conditions, the sand for d. Mn/DOT bags and impact barrels shall be mixed 2. Provide a means of receiving with a deicer to prevent the sand from , maintenance requests on a 24 hour basis. freezing. 3. Respond to all maintenance requests 3. Sandbags shall be placed on each foot of within 2 hours. traffic control device to be established. ' D. Failure to respond to maintenance requests E. Miscellaneous: will result in the work being completed by 1. Store the- following devices at a the Owner with twice the cost thereof being convenient location within the project deducted from any monies due the limits of each portion of the project for Contractor. use in an emergency, as approved by Engineer: a. At least 5 extra Type I barricades PART 2 PRODUCTS with flashers. b. At least 5 extra Type III barricades. 2.01 EQUIPMENT c. At least 10 extra drums. 2. No direct compensation will be made A. Signs: for furnishing, storing and erecting these 1. Provide all required signs in accordance traffic control devices. with the MMUTCD, Mn/DOT Standard Signs Manual, Minnesota Traffic Engineering Manual, the Field Manual, PART 3 EXECUTION the Plans, and as approved by the Engineer. 3.01 PREPARATION 2. All signs shall be fabricated of either steel or aluminum. A. Advance Notice: 3. As a minimum provide the following 1. Provide minimum 72 hour notice for all ' signs as necessary: closures and detours to the following: a. 48 inches by 48 inches Road Work a. The Engineer. Ahead (W21-4) b. City Fire Department ' c. Local Ambulance Dispatcher B. Barricades: d. City Public Works Department 1. Provide 8-foot, Type III barricades in e. County Department of Public Works accordance with the current Mn/DOT f. Local School District , Standard Plate 8000. g. Postal Service 2. Provide flashers on all barricades. h. County 911 Dispatcher 3. Provide at least 1 Type III barricade in a 2. Provide minimum 48 hour notice for all closed lane for every 1,000 feet of lane closures and detours to all affected closure. residences and businesses, for when Maintenance of Traffic 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 01558- 4 A-ALBEV 0113 L' 1 e closures and detours will occur and what a. Do not deposit or store materials or their duration will be. park equipment on or adjacent to 3. Meet with businesses affected by each any roadway open to traffic that will restriction of access and coordinate interfere with the safe flow of work to allow for deliveries to be made traffic. to each affected business during b. Provide traffic barriers for any construction. obstruction placed within the "clear zone" as defined by the AASHTO B. Inplace Facilities: Guide for Selecting Locations and 1. Signs: Designing Traffic Barriers. a. Do not remove signs unless c. Keep roadways which are open to authorized by the Engineer. traffic free from earth materials and b. Carefully remove and store debris. designated signs and posts for d. During construction, provide reinstallation. devices to protect traffic and c. Replace signs and posts damaged or pedestrians from drop-offs lost during removal or construction. , openings, falling objects, splatter or d. Provide flaggers as directed when other hazards. "STOP" or other prohibition. signs 2. Open Excavations/Drop-Offs Adjacent are removed. to the Traveled Roadway: e. Reinstall all signs not being a. Schedule operations so as to replaced in accordance with the minimize traffic exposure to uneven MMUTCD and the Minnesota lanes, milled edges and edge drop- Traffic Engineering Manual.. offs. b. Provide and maintain appropriate 3.02 .OPERATIONS traffic. control in accordance with the "Traffic Control Treatment of A. Installation of Devices: Longitudinal Joints and Edge Drop- 1. Provide, locate and maintain all traffic offs in .Work Zones" sheets of these control devices in accordance with the Special Provisions. contract documents and the approved c. Close a traffic lane, auxiliary lane or traffic control plan. shoulder on any road open to traffic 2. Provide minor modifications and field (in accordance with 1.07B) when adjustments as directed at no additional construction operations cause a cost to accommodate special conditions drop-off greater than 4 inches or situations which may occur. adjacent to that lane or shoulder, 3. Signs shall be mounted on posts driven unless adequately protected by into ground at proper height and lateral traffic barrier. offset as detailed in the MMUTCD, or, d. Concrete or utility repairs of less if not possible, signs shall. be maintained than 50 feet in .length and open for on portable supports or barricades. seven days or less do not require 4. Signs shall not be mounted on metal that the adjacent lane or shoulder be drums. closed to traffic 5. Placement of all signs and barricades e. Sign and delineate any drop-off shall proceed in the direction of the flow (caused by construction operations) of traffic. of less than- 4 inches as shown in the 6. Cover all traffic control devices which Field Manual. maybe inconsistent with traffic patterns. f. When excavations on roadways open to traffic exceed 1-foot in B. Traffic Protection: depth: 1. General: 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Maintenance of Traffic A-ALBEV 0113 01558- 5 1) Place warning lights at devices intended for use on the project to the minimum 50-foot intervals. Engineer to ensure conformance with the 3. In lieu of precast concrete barrier, MMUTCD and the Mn/DOT Standard Signs barrels and barricades may be used Manual. during construction, as approved by the Engineer, provided that: B. Replace any device which is found to be a. Construction work is actively done defective. in or directly adjacent to the excavation. C. Replace reflective material (on both new and b. Workers are present. used traffic control devices) whose c. It is daylight hours, or, if nighttime effectiveness, in the Engineer's opinion, has hours, there is additional lighting of been substantially reduced from traffic or the open excavation. other causes. d. Traffic is in a single lane (alternating) or a single lane in each D. Keep all traffic control signs and devices direction with parking removed. furnished in a legible condition (including e. The barrels or barricades can be set by removing any grime deposited on devices outside the minimum widths by traffic, natural causes or by the nature of required for traffic and at intervals as directed by the Engineer. the work being performed). , E. Relocate any traffic control device that is C. Pedestrian Access and Traffic: misplaced due to Contractor or 1. Provide continuous access to all Subcontractor operations. adjacent residences and businesses. 2. Provide temporary boardwalk where 3.04 SCHEDULES inplace sidewalk is removed. ' 3. When access to business entrances is A. Final Bituminous Course: prohibited, coordinate with business 1. A separate plan for traffic control may owners to provide protection and be prepared for the installation of the direction for alternate entrances. final bituminous wear courses. 4. Provide signs, barricades, flasher, snow 2. Plan does not have to adhere to the fence or other devices as required to above restrictions, but shall be prepared protect pedestrians adjacent to the work. in detail and submitted to the Engineer ' 5. Cover newly poured concrete sidewalk for approval. with plywood after curing compound is 3. The Engineer will determine .the applied to provide access at business viability of the planned sequence and entrances. may accept, reject or suggest alterations to this separate plan. D. Removal of Devices: 4. Do not begin installation of final wear , 1. When signs are removed, sign posts course, crosswalks or pavement shall also be removed as soon as markings without complete approval of possible. this separate plan by the Engineer, or 2. Removal of signs and barricades shall without inclusion of these elements in start at the end of construction areas and the above-referenced sequence of proceed toward oncoming traffic, unless construction. , otherwise directed by the Engineer. B. Restoration of Roadway Surfaces: 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I. Restore all roadway surfaces and areas disturbed within 30 calendar days time A. At least 24 hours prior to construction and after completion of utility work. upon request, present all traffic control , Maintenan ce of Traffic 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 01558- 6 A-ALBEV 0113 IJ LJ [1 i 2. Time elapsed between initial construction disruption to completion of bituminous base course shall not exceed 40 calendar days. 3. A roadway will be considered "restored" when all backfilling and compaction is complete and a bituminous surface suitable to handle vehicular traffic has been installed; except as otherwise permitted by the Engineer. 3.05 ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES A. General Requirements: 1. In addition to the traffic control devices approved by the Engineer prior to each stage of construction, the Engineer may require more traffic control as traffic conditions warrant. 2. Furnish and install the additional traffic control devices ordered by the Engineer. 3. The devices shall be installed and maintained in a functional and legible condition at all times. B. Method of Measurement: 1. Individual .traffic control devices will not be measured. All traffic control devices installed on the project and stored on the site will be included in a lump sump quantity. C. Basis of Payment: I. Paymentfor all traffic control devices of each type, installed and stored in the project shall be on a lump sum basis at the unit price as listed on the bid form. Payment shall be compensation in full for all costs of furnishing, installing, maintaining, and subsequently removing and disposing of the devices. END OF SECTION 2002 Northwest Commercial Park A-ALBEV 0113 Maintenance of TrafFc 01558- 7 LJ Traffic Confrol Treatment of Longitudinal Joints and Edge Drop-offs in Work- Zones GUIDELINES THESE GUiDEUNES ARE INTENDED TO INCREASE TRAFFIC SAFETY USING TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES. SAFETY RELATED APPURTENANCES, AND CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES FOR UNEVEN LANES, At1L1ED EDGES, ANO EDGE DROP-OFFS THAT OCGUR IN HIGHWAY WORK ZONES. THE BEST WAY TO INCREASE TRAFFlC SAFETY IS TO IAAiCE EVERY ATTEMPT TO 1liNiflTZE EXPOSURE TO UNEVEN LANES. MILLED EDGES. AND EDGE DROP-OFFS; HOWEVER, R tS REALIZED THAT THIS- tS OFTEN NOT POSSIBLE OR FEASIBLE. ONLY WHEN UNEVEN LANES. flill.ED EDGES, OR EDGE DROP-OFFS ARE DEEMED NECESSARY. SHALL THE APPROPRIATE PORTiON(S) OF THESE GUiDELTNES BE APPLIED TO ENHANCE TRAFFIC SAFETY. APPROPRATE UNEVEN LANE WARNING S10NS OR SHOULDER WARNING S10NS SHALL BE REPEJI7ED AFTER EACH iNTERSECTiON. i~UXI1~tUA1 WARNING SIGN SPAgNO SHALL BE: A - 1 MILE WHEN THE SPEED L1LIR tS GREATER 7HAN 30 MPH AND B - 1/4 MiLE WHEN THE SPEED UUfT is 30 MPH OR LESS. WHEN SPACE PERII[TS, 6tINIMUM WARNING SiCN SiZE SHALL BE: A - 41j INCHES x 48 INq~ES WHEN THE SPEED LriATT tS GREATER THEN 30 WPH AND B - 36 INCHES x 3a INCHES WHEN THE SPEED UfAR iS 30 MPH OR LESS. _ 1. FOR DROP-OFFS OF t-i/2 INCHES OR LESS. APPROPRIATE WARNiNO SiGNS SHALL BE PROVIDED. 2. FOR DROP-OFFS GREATER THAN 1-1/2 INCHES UP TO 4 INCHES: A -THE EDGE SHALL BE TAPERED AND COiPACTED AT A RATE OF 3:1 AND APPROPRIATE WARNING SiGNS SHALL BE PROVIDED; OR B - iF THE TAPER IS NOT PROVIDED, TRAFFIC SHALL NOT BE PERIAFTTED T'0 CROSS THE DROP-OFF AND THAT PORTION OF THE ROADWAY SHALL BE CIDSED TO TRAFFIC WiTH THE APPROPRIATE WARNING SICNS AND DEVICES. 3. FOR DROP-OFFS GREATER THAN 4 INCHES UP TO 12 INCHES: A -THE EDGE SHALL BE TAPERED AND COIPACTED AT A RATE OF 6:1 AND APPROPRIATE WARNING SIGNS SHALL BE PROVIDED, (6:1 TAPER SHALL NOT BE USED AS A TRAFFIC CARRYING LANE); B -THE EDGE SHALL BE TAPERED AND COMPACTED AT A RATE OF 3:1, TRAFFIC SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED TO CROSS THE DROP-OFF. AND THAT PORTION OF THE ROADWAY SHALL BE CLASED TO TRAFFIC WiTH APPROPRLATE WARNING SIGNS ANO CHANNEL- (ZING DEVICES; OR C - IF A TAPER IS NOT PROVIDED. THE TRAFFIC OR AUXiUARY lAF1E AD.UICENT TO THE DROP-OFF SHALL BE CLOSED TO TRAFFIC WTFH THE APPROPRIATE WARNING SIGNS ANO CHANNELIZINO DEVICES OR A POSFTIVE BARRIER. SUCH AS A PORTABLE PRECAST CONCRETE BARRIER. SHALL BE PROVIDED TO PREVENT TTtAFF1C FROIi Cf205SiN0 THE DROP-OFF. 4. FOR SHOULDER EDGE DROP-OFFS: A - 0-2 FOOT SHOULDER WIDTH AND A 0-12 INCH DROP-OFF; USE GUIDELINES AS SHOWN B - 2-6 FOOT SHOULDER WIDTH AND A 0-4 INCH DROP-OFF: INSTALL EDGEUNE OR USE GUIDELINES AS SHOWN C - 6 FOOT OR GREATER SHOULDER WIDTH AND A 0-4 INCH DROP-OFF; NO TRAFFIC CONTROL REQUIRED. 0 -GREATER THAN 2 FOOT SHOULDER WIDTH AND A 4-12 INCH DROP-OFF; USE GUIDELINES AS SHOWN 3. DROP-OFFS GREATER THAN 4 INCHES ADJACENT TO TRAFFIC CARRYING LANES ARE PERAIfTTED WTFHOUT TAPERS OR POSfTTVE BARRIERS FORS A -PROJECTS WITHIN URBAN AREA WHEN THE SPEED UNIT is 30 1/PH OR UsS; OR B -SNORT T7=RIA (7 CALENDAR DAYS OR LESS) CONCRETE OR UTILITY REPAIR. LESS T}IAN 50 FEET IN LENGTH WHEN THE SPEED UiAIT is GREATER THAN 30 IIPH. E IAORE THAN ONE UNEVEN LANE CONDITION BETWEEN THE LL Q. THERE B AT NO TiME SHA TRAFFIC CARRYING LANES WHICH INCLUDE AUXILIARY LANES, TURN LINES, AND RAMP ACCESS OR EGRESS AREAS. WEATHER PERI.IFFTiNO, ALL E7(POSED UNEVEN IANES CONDITIONS WITHIN THE TRAFFIC .CARRYING LANEx SHALL BE '-IATCHEO~' WITHIN 24 HOURS_ 7. iAlWNO OPERATIONS SHALL BE REQUIRED TO C01tPUTE THE FULL WIDTH OF THE SECTION UNDER CONSTRUCTION AT THE END OF EACH WORK PERIOD. I of 4 Traffic Control Treatment oC - i.ongitu.dinol .Joints and Edge Orop-offs in Work Zones GUIDELINES FONT. _ Appvopriafe urievcn lane wa.cning signs or shoulder warnings signs shall be repraicd after tach intcrsoctlon_ ~ - Maximum warning sign spacing shall bc: a - 1 mile when the speed limit is greater than.30 mph, and b - U4 mile when the spa~d limit is 30 mph or less_ When space permits, minimum warning sign size shah bc: a - 48 inches x 48 inches when the spcod limit is greater than 30 mph, and b - 36 inches x 35 inches. when -the speed limit is 30 mph or less. 2 0l 4 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 "TRAFFIC CONTROL TREATMENT OF CONGITUOINAC JOINTS ANO EDGE DROP--OFFS IN KORK ZONES UNEVEN CANES Y20-X14 • MAXIMUM 1 - I /2 I N. ~ ( L OR R ? ~s UNEvEN LJ~NES - uITH TaPER _ • Y20-X14 I-I/-2 IN.• TO 4 IN, ct_ OR R3 ~.~ T tn.Es I- 1 /2 I N. T4 4 I N. LANE SI tn[_l 6E CLOSED v I TH APPROE~R t ATE ll~E 0.0Si1RE FROti APPf-NO I X B. CFil~t-t~L I Z I NG OEY I CES AT A MAX I MlR1 OF I80 FT. SPACIt~iG ANO A TYPE III BARRICADE EVERY 1000 FT_ NOTES FOR DIVIDED H[GH6fAYS. USE .SIGNS ON R[GHT ANO LEFT SLOE. SIGN SEOUEN~CE SHOVM FOR-ONE DIRECTION ONLY OTHER DIRECTION SFIALt. 6E IDENTICAL. ^ MICCEO EDGE V2l-X9 NEON N(01 vOC;DE)t i•Q~bpt f NOTE• HI~~EO EDGES si-+0cx_0 BE 7REnTEO vITH TnPERS. CE-tcarcr+ELtZERS. ADO SIGNING AS SHOvN ON EDGE DROP-OFF DETAILS. 3 OF 4 TRAFFIC CONTROL TREATMENT OF LONGITUDINAL ,JOINTS ANp EDGE DROP-OFFS IN WORK ZONES EDGE DROP OFF us-9 nor MAXIMUM I - 1 /2 I N. ~~""`~ Y8-9 1-1/2 IN. TO 4 IN. EDGE DROP OFF - WITH 7aPER ~. 1 1-1/2 IN. TO 4 IN. .,~ w2I-xI DEI2 SHA(,.L BE s.u~.~ a.osEO PITH MATE YARNING SIGNS AND giEY~I.iZING DEVICES AT A HAXIHUti OF I00 FT_ SPACING_ '~ EDGE DROP-OFF KITN TAPER ~_4 t SHOUI_0ER - OPEN ) 4 I N. TO 12 I N. ~, THIS COC~ITIOCt PILL. NOi 6E - PERKITTEp UNLESS THE 6~I SLOPE IS ~ COf1PACTEO SO .THAT a VEHICLE HAY SAFELY ~ DRIVE ONTO IT YITHOUT USING CONTROL ANO IN THE OPINION OF THE ENGINEER THERE ARE NO OTHER HaZAF200U$ CONO[TIONS_ EDGE DROP-OFF WITH TAPER (SH0Ul..0ER - CI.0SE0 ) ~R SHALL BE CLOSED PITH APPROPRIATE YARNING SIGNS AND p-IZ[NG DEVICES AT A HA)CIMAi OF 100 FT. SPACING ~~NT IANE $}-1ALL B£ CIOSEO vITH ~'PROPRIATE LANE CLOSURE LAYOUT Sf-iOVN IN APPEI~IX B. a~NQIZING DEVICES TO BF AT A HAX I FAJN OF 100 F T. SPAC [ NG ANO TYpE II[ EVERY 1000 FT_ 4 IN. TO 12 IN. .a u2t-x1 •+~c~ocx 1, t 1 NOTE. SIGNS ARE REOUIREO ONLY ON THE SIDE OF THE ROAD THaT IS AFFECTED BY COrrSTRUCTION (EXCEPT SIGNS THAT ARE FOR A LaNE CLOSURE ON OIv10E0 HIGRVAYSi_ 4 OF q t t t 1 1 4 IN. TO 12 IN, 1 1 ~\ ~~ m m ~ o`o ~_ -3 °m -° ~ E m Em°o°w3o~~° aD ° T~ou~ ~ p ~' wc m~ Evo°o~ C~.~_ V- 6 L y - ~• o~ F~ Fp' ~ ` ~ Dom- d m C _C O p~~ J O m ° E ~~~ R+~? dim ~ i ~ c off iN L O i °' °ow • Y a ~ v ~ yOO~-E~o~-< o°c 4 o~m~ c ~ 0 m 0 3 ° ~o °o°~~° ~p - °-~apo~OE p '~~ti w» ° y u ~ m ~ ra `m c DLL b O p O C V O ° G' y~ rom - m C OP a° `E ~`°- s o o, W - O o u~ o ,~ L`OOOVa m ° d.., ~.~y m ~ ` oEa~.oEm. of . mC~m 4 L °, . n O °o m mo~° 3c mL m?~ o a ~- L a bi i' i my ~ ~ ~ F ~ ~ = ° m ~ H L r rn n°'' L pvoc ~ o ~n~~ 3 ~~ Z W ~ ~ o ~ o~ °i N ~ ~ ~ o W ~v o cm mtld ° o ~ twit °E-°E~n° -~ -'o ~OUOLC oD a ti ~y tid~p ~ -o' ~ T / E ~ m O _ F _ { \ °vrn co o® R ~~ < m \\ CV O m FL-NO ° m or uv ~.° ~ ~ m o Q.~y v o N O O ~ _ ~ S 7 ~ ~t ° W ~ 3 .+- ~ d ^ W ? O- On m O O o, c 3 m..-W W .._°a ° E vOm Emn U °°m° o v L~~ E~° ~ O NO~ mn m ~ E " ° N'O nN _ cm E o LL ~ O ° 0v o ~ r O ~ ~ oo TL ° m0 ~ 00 m v N 4- N ~_ L - ~ ~ _ C ° ~ ~ ~ - O-y,- 3 L o o v°m n°nc>. h~ n mom ~ O F c N ~ mt4m ~ -" vE ~ my m °O~ ~O _ L L ~`c o n. - c o `o L ° m ° ; m ° ~D N jj ___LOO ~ ~ m v `~ ~ $ n my m L ° ° ±~ m myO ` L - _ ~ mm 11J _ ~ o_ ° N ~~ °~ ~ J x v m m ° Cl CD ~ R r ~ ~ h rn_ 1 - ° N- ~vC ~ p Lmm N * . O m E~°D 0 N ~ n ~ -m-D -"n o OLD - ° ~ C 1 .~ dF mC m0 -L n -+- .~ m ~ Eo°_ mv° Ec m - N3L p p c,n3u L o v n=m - o (/~ mo'''o (~ m mn oo `~ n o - t - _ =o~ m~ Q o °~cc ~ o o~ ~ O N c v ~ mo °.m mo °x - o Nr- oonm o ~ -lF ~ s D a om ~ °-~ '~ L C ~ (~ O Ica` nEo o"'n mo m ^ t_''.o 3L ooh v~u O O O z s ': ~-~- ~ o ~ ~o ~ o y J H I i-- ` ° ` ° - - - No $ o $ N ~ o v ~ N ~ N v~ °z ~ ` ` 3 c E E 1 N m m-- N N L= N ~ o o E v v a° Qa O m n -~ m _ 3_° ~ ° ° °~E.- ~ o >. ° ~ N~ O ^ Lmn ~ ~ l ~~ tO ~o ~Nm ~ ~ ~ ..m. L O O p~~. E L O Z O Iy N °~ O h ~ m h 1 vv ° = ° ° n N o` `v of °, ~ oco ~ L L- Q _ }( 3f n Z 3 7! 31f 8 8 y° - - $ 8 a ' a 8 ' - - m n m m 4 3 W V m c. ~ F ° ~ Q o O yE~mm of °° _ ~ ~ e h W 3 m~°~ Comm aE - - s s -- a m - E E E ~ co m `E_ oov~o ~`c~ _ °-ao~v~ mc ~ L ~ s b S ° n ~ ~ v v v ~ a ° ° ~ c o mL t t t t n° ov D % ~ a v c ~ z - one aana o m~ oo~~~~ ~~mr - `-' x m N ao. W H N `0 o a~ b N~ O J x O C U O ° O ~ :[ 3S L o 0 V O^ ~ -. FO _m C ° ~ D` L o 0 ~ LL gg 2 ~ * Z 3 ~ g e ~ C N . ~ ~ O O W ii 0 O m - N } L -° ~ ~NO- ~ ~ g ! 3 i 8 o - 8 8 ~ - - ° m E ~ ° C ° ~ o W O: o ~ v~~ mom"- ° ° °= ~ m s a '9 8 S a s v D E N o, s ° _ N O S ' D ¢¢ ~ g Z O ~ O L O p O n 0 li F- V .~ m ~ y Y s ~p .. N O ~ a ~ v p O e a o z $ ~ a F 0 •.\~ . SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sections Include: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements governing: a. Product definitions b. Product quality assurance c. Products d. Product delivery, storage and handling e. Product options f. Product installation g. Cleaning and protection 2. Product Substitution Procedures s 1 1 1.02 PRODUCT DEFINITIONS A. Products: 1. Unless indicated otherwise, new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures and systems forming the Work. 2. Does not include machinery ~ and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying or erection Qf the Work. B. Named Products: 1. Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model designation, indicated in the manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. A product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections such as wiring or piping. 1.03 PRODUCT QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: 1. To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind and from a single source. B. Limited Quantities: 1. When specified products are available only from sources that do not or can not produce a quantity adequate to complete Project requirements in a timely manner, consult with the Engineer for a determination of the most important product qualities before proceeding. 2. Qualities may include attributes relating to: a. Visual appearance b. Strength c. Durability d. Compatibility 3. When a determination has been made, select products from sources that possess these qualities, to the fullest extent possible. 1.04 PRODUCTS A. Minimum Requirements: 1. Comply with specifications and referenced standards. C. Materials: 1. Products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed for a part of the Work. D. Equipment: B. Product Provision: 1. Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect. C. Components: 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Product Requirements A-ALBEV 0113 01600 - 1 1. Items required to be supplied in quantity within a specification section shall be 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE the same and shall be interchangeable. AND HANDLING D. Compatibility of Options: A. General Re uirements: q 1. When the Contractor is given the option 1. Deliver, store and handle products in of selecting between two or more accordance with the manufacturer's products for use on the Project, the recommendations. product selected shall be compatible 2. Prevent damage, deterioration, soiling with products previously selected, even and loss, including theft. if previously selected products were also 3. Replace damaged materials .prior to options. acceptance by Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Existing Products: 1. Do not use materials and equipment B. Packing and Shipping: removed from existing premises, except 1. Deliver products to the jobsite in as specifically required or permitted by manufacturer's sealed containers, Contract Documents. bearing the manufacturer's name and brand. F. Nameplates: 1. Except for required labels and operating C. Acceptance at Site: data, do not attach or imprint ' ' 1. Promptly inspect shipments to assure manufacturer s or producer s that: nameplates or trademarks on exposed a. Products comply with requirements surfaces of products -which will be b. Quantities are correct exposed to view in occupied spaces or c. Products are undamaged on the exterior. a. Labels: D. Storage and Protection: 1) Locate required product labels 1. Store with manufacturer's seals and and stamps on a concealed labels intact and legible. surface or, where required for 2. Store sensitive products in weather - observation after installation, on tight, climate controlled enclosures. an accessible surface that is not 3. Cover products subject to deterioration conspicuous. with pervious sheet covering, providing b. Equipment Nameplates: ventilation to avoid condensation. 1) Provide- a •permanent nameplate 4. For exterior storage of fabricated on each item of service- products, place on sloped supports, connected or power-operated above the ground. equipment. Locate on an easily 5. Store loose granular materials on solid accessible surface which is flat surfaces in awell-drained area. inconspicuous in occupied Prevent mixing with foreign matter. spaces. The nameplate shall 6. Provide off-site storage and protection contain the following when site does not permit on-site information -and other essential storage or protection. operating data: 7. Arrange storage of products to permit a) Name of product and access for inspection. Periodically manufacturer inspect to assure products are b) Model and serial number undamaged and are maintained under c) Capacity required conditions. d) Speed e) Ratings Product Requirements 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 01600 - 2 A-ALBEV 0113 1.06 PRODUCT OPTIONS the manufacturer for the application indicated. A. General Requirement: a. Manufacturer's recommendations 1. Product selection is governed by the may be contained in published Contract Documents and governing product literature or by the regulations by .previous project manufacturer's certification of experience. performance. 2. General overall performance of a B. Proprietary Specification Requirements: product is implied where the product is 1. Where only a single product or specified for a specific application. manufacturer is named, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will F. Compliance with .Standards, Codes and be permitted. Regulations: 1. Where the specifications -only require C. Semi-Proprietary Specification compliance with an imposed code, Requirements: 1. Where two or more products or standard or regulation, select a product that complies with applicable standards, manufacturers are named, provide one codes and regulations. of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. 1.07 SUBNIITTALS a. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, accompanied A. Substitution Request Prior to Bid: by the term "or equal," or "or 1. For a product substitution to be approved equal" comply with other considered, the following conditions Contract Document provisions must be met: concerning "substitutions" to obtain a. All requests must be submitted in approve for use of an unnamed writing no later than 10 calendar product. days prior to the date for receipt of b. Contractors and. suppliers will be the bids. expected to provide the specified b. Faxed submittals will not be product unless prior approval is considered. received from the Engineer's office in sufficient time so that all bidders c. Submit each request for substitution (one material or product per form) can be notified through an on the attached "Substitution. addendum. Request Form" attached at the end of this section (either duplicated D. Descriptive Specification Requirements: from the Project Manual or 1. Where specifications describe a product available from the Engineer's or assembly and list exact characteristics office) together with a self- required, with or without use of a brand addressed, stamped envelope. or trade name, provide a product or Submittals not accompanied by this assembly that provides the form properly filled in and endorsed characteristics and otherwise complies will be discarded without review. with contract requirements. No exceptions. d. Identify any impact of the E. Performance Specification Requirements: substituted product on related items. 1. Where specifications require compliance e. Approved items will be hsted m with performance requirements, provide addenda. Requests for substitution products that comply with these will be returned in the self- . requirements and are recommended by addressed, stamped envelope 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Product Re uirernents q A-ALBEV 0113 01600 - 3 provided by bidder at the Engineer's earliest convenience. 2. Permitted Substitutions: a. All substitutions permitted on addenda must meet, or exceed, all requirements of the specifications, including, but not limited to, the warranty. B. Substitution Request After Bid: 1. Requests for substitution will be considered if received within 60 days after commencement of the work. Requests received more than 60 days after commencement of the work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Engineer. a. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests in the form and in accordance with. procedures required for change order proposals. b. Identify the product or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related specification Section and Drawing number. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate: 1) Product data, including drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication and installation procedures. 2) Samples, where applicable or requested. 3) A detailed comparison ` of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as size, weight, durability, performance and visual effect. 4) Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate contractors that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution. 5) A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's construction schedule, compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall contract time. 6) Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any, in the contract sum. 7) Certification by the Contractor that the substitution proposed is equal to, or better, in every significant respect to that required by the Contract Documents, and that it will perform adequately in the application indicated, Include the Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may.. subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the .substitution to perform adequately. C. Substitutions: 1. Conditions: a. The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered by the Engineer when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Engineer. Otherwise, requests will be returned without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1) Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required. 2) Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents. 3) The request is timely, fully documented and properly submitted. (Contractors and suppliers will be expected to Product Requirements 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 01600 - 4 A-ALBEV 0113 rl 1 a provide the specified product 9) The specified product or method unless prior approval is received of construction cannot provide a from the Engineer's office in sufficient time so that all warranty required by the Contract Documents and where bidders can be notified through , the Contractor certifies that the an addendum. proposed substitution provides 4) The specified product or method the required warranty. of construction cannot be 10) Where a proposed substitution provided within the contract involves .more than one prime time. The request will not be Contractor, each Contractor considered if the product or shall cooperate with the other method cannot be provided as a contractors involved to result of failure to pursue the coordinate- the work, provide work promptly or coordinate uniformity and consistency, and activities properly. to assure compatibility of 5) The specified product or method products. of construction cannot receive b. Limitations: necessary approval by a 1) The Contractor's submittal and governing authority, and the the Engineer's acceptance of requested substitution can be shop drawings, product data, or approved. samples that relate to 6) A substantial advantage is construction activities not offered to the Owner in terms of complying with the Contract cost, time, energy conservation, Documents, does not constitute or other considerations of merit, an acceptable or valid request after deducting offsetting for substitution, nor does it responsibilities the Owner may constitute approval. be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for the Owner D. Engineer's Action: may include additional 1. Request Prior to Bid: compensation to the Engineer a. If approved, substitution will be for redesign and evaluation included in an addendum. services, increased cost of other 2. Request After Bid construction by the Owner or a. If necessary, within one week of separate contractors, and similar receipt of the request for considerations. substitution, the Engineer will 7) The specified product or method request additional information or of construction cannot be documentation necessary for provided in a manner that is evaluation of the request. Within compatible with other materials, two weeks of receipt of the request, and where the Contractor or one week of receipt of the certifies that the substitution additional information or will overcome the documentation, whichever is later, incompatibility. the Engineer will notify the 8) The specified product or method Contractor of acceptance or of construction cannot be rejection of the proposed coordinated with other substitution. If a decision on use of a materials, and where the proposed substitute cannot be made Contractor certifies that the or obtained within the time proposed substitution can be allocated, use the product specified coordinated. 2002 Northwest Co mmercial Park Product Requirements A-ALBEV 0113 01600 - 5 f. Records: 3) Assurance that work not 1) Test/adjust/balance records complete and accepted will be 2) Startup performance reports completed without undue delay 3) Inspection Reports: 4) Final cleaning a) Alarm tests b. Transfer of Site to Owner: 1) Removal of temporary facilities C. Inspection Procedures: and services 1. When prerequisites are complete, submit 2) Removal of surplus materials, request in writing to Engineer stating rubbish, similar elements that all requirements are satisfied and c. Submittals: requesting inspection. Upon receipt of 1) Consent of Surety (if Contractor's request for inspection, Performance Bond provided) Engineer will either proceed with 2) Assurance that unsettled claims inspection or advise Contractor of will be settled unfilled prerequisites. 3) Transmittal of required project- a. Following initial inspection, construction records to Owner Engineer will either prepare 4) Proof that fees and similar Certificate of Substantial obligations have been paid Completion, or advise Contractor of 5) Form IC-134, "Affidavit for Work which. must be performed Obtaining Final Settlement of before certificate will be issued. Contract with State of Engineer will repeat inspection Minnesota and any of its when requested and when assured Political or Governmental that Work has been substantially Subdivisions. completed. 6) Certified copy of Engineer's- b. Results of completed inspection will final punch list of itemized work form initial "punch list" for final to be completed or corrected, acceptance. stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved 1.04 PREREQUISITES TO FINAL for acceptance and has been ACCEPTANCE endorsed and dated by Engineer. 7) Evidence of final, continuing A. General Requirements: insurance coverage complying ' 1. Complete, submit before requesting with insurance requirements. Engineer's final inspection for d. Certificates of insurance for certification of final acceptance and products and completed operations final payment as required by General where required. Conditions. List known exceptions, if i 1) Final liquidated damages any, n request. settlement statement, acceptable to Owner B. Final Payment Application: 1. Administrative actions and submittals C. Re-inspection Procedure: which must precede or .coincide with 1. Engineer will re-inspect work upon submittal of final payment application receipt of notice that work, including for payment include: punch list items resulting from earlier a. Completion of Work: inspections has been completed except 1) Completion of Project , , for items whose completion has been requirements delayed because of circumstances that 2) Completion of items specified are acceptable to Engineer will either for completion after Substantial prepare a certificate of final acceptance, Completion or will advise Contractor of Work that is Closeout Procedures 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 01770 - 2 A-ALBEV 0113 incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled, but are required for final acceptance. If necessary, re- inspection procedure will be repeated. 1.05 RECORDbOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: 1. Refer to other sections of specifications for requirements of miscellaneous record keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of work. Immediately prior to date or dates of substantial completion, complete miscellaneous records, place in good order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to Engineer for Owner's records. B. Maintenance Manuals: 1. Organize operating, maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind into individual heavy-duty 2-inch, 3-ring vinyl-covered binders with pocket folders, each set of data marked with appropriate identification on both front and spine of each binder. Include: a. Emergency instructions b. Spare parts listing c. Copies of warranties d. Wiring diagrams e. Recommended "turnaround" cycles f. Inspection procedures g. Shop drawings and product data PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used 1 END OF SECTION 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Closeout Procedures A-ALBEV 0113 01770 - 3 [i 1 1 t 1 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY SECTION 02010 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of sections in Division One of this Project. Manual apply to the Work of this Section as fully as though repeated herein. B. Section includes: 1. Payment procedures for Mobilization, Testing, Field Offices, and Permits. 2. Existing utility locations. 3. Subsurface conditions. 4. Permitting responsibilities. 5. Increased and decreased quantities. 6. Construction Staking notice and protection thereof. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 00800 - Supplementary Conditions 2. Section 01110 -Summary of Work 3. Section 01450 -Quality Control 4. Section 01500 -Temporary Facilities and Controls 1.02 PAYMENT A. Mobilization: Payment for mobilization shall be at the lump sum bid price. Payment will be made as follows: When 10 percent of the Work is complete, 50 percent mobilization will be paid; when 30 percent of Work is complete, 75 percent mobilization will be paid; when 50 percent of Work is complete, 95 percent mobilization will be paid; when 100 percent of Work is complete, 100 percent mobilization will be paid. B. Construction testing shall be done as stated in Section 01450. t 2002 Northwest Commercial Park C. Permits: The Contractor shall pay all bonds associated with obtaining permits from the County, Minnesota Department of Transportation, and the Department of Natural Resources. Payment of these bonds shall be considered incidental to the Contract. 1.03 UTILITIES A. The Drawings show only known underground utilities, public and private, and the locations are approximate. No assurance is given that additional underground facilities do not exist. B. The Contractor shall notify Gopher State One Call at .651.454.0002 prior to commencement of any excavation operation. C. The Contractor shall make his own investigation to determine to what extent existing utilities shall affect his Work. D. The location, protection, maintenance and/or repair, if damaged, of all in-place utilities shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. E. Where construction operations require the interruption of services of a utility, the Contractor shall notify that utility at least 24 hours before the interruption and shall advise him of the probable time when the service will be restored. 1.04 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS A. Copies of the soils reports have been bound as an appendix to this Project Manual. B. Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy of or continuity between soil borings. It is expressly understood that Owner or Engineer will not be responsible General Provisions A-ALBEV 0113 02010 -1 for interpretation or conclusions drawn therefrom by Contractor. Data is made available for convenience of Contractor. C. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to determine to his own satisfaction the location and nature of all surface obstacles and the soil and water conditions which will be encountered during the construction. D. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by Contractor at no cost to Owner. 1.05 PERMITS A. The Owner has applied for and will obtain the following permits: 1. MPCA - Sanitary Sewer Extension Permit 2. Minnesota Health Department -Water Main Extension Permit 3. Wright County Highway Department - Utility Permit 4. Wright County Highway Department Driveway Permit, 5. Minnesota Department of Transportation -Utility Permit 6. US Army Corps of Engineers -Wetland Mitigation Permit 7. BNSF Railroad - Pipeline Crossing Permit B. Since the surface area to be disturbed under this Project exceeds 30 acres in size, and thus becomes subject to the Storm Water Permit Program administered by the Minnesota Pollution Control Agency, the Contractor shall submit a "Application for General Storm Water Permit for Construction Activity (MNR100000)" to the MPCA and shall become the sole permittee responsible for implementing the short- and long-term best management practices. Where specific bid items are included in the Bid Form for erosion control, the Contractor will be paid the unit price bid for furnishing and installing these erosion control items in the locations and to the extent shown on the Drawings. Where there are no specific bid items for erosion control, or where erosion General Provisions control is required to an extent over and above that shown on the Drawings or allowed for in the quantities on the Bid Form, this additional erosion control shall be incidental to the Contract. C. The Contractor shall obtain a permit from the Minnesota Department of Natural Resources if his dewatering procedure will result in a pumping or appropriation volume exceeding 10,000 gallons per day, and a permit from the Department of Health if the wells are 45 feet or more in depth. D. All other permits shall be obtained by the Contractor in .accordance with the Supplemental General Conditions. PART2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION STAKES A. Contractor shall give atwo-working-day notice to the Engineer prior to placement of reference points, survey markings or construction stakes. B. All costs for replacement and checking of reference points, survey markings or construction stakes lost due to the negligence of the Contractor will be charged to the Contractor. If such costs are not paid to the Engineer after being billed to the Contractor, the Engineer may recommend to the Owner that such costs be deducted from future payments. END OF SECTION 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 1 1 1 1 1 t t t 02010 - 2 A-ALBEV 0113 SECTION 02100 SITE PREPARATION PART 1 GENERAL Park Site west of County Road 19 shall be paid for as common excavation and shall 1.01 SUMMARY include all labor, equipment and appurtenances associated with the work. A. Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of sections in Division One of this C. Topsoil stripping, stockpiling and .Project Manual, apply to the Work of this Section as fully as though repeated herein. replacement on the East Utility Extension as shown in the plans shall be considered incidental to associated pipe installation. B. Section includes: 1. Protection of existing facilities. 2. Postal delivery. PART 2 PRODUCTS 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Topsoil stripping and placement. 2.01 MATERIALS 5. Disposal of materials. 6. Site cleanup. A. Construction or protection fencing for trees or other existing facilities shall be orange C. Related Sections plastic snow fence, fastened to metal or 1. Section 02115 -Site Grading wood posts. 1.02 SITE CONDITION PART 3 EXECUTION A. Contractor shall accept the sites in their present .condition. Any clearing and 3.01 PROTECTION OF EXISTING grubbing shall be limited to those areas FACILITIES where new construction is shown. Payment for topsoil stripping, stockpiling, and A. All trees not designated for removal shall be replacement shall be incidental. to the protected in-place. If it becomes apparent contract. that a tree must be removed due to construction, the Engineer will mark which 1.03 PAYMENT trees shall. be removed. The Contractor shall make every effort to protect the trees. If, in A. Payment for clearing and grubbing shall be the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor at the Contract unit price for each tree operates in a reckless manner so as to cause cleared and grubbed. The Contractor must damage to a tree, the tree shall be removed satisfy himself by personal examination of and replaced with an Owrier -accepted tree the site to the size and diameter of trees to at no cost to the Owner. be removed. No additional payment will be made for any discrepancy between the type B. All trees shall be protected by fencing or and diameter of tree to be cleared and approved barricades. grubbed identified on the Drawings and what is found on the Project site. C. All existing facilities designated on the 1 Drawings as to be protected shall be fenced. B. Topsoil stripping, stockpiling and replacement on the Northwest Commercial `~ 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Site Preparation A-ALBEV 0113 02100 - 1 D. Contractor shall inspect and maintain responsible for compliance with all federal, protective fencing on a daily basis. state and local laws and regulations applicable to burning and controlling fires. 3.02. CLEARING AND GRUBBING 3.05 SITE CLEANUP A. Vegetation such as brush, trees, heavy sod, decayed matter, rubbish and other unsuitable A. Remove all protective fencing when material within rights-of--way, fill areas and construction is complete and prior to final as indicated on the Drawings shall be payment. stripped or otherwise removed before the excavation or backfill is started. In no case B. Remove all unused materials and debris as shall objectionable vegetative material be the site work progresses. Before the site allowed in or under fill. work is considered complete, all rubbish and unused material due to excavation and B. No trees shall be removed without grading, or connected with the final site authorization from the Engineer in the field. improvement, must be removed or disposed of to the satisfaction of the Engineer. C. In areas requiring construction of embankments or fill, all stumps, roots, etc. shall be removed to a depth of at least one END OF SECTION foot below the existing ground surface. Stump holes and other holes from which objectionable material have been removed shall be backfilled with acceptable material and compacted to the density specified for the fill or embankment section they are in. 3.03 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND PLACEMENT A. Topsoil shall be stripped from all rights-of- way, utility easements and embankment fill - areas and stockpiled in areas designated on the drawings or as directed by the Owner. Remove heavy growths of grass and vegetation from areas prior to stripping topsoil. Where trees are to be left standing, stop topsoil stripping a sufficient distance to prevent damage to the main root system. Topsoil shall be replaced on the top of final embankments and other disturbed areas not covered by sidewalks and pavements... 3.04 DISPOSAL A. All perishable material shall be removed ~' from the site. If burned, it shall be under the constant care of competent workmen and in such a manner that .the surrounding vegetation and adjacent property is not jeopardized. The Contractor will be Site Pre aration P 2002 Northwest Commerci I Park a 02100 - 2 A-ALBEV 0113 1 1 I1 i i 1 SECTION 02110 DEMOLITION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY settlement or collapse of nearby structures or facilities during demolition procedures. A. Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of .this Project Manual apply to the Work of this Section as fully as though repeated herein. B. Section includes: 1. Removals. 2. Salvages. 3. Salvage and reinstall fence. 4. Removal and reinstallation. 5. Sawcut Bituminous Pavement. 6. Mill Bituminous Pavement. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 02510 -Roadways 2. Section 02660 -Water Distribution 3. Section 02720 -Storm Sewer 4. Section 02730 -Sanitary Sewer 1.02 REFERENCES A. References are made hereinafter to certain Minnesota Department of Transportation Specifications. These shall apply as .applicable and except as may be otherwise specified herein. Use the 2000 Edition of the Mn/DOT Standard Specifications and the Supplemental Specifications for Construction. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Examine the subgrade, verify the elevations, observe the conditions under which the Work is to be performed. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Provide interior and exterior bracing, shoring, or support to prevent movement, 2002 Northwest Commercial Park A-ALBEV 0113 C. Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilitates during demolition operations, as directed by the Engineer at no cost to the Owner. 1.04 PAYMENT A. Payment for removals shall be at the lump sum or unit bid price as indicated on the bid form. Payment. shall include all costs for labor and equipment, removing, hauling and disposing of material as directed by the Engineer, and as shown on the Drawings. B. Payment for remove bituminous pavement shall be at unit price bid as listed on the bid form. Payment shall include all costs for labor, equipment and disposal of the material. C. Payment for salvage shall be at the lump sum or unit bid price as indicated on the bid form. Payment shall include all costs for labor and equipment, salvaging, and reinstallation of the material. D. Payment for removal and re-installations shall be at the lump sum or unit bid price as indicated on the bid form. Payment shall include all costs for labor and equipment, removing, storing and reinstalling of the material as directed by the Engineer and as shown on the Drawings. E. Payment for salvage and reinstall fence shall be at the unit bid price as listed on the bid form. Payment shall include all labor equipment and reinstallation of the fence. F. Payment for milling bituminous pavement shall be at the unit bid price as indicted on the bid form. Payment shall include all Demolition 02110 - 1 costs for labor and equipment removing, hauling and disposal of material. G. Payment for sawcut bituminous pavement shall be at the unit price bid as listed on the bid form. PART2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REMOVALS A. Mn/DOT Spec Section 2104 shall apply except as modified herein. B. Culverts and Conduits: The limits of culvert or conduit removal shall be determined by the Engineer in the field. Payment for culvert and conduit removal shall include all Work and materials necessary for excavation, removal, bulkheads, hauling and disposal. C. Mill bituminous pavement shall be done in accordance with Section 2232 of the Standard Mn/DOT Specifications. 3.02 SALVAGES A. Materials designated as salvage that are damaged due to negligence by the Contractor shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.03 REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION A. All street signs in the path of construction shall be removed, stored and reinstalled by the Contractor. The Contractor shall reinstall all highway and street signs at the direction of the Engineer, unless indicated for removal on the Drawings. Demolition 02110-2 3.04 CLEANUP AND DISPOSAL A. During Work, store materials and equipment where directed. Keep streets clear and Work area in an orderly condition. B. Dispose of all removal debris, not recycled, at a MPCA approved landfill. END OF SECTION 2002 Northwest Commercial Park A-ALBEV 0113 t SECTION 02115 SITE GRADING PART 1 GENERAL be calculated by the average end area method. 1.01 SUMMARY F. Basis of Payment A. Conditions of the Contract and pertinent 1. Payment for acceptable quantities of portions of sections in Division One of this common excavation shall be at the Project Manual, apply to the Work of this Contract unit price as listed on the Bid Section as fully as though repeated herein. Form. Payment shall include excavation at the roadway, ponds 3 and 4, wetland B. Selection Includes: The Contractor shall furnish .all labor and materials necessary to mitigation. area 1, 2, 3 and 5, borrow 1 d areas an 2, and the ditch bank construct the following: grading as shown in the Earthwork 1. Common Excavation. Summary Tabulation contained in the 2. Sedimentation basins. Drawings. All associated work items 3. Detention Ponds. shall be considered incidental. 4. Wetland Mitigation Excavation. 2. Payment for acceptable quantities of 5. Ditch Bank Grading. unclassified excavation shall be at the 6. Ditch Dredging. Contract unit price as listed on the Bid 7. Disposal of Excess Material. Form. Payment shall include excavation of ponds 1 and 2, mitigation areas 6 and C. The extent and location of all Work 7, ditch dredging, and wetland specified in this section shall be as shown on excavation as shown on the Earthwork the Drawings. Summary contained in the Drawings. All associated work items shall be D. Related Sections considered incidental. 1. Section 02120 -Erosion Control 2. Section 02480 -Landscape Work 3. Payment for acceptable quantities of b d i su gra e excavat on shall be at the 3. Section 02720 -Storm Sewer Systems contract unit price as listed on the bid form. Payment shall include removal E. Method of Measurement and disposal of any unsuitable material 1. Excavation Material encountered below the common a. Common excavation and excavation limits shown on the cross unclassified excavation will be section drawings. measured by a plan quantity (p) basis. Compute volumes in cubic 1.02 REFERENCES yards by average end area method determined from original and final A. Mn/DOT 2105 cross sections. b. Subgrade excavation limits shall be 1.03 DEFINITIONS determined by Field Engineer. The Field Engineer will determine A. Excavation items will be classified in subgrade excavation quantities by accordance with Mn/DOT 2105.2. excavated volume (EV) of material in its original position. Volumes will 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Site Grading A-ALBEV 0113 02115 -1 r 1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 3.02 EXCAVATING OPERATIONS A. Complete pond grading prior to construction A. Conform to lines, grades and slopes staked of associated intake and discharge sewers. by the Engineer. B. Complete site grading prior to construction B. Excavate all suitable topsoil material of roadways and pipe work. separately and stockpile for salvage. 1.05 STAKING 3.03 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL A. The Owner or its Engineer shall provide necessary staking for site grading under this A. Use suitable excavated. materials for Contract. The Contractor shall give the embankment construction as required. Engineer 48 hours prior notice when survey stakes are needed. Construction stakes will B. Construct embankment layers from uniform be provided as follows: materials. 1. Pond dike elevations with cuts to bottom -once C. All excavated materials shall be disposed of 2. Street centerline rough grades -once on-site according to the grading plans and as 3. Storm sewer piping -once directed by the Engineer in the field. 4. Sanitary sewer -once 5. Water main -once 3.04 FINISHING OPERATIONS 6. Curb and gutter -once 7. Street corner line blue top (Class 5) - A. Finish all earthwork to within 0.1 foot of the once staked grade. B . Conduct finishing and topsoiling concurrent PART 2 PRODUCTS with the grading operations to provide for erosion control. 2.01 MATERIALS C. Place salvage topsoil in the locations to the Not Used lines and grades as shown on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.05 SPECIAL PROVISIONS TO THE MINNESOTA DEPARTMENT OF 3.01 GENERAL REQUIltEMENTS TRANSPORTATION'S STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS A. If present, remove ice and snow prior to grading operations. A. Excavation and Embankment 1. The Contractor shall perform all B. All grading shall conform to the planned excavation and embankment in grades, cross-sections and stakes. accordance -with Mn/DOT Spec. 2105. 2. Topsoil shall be stripped and salvaged C. Confine operations to established limits. for later use. Use of excess topsoil. in other areas of the Project shall be D. Provide temporary drainage facilities to considered incidental. Common maintain existing drainage courses until excavation has been computed by the permanent facilities are operative. average end area method. 3. The subgrade for the roadways shall be in conformance with Mn/DOT Spec. 2105, 2111, and 2112. No ,direct Site Grading 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 02115 - 2 A-ALBEV 0113 payment will be made for subgrade preparation or test rolling. B. Compaction Operations 1. Compaction shall be obtained by the Specified Density Method. 2. Each lift shall be uniformly compacted to a density not less than 95 percent of the Standard Proctor. 3. Determination of in place density will be made by nuclear testing. Sampling and testing. will be done by an independent testing laboratory. Density test results shall be submitted to and accepted by the Engineer. Failure by the Contractor to perform testing by the next working day shall not relieve the Contractor from performing the required tests. 4. One re-test of each failing test will be permitted and the higher of the two densities will be used. Re-testing shall be performed in a timely manner. Failure to re-test within three working days shall not relieve the Contractor from performing re-tests. All re-testing shall be at the expense of the Contractor. 5. Additional sampling and testing may be done if, in the Engineer's opinion, there is evidence that satisfactory results are not being achieved. END OF SECTION 1 1 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Site Grading A-ALBEV 0113. 02115 - 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02120 EROSION PROTECTION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of sections in Division One of this Project Manual, apply to the Work of this Section as fully as though repeated herein. B. Section includes: 1. Silt fence. 2. Erosion control blanket. 3. Bale checks. 4. Turf reinforcement mat. 5. Dust Control C. Related Sections: 1. Section 02100 -Site Preparation 2. Section 02510 -Roadways 1.02 REFERENCES 1 1 1 A. References are made hereinafter to certain Minnesota Department of Transportation Specifications. These shall apply as applicable and except as may be otherwise specified herein. Use the 2000 Edition of the Mn/DOT Standard Specifications for Construction. B. American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials (AASHTO) M288- 96 Geotextile Specifications for Road Applications. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Examine the subgrade, verify the elevations, observe the conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.04 PAYMENT A. Payment for silt fence shall be at the applicable Contract unit prices for all material required, and equipment to complete the Work as specified; including maintenance, replacement and repair as necessary. B. Payment for bale checks shall be at the Bid Unit Price per each. bale placed. Payment shall include all costs for labor, equipment, materials to place bales, and for maintenance, replacement, and repair as necessary. C. Payment for dust control shall be considered incidental to the contract PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SILT FENCE A. Shall be in accordance with Mn/DOT 3886, type heavy-duty. 2.02 BALE CHECKS A. Shall be in accordance with Mn/DOT 3882, -Type L PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACING TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL ITEMS (NIN/DOT 2573) A. Coordinate erosion control measures with earthwork and turf establishment operations. B. Complete grading, finishing,. erosion control, and turf establishment on a drainage area basis to prevent excessive soil erosion. 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Erosion Protection A-ALBEV 0113 02120 - 1 i C. Construct items in conformance with typical sections and elevation controls shown on the Drawings. D. Remove all items upon completion of the Contract Work. E. Spread and shape accumulated sediment to permit natural drainage and provide for turf establishment. F. Maintain and repair erosion control items to ensure proper function. G. Erosion control for wetland protection shall be installed prior to work on any phase of the project. 3.04 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Upon satisfactory establishment of permanent erosion control measures, temporary erosion control measures shall be removed and excess silt, soil, stones and debris shall be cleaned up. All areas disturbed by temporary erosion control operations shall be restored to their original condition or to the desired new appearance. END OF SECTION 3.02 MAINTENANCE A. Inspect silt fence immediately after each runoff event and at least daily during prolonged rainfall. Make required repairs immediately. When sediment deposits reach approximately one-half the height of the silt fence, the sediment shall be removed or a second silt fence installed. B. Should the Contractor fail to maintain erosion control measures as described above, the Owner may choose to hire another firm to maintain the erosion control measures. Any costs associated with hiring another firm will be deducted from the Contract. 3.03 DUST CONTROL A. If blowing dust becomes a nuisance, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor shall apply water from a tank truck to all trench or gravel surfaces. The rate of application shall be as directed by the Engineer in the field. Water application for dust control shall continue as needed until final pavement surface and all seeding and sodding is completed and acceptable. i r r 1 Erosion Protection 2 002 Northwest Commercial Park 02120 - 2 A-ALBEV 0113 1 s 1 1 1 1 1 i PART1 GENERAL 1.01 StirMMARY SECTION 02221 TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Section Includes 1. Trench Excavation 2. Special Pipe Foundation 3. Trench Backfill 4. Compaction 5. Pipe Grade and Alignment Conflicts B. Re lated Sections 1. Section 02660 - Water Distribution Systems 2. Section 02720 -Storm Sewer Systems 3. Section 02730 -Sanitary Sewer Systems C. Method of Measurement 1. Trench Excavation and Backfill a. Consider as incidental to associated pipe installation. 2. Coarse Filter Aggregate a. Measure by weight in tons of materials acceptably placed. b. Bid price includes removal and disposal of material it replaces. 3. Granular Pipe Bedding Materials a. Consider as incidental to associated pipe installation. 4. Compaction a, Consider as incidental to associated pipe installation. 5. Dewatering a. Consider as incidental to associated pipe installation. D. Basis of Payment 1. Payment for quantities measured in this section shall be at the contract unit price as listed on the Bid Form. All associated work items shall be considered incidental. 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Trench Excavation and Backfill 1.02 REFERENCES A. Mn/DOT 3149 -Granular Material 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide for each granular material: 1. Name and location of source. 2. Sample gradation. 1.04 SITE CONDITIONS A. Groundwater 1. Provide trench dewatering if groundwater surface is above or within 3 feet of the pipe zone. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Coarse Filter Aggregate (Foundation) -shall be in accordance with Mn/DOT 3149H. B. Granular Bedding -shall be in accordance with Mn/DOT 3149F. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. Trench Excavation 1. Alignment and Grade a. Excavate trench to alignment and grade as staked. b. Excavate no more than 100 feet in advance of pipe laying operation. 2. Trench Width at Pipe Zone a. Center trench on pipe alignment. b. Minimum Width: Pipe O.D. + 12 inches. c. Maximum Width: Pipe O.D. + 24 inches (except rock excavation). A-ALBEV 0113 02221 -1 3. Excavated Materials b. Deposit material uniformly on both a. Use stable material for backfill. sides of pipe throughout entire b. Waste unstable material as directed. trench width. c. Do not place materials on sidewalk, c. Place material in 6-inch lifts and driveways or drainageways. mechanically compact. 4. Drainage a. Provide dewatering trenches when 2. Above Pipe Zone a. Use native materials free of debris required. and rock, concrete or clay lumps b. Drain trench water into natural with a volume greater than 1/3 cubic channels or storm sewer. foot. ~~ c. Do not drain trench water into b. Place in uniform lifts no more than sanitary sewer. 1-foot thick. 5. Rock Excavation c. Mechanically compact each lift of a. Blasting shall conform to all local the upper 3 feet of the trench to a and state ordinances. Standard Proctor Density of 100 b. Submit blasting schedule for percent. approval. d. Mechanically compact each lift c. Minimum trench width: 36-inch. under the upper 3 feet of the trench d. Provide minimum 6-inch vertical to a Standard Proctor Density of 95 clearance between pipe and rock percent. trench bottom. e. Do not backfill unless approved e. Provide minimum 12-inch compaction equipment is operating. horizontal clearance between pipe f. Fine grade street subgrade to staked and rock trench walls. elevation and cross section. f. Provide pipe foundation material for 3. Replacement Backfill pipe in rock trenches. a. Engineer to determine suitability of native material for backfill. B. Pipe Foundations b. Use replacement backfill in lieu of 1. Engineer to determine stability of the native materials as directed. trench bottom. c. Place in accordance with 2. Stable trench bottom. subparagraph 2 above. a. Shape trench bottom to conform to 4. Excess or Deficiency of Backfill bottom half of pipe. Material b. Excavate bell holes to permit proper a. Dispose of excess backfill material jointing. as directed after all trenches are 3. Unstable trench bottom. backfilled. a. No additional payment will be made b. Provide replacement backfill as for disposal of this material. required to establish required b. Excavate below pipe grade to surface elevation. specified depth. c. Refill with specified foundation 3.02 PIPE CLEARANCES AND CONFLICTS material in accordance with plan detail and compact. A. Provide clearance between sewers and water main as follows: C. Trench Backfill 1. Maintain 10-foot horizontal between 1. Pipe Zone pipes. a. Use specified foundation material 2. Maintain 18-inch vertical separation free of rocks and other unsuitable between pipes. debris as directed by the Engineer. Trench Excavation and Backfill 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 02221 - 2 A-ALBEV 0113 s SECTION 02300 BORED AND JACKED CROSSINGS PART 1 GENERAL responsible for permit revisions if a larger casing is used. Additional compensation will 1.01 SUMMARY not be made for larger casing installed at the option of the Contractor. A. Section Includes 1. Casing Pipe Materials and Installation F. Casing lengths indicated on Drawings are ' 2. Carrier Pipe Installation minimum lengths. No additional compensation will be allowed for longer B. Related Sections casing lengths installed at the option of the 1. Section 01558 - Traffic Control 2. Section 0266.0 - Water Distribution Contractor. Systems 1.02 REFERENCES 3. Section 02730 -Sanitary Sewer Systems A. ASTM A53 -Specification for Pipe, Steel, C. Method of Measurement Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded 1. Casing Pipe and Seamless. a. Measure by length in linear feet for each material type and diameter 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS installed including excavation. 2. Carrier Pipe A. Boring a. Measure by length in linear feet 1. Maximum departure from established from the ends of the casing for each grade = 0.10 ft/100 ft. material type and diameter. 2. Maximum departure from established line = 1.00 ft. /100 ft. D. Basis of Payment 1. Contract prices shall include all costs 1.04 SUBMITTALS relating to the presence of rocks, cobbles, or boulders within or adjacent A. Boring to the crossing alignment. No extra 1. Submit Certificate of Compliance for compensation will be made for their casing pipe. removal, procedures or delays caused by their presence. 1.05 SITE CONDITI"ONS 2. Payment for subsurface crossing items shall be at the contract unit price as A. Contractor to provide additional borings as listed on the bid form. All associated required to verify sub-surface conditions at work items shall be considered the crossing site. incidental to that item. 3. Payment for subsurface crossing items will be based on the following schedule: PART 2 PRODUCTS Item Unit 2.01 MATERIALS Bore/Jack 24" Steel Casing Pipe LF A. Casing Pipe E. Casings diameters indicated on the 1. Provide new materials direct from the Drawings are minimum. The Contractor is supplier. 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Bored and Jacked Crossings A-ALBEV 0113 02300 - 1 s 2. Steel - ASTM A53 Grade B, Welded 1. The casing pipe shall be cathodically Joint, Wall Thickness = 0.25 inches. protected by the installation of one 17 pound sacrificial anode at each end of 2.02 EQUIPMENT the casing. A. Boring 1. Shall remove earth concurrently as the END OF SECTION casing progresses. 2. Shall not introduce water into the excavation. 3. Shall not disrupt traffic. 4. Shall not damage or displace the surrounding earth or surface. B. Jacking 1. Shall progressively push the designated carrier pipe through the inplace casing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Excavation and backfill jacking and receiving pits in accordance with Section 02221.. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Boring 1. Extend casing through entire distance bored. 2. Check grade and alignment after each casing section is installed. 3. Coordinate operations to provide continuous support to surrounding earth materials. B. Jacking 1. Progressively push carrier pipe through completed casing. 2. Strap two wooden saddle blocks to each pipe length to provide support at regular intervals. 3. Center carrier pipe in casing at all times. 4. Fill annular space between casing and carrier pipe with dry blown in sand. 5. Seal each end of the casing after the sand has been deposited. C. Cathodic Protection Bored and Jacked Crossings 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 02300 - 2 A-ALBEV 0113 SECTION 02480 LANDSCAPE WORK 1.05 PAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL A. Payment for sodding and seeding will be at 1.01 SUMMARY the applicable Contract unit prices for all material required, and equipment to A. Conditions of the Contract and pertinent complete the Work as specified; including portions of sections in Division One of this maintenance, replacement and repair as Project Manual, apply to the Work of this necessary. Section as fully as though repeated herein. B. Section includes: B. - ~ Payment for sod and seed will be made per the following Schedule: 1. Sodding. 1. When sod or seed is placed, 60 percent 2. Seeding. of the bid unit price will be paid. 3. Topsoil Borrow. 2. When the 30 day maintenance period 4. Mulching. expires, 95 percent of the bid unit price 5. Commercial fertilizer. will be paid for sod or seed that meets project Specifications. C. Related Sections 3. When an acceptable stand of grass has 1. Section 02100 -Site Preparation been established, 100 percent of the sod or seed will be paid. 1.02 REFERENCES C. Payment for mulch shall be at the Bid unit A. References are made hereinafter to certain price per ton of mulch placed. Payment shall Minnesota Deparhnent of Transportation include all costs for labor, equipment, Specifications. These shall apply as materials to place mulch, and for applicable and except as may be otherwise maintenance, replacement, and repair as specified herein. Use the January 1988 necessary. edition of the Mn/DOT Specifications and the Supplemental Specifications to the 1988 D. Payment for commercial fertilizer shall be at Standard Specifications dated May 2, 1994. the bid unit price of fertilizer placed. Payment shall include all costs for labor, 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS equipment, materials to place fertilizer. A. Examine the subgrade, verify the elevations, E. Payment for disc anchoring shall be at the observe the conditions under which Work is Bid Unit Price per acre. Payment shall to be performed. Do not proceed with the include all costs for labor and equipment. Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1.04 GUARANTEE 2.01 TOPSOIL A. Guarantee lawns through the specified maintenance .period and until final A. Topsoil will be stockpiled for re-use in acceptance. landscape work. If quantity of stockpiled topsoil is insufficient, provide additional 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Landsca a Work P A-ALBEV 0113 02480 - 1 topsoil as required to complete landscape PART 3 EXECUTION work. Additional topsoil, if required, shall meet Mn/DOT 3877. 3.01 GROUND PREPARATION 2.02 SOD A. To soil Placement: Construct 5 inches P of topsoil cover. Use existing topsoil. Fill all A. Sod shall meet Mn/DOT Specifications for holes, depressions, and rivulets to a smooth A-Lawn Sod. finish grade. The finish grade shall allow for a smooth match with existing sod, and for 2.03 SEED (MN/DOT 3876) the top of the matted or rooted portion of the sod to be flush with the top of adjacent A. Seed shall be tagged to comply with the curbs, driveways and walks. Topsoil requirements of the seed mixture required placement shall be accepted by the Engineer herein. before sod is delivered to the Site. B. Spread Mn/DOT Seed Mixture No. 90B, at B. Fine Grading: Immediately prior to placing the rate of 50 pounds per acre sod or spreading seed, hand-rake the surface of the topsoil to loosen the soil and smooth C. Spread Mn/DOT Seed Mixture No. 15B at out any irregularities. As part of fine the rate of 30 pounds per acre. grading, rocks 1 inch in diameter and larger shall be removed and disposed of off site. D. Spread Mn/DOT Seed Mixture No. 25B at Add or remove topsoil as necessary to the rate of 30 pounds per acre. provide a smooth uniform appearance. Fine grading shall be incidental to sodding, 2.04 MULCH unless a bid item has been included allowing for separate payment. A. Mulch shall meet the requirements of Mn/DOT Spec. 3882, Type 1. 3.02 SODDING (MN/DOT 2575) B. Mulch shall be applied to all seeded areas. A. Trim existing lawns so that placement of 2- foot-wide rolls of sod will provide a tight 2.05 COMMERCIAL FERTILIZER match. Square off row ends where new sod (MN/DOT 3881) is to match existing turf. A. Commercial fertilizer shall be applied on seeded areas only, unless noted otherwise. B. Do not deliver sod to the Site until all topsoil placement and trimming of existing The fertilizer analysis shall be determined -lawns have been accepted by the Engineer. by sampling the salvaged topsoil and topsoil Do not place sod until the topsoil surface has borrow and having the samples tested by an been fine-graded and approved, in accepted laboratory. The recommended accordance with 3.02B. analysis shall be applied at a rate of 400 pounds per acre prior to final soil C. Provide sod in moist 2-foot-wide rolls that ~' preparations, unless a reduced rate is have a uniform lush, green appearance. Do recommended by the Engineer. not deliver more sod to the site than can be placed the same day. Sod -that shows visible 2.06 SILT FENCE signs of drying out or heating will be rejected. A. Silt fence shall meet the requirements of Mn/DOT 3886, heavy-duty. D. Place sod so that all joints will be tight and flush. Do not overlap new sod on existing turf. Use a single 2-foot-wide row. of sod L andscape Work 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 02480 - 2 A-ALBEV 0113 1 trimmed to fit at row ends. Do not use odd. establishment of a good stand of turf free of shaped pieces to fill irregular areas; instead, weeds and other obnoxious grasses. Begin trim and square off the area to allow placement of a 2-foot-wide roll of sod. maintenance immediately after planting. Stagger end joints. B. Keep sod and seed bed continuously moist and well watered for 14 days after laying. E. Roll the new sod with a suitable landscape Reroll sod at end of the 14 day period using roller to press the roots into place and a 200 pound roller. eliminate air pockets. If rolling reveals surface irregularities such as bumps or dips, C. Maintain sodded and seeded areas for at remove the sod from the affected area, least 30 growing days after placement. A correct the irregularity by adding or "growing" day shall be defined as any removing topsoil, and replace and re-roll the calendar day exclusive of those days from sod. Sod .that is not rolled promptly after June 10 to August 10 and those days from placement will not be accepted for payment. November 1 to April 15, subject to adjustments as made by the Engineer. The F. Anchor sod that is placed on slopes 2:1 or adjustment to the above dates will be made steeper by staking it into place or by by the Engineer after no more than 15 days, installing polypropylene plastic netting. so as to shorten the excluded periods when favorable to active growth or lengthen the G. The Contractor is responsible for successful excluded periods when conditions are establishment of the sod and will be required to replace or repair sod which is displaced at unfavorable. During the maintenance period, all sod which dries out to the point where it __ no additional cost. is presumed dead, and all sod which has been damaged, displaced or weakened to the H. All sod shall be staked on slopes 2:1 or point where its replacement is necessary, or steeper. has become heavily infected with weeds, shall be promptly replaced with new sod. 3.03 SEEDING (NIN/DOT 2575) Areas replaced with new sod shall be maintained by the Contractor for at least 20 A. All non-wetland seeding operations shall be growing days. accomplished with agricultural type seed drilUhydroseeder, operating whenever D. Seeded areas failing to show a good stand of possible at right angles to the direction of grass within four weeks shall be re-seeded at surface drainage, ar sown and covered by hand. the Contractor's expense, and shall be maintained until a satisfactory stand of grass has become established. B. Season of planting shall be April 1 to June 1, and July 20 to September 20, unless changes E. Should the Contractor fail to water, maintain in these dates are accepted by the Engineer. and establish all sodded and seeded areas as described above, the Owner may choose to C. Seeding of wetland mitigation sites shall be hire another firm to maintain the sodded completed by a qualified landscape firm or areas. Any costs associated with hiring wetland nursery. another firm will be deducted from the Contract. 3.04 MAINTENANCE 3.05 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION ~` A. Maintenance of sodded and seeded areas shall consist of watering, weeding, cutting A. During landscape work, store materials and and trimming, and performing other equipment where directed. Keep pavements necessary work incidental to the clean and Work area in an orderly condition. 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Landsca a Work P A-ALBEV 0113 02480 - 3 SECTION 02510 ROADWAYS PART 1 GENERAL 6. Select Granular Borrow (LV) a. Measure by volume in cubic yards 1.01 SUMMARY by vehicular measure of material delivered. A. Conditions of the Contract and pertinent 7. Geotextile Fabric portions of sections in Division One of this a. Measure by area covered in square Project Manual, apply to the Work of this yards. Section as fully as though repeated herein. b. Overlap shall be excluded from B. Section Includes:. measurement. 8. Bituminous Pavement 1. Furnishing all labor and materials a. Measure by square yard of existing necessary to construct the following: removed and replaced. The a. Aggregate Base pavement section shall match the b. Bituminous Pavements existing pavement as directed in the c. Concrete Curb and Gutter plans. d. Concrete Driveway Pavement E. Basis of Payment C. The extent and location of all Work 1. Payment for acceptable quantities of specified in this section shall be as shown on road work shall be at the contract unit the Drawings. price as listed on the .Bid Form. All associated work items shall be D. Method of Measurement considered incidental. 1. Bituminous Mixture a. Measure each mixture type by 1.02 REFERENCE weight in tons acceptably placed. %~ b. No deduction for bituminous A. The 2000 Edition of the Minnesota materials in the mixture. Department of Transportation Standard 2. Bituminous Material Specifications for Highway Construction, ~ a. Incidental to bituminous mixture. shall apply together with all requirements of ~ 3. Curb and Gutter the Minnesota Department of Health and a. Measure by length in linear feet Industrial Commission except as altered or along the face of the curb at the , modified by Specifications. gutter line. b. Measure each design type 1.03 STAKING separately. ,~> 4. Driveway Pavement 1. The Engineer shall provide necessary a. Measure by area in square yards for staking for all Work under this Contract each thickness and type. . The Contractor shall give the Engineer 5. Aggregate Base and Select Granular 48 hours prior notice. when survey Borrow (CV) stakes are needed. a. Measure by volume in cubic yards based on planned dimensions. B. Additional staking or re-staking due to b. Payment will be made .for the Contractor operation shall be at Contractor proposed quantity, unless expense. dimensional changes are authorized. 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Roadways A-ALBEV 0113 02510 - 1 1 1.04 SUBMITTALS 2.07 BITUMINOUS MATERIAL A. Submit certification that materials furnished A. Mn/DOT Specification 3151. for this Work have been tested and conform 1. 3151.2A: Asphalt Cement. to the applicable specifications. Indicate 2. 3151.2A1: Penetration Graded Asphalt source of materials, name and address of Cement. Penetration graded asphalt -- . testing laboratory and dates of tests. The cement shall meet the requirements of Owner may also sample and test materials AASHTO M20. after delivery and/or while the Work is in 3. 3151.2A2: Viscosity graded asphalt progress; see also applicable provision in the cement shall meet the requirements of General Conditions and General Provisions. AASHTO M226, Table 2. 4. 3151.2A3: Conventional Performance Grade Binder. PART 2 PRODUCTS 5. Performance graded (PG) asphalt binder shall meet the requirements of 2.01 CONCRETE CURBING AND AASHTO MP1 except for the DRIVEWAY modifications listed below. Binders that contain modifiers shall also meet the A. Mn/DOT Spec. 2531, Mn/DOT Plate 7100G applicable requirements of AASHTO for Design B618, and Mn/DOT Plate 7035K pps, for driveways. 6. Original Binder a. Dynamic Shear, G*/sind, minimum: 2.02 AGGREGATE BASE AND SUBBASE kPa: 0.90 7. RTFOT Residue A. Mn/DOT Spec. 3138, Class 5, as modified a. Dynamic Shear, G*/sind, minimum: herein or recycled concrete meeting a Class kPa: 1.98 ~- 5 gradation. 8. PAV Residue a. Dynamic Shear, G*/sind, maximum: 2.03 BITUMINOUS BASE COURSE kPa: 5500 b. Creep Stiffness, S, Mpa, maximum: A. Mn/DOT 2331, Type 31B, using 345 performance graded asphalt binders PG 58- c. M-value, minimum: 0.285 28. d. Direct tension: not required ~. 2.04 BITUMINOUS BINDER COURSE 2.08 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC '~ A. Mn/DOT 2331 T e 41A usin Yp ~ g A. Geotextile Fabric: Mn/DOT 3733, Type V performance graded asphalt binderg PG 58- 28. Type 42 mixture may not be substituted. 2.09 SELECT GRANULAR BORROW 2.05 BITUMINOUS WEARING COURSE A. Mn/DOT 3149 2.10 POLYETHYLENE DRAIN PIPE `~! A. Mn/DOT 2331, Type 41A, using performance graded asphalt binder PG 58- A. Mn/DOT 3278 and 3733 (typical). 28. Type 42 mixture may not be substituted. 2.11 COARSE FILTER AGGREGATE !~ 2.06 BITUMINOUS TACK COAT A Mn/DOT Spec 2357 A. Mn/DOT 3149.2H . . . Roadways 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 02510 - 2 A-ALBEV 0113 ' 2.12 TRAFFIC SIGNS AND DEVICES equipment to restore the driveway as shown on the Drawing. A. Mn/DOT 2564. 5. Bituminous pavement removed for the installation of water main shall be B. Reflective sheeting shall be diamond grade. restored with a pavement section to C match the existing pavement section.. . Flanged channel sign post shall be 3-pound. Payment shall be made on a square yard basis and shall include all labor, equipment and appurtenances necessary PART 3 EXECUTION for the complete restoration of bituminous pavement. 3.01 SPECIAL PROVISIONS TO THE NIINNESOTA DEPARTMENT OF B. Excavation and Embankment TRANSPORTATION'S STANDARD 1. The Contractor shall perform all SPECIFICATIONS excavation and embankment in accordance with Mn/DOT Spec. 2105. A. Pavement Removal and Restoration 2. The subgrade for the roadways shall be (Mn/DOT 2104) in conformance with Mn/DOT Spec. ' 1. Where the existing bituminous surface is 2105, 2111, and 2112. No direct ~ disturbed, it shall be restored with new payment will be made for subgrade pavement of equal thickness to the preparation or test rolling. existing pavement by the Contractor. The minimum thickness shall be as C. Aggregate Base (Mn/DOT 2211) specified in the Plan Manual or 1. Aggregate base shall be constructed in Drawings. accordance with Mn/DOT 2211. The 2. Bituminous pavements shall be sawcut base shall be Class 5, placed and with square edges in straight lines and compacted by the specified density with vertical surfaces. Make final method. sawcut and trimming .after. backfilling base has been completed and base 2. Class 5 aggregate gradation shall be ~~ course material has been replaced. modified as follows: '~ Sawcut bituminous pavements about Sleve Size Percent Passing three feet beyond the line of rough 1 inch 100 - excavations. Prime edges of bituminous 3/4 inch 85-95 material with liquid asphalt RC70 (Mn/DOT 3151) before placing new 3/8 inch 50-85 No.4 35-75 paving mixture against old pavement. No. 10 20-60 New Work shall align exactly with old No. 40 10-35 ~~ Work. No. 200- 3-8 3. All bituminous driveways shall be constructed with 2-1/2 inches of 3. Payment for aggregate base used on the ~; bituminous wear course on 6-inches of roadway shall be as delivered and Class 5 aggregate base. Concrete placed. Aggregate base shall be driveways shall be constructed with 6- measured as plan quantity for all inches of concrete and 6-inches of Class mainline streets and side streets. 5 aggregate base. Gravel driveways Aggregate base shall be measured as shall be constructed with 6-inches of loose volume for all temporary ramping. Class 5 aggregate base. ~~ 4. Payment for driveway restoration shall D. Mixture Production (Mn/DOT 2331). No include all costs for materials, labor and bituminous mixture shall be placed until an approved mix design for this Project for that 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Roadways A-ALBEV 0113 02510 - 3 A specific course has been issued to the Specification 2331. All re-testing shall Engineer from the Contractor. Bituminous be at the expense of the Contractor. mix design shall be delivered to the 6. Additional sampling and testing may be Engineer at least 30 days prior to the start of done if, in the Engineer's opinion, there bituminous production. is evidence that satisfactory results are not being achieved. E. Compaction Operations (Mn/DOT 2331) 1. Compaction shall be obtained by the F. Not withstanding the provisions contained Specified Density Method. Compaction operations shall be conducted according herein, a smooth, uniform, tightly knit surface conforming to the specified grade to the latest edition of Mn/DOT and cross section is required. Rutting, Specification 2331, or as modified scuffing, and raveling of the surface will be herein. considered a failure, and subject to 2. Each lift shall be uniformly compacted corrective action. An open graded or coarse to a density not less than 95 percent of surface will also be considered a failure. the Marshall Density indicated on the .Should the final surface exhibit any of these Job Mix Formula submitted to the characteristics in a few isolated areas (10 Engineer. percent of the entire length paved under this 3. Determination of in-place pavement Contract or less), the sections in question density will be made by nuclear testing. shall be repaired or replaced as directed by Sampling and testing will be done by an the Engineer. Where the failure .extends independent testing laboratory. Density beyond 10 percent of the length paved, the test results shall be submitted to and Engineer may require removal and accepted by the Engineer prior to replacement, an FA1 seal coat in accordance placement of the next bituminous course. Failure by the Contractor to with MnlDOT Spec. 2356, a "Type 41A" overlay in accordance with Mn/DOT Spec. perform testing by the next working day 2331, or a monetary deduction for future shall not relieve the Contractor from corrective action. Such corrective action performing the required tests. would apply to the entire surface paved 4. Samples of the placed bituminous under this Contract unless the Engineer mixture will be submitted to an determines that a shorter segment is independent testing laboratory for acceptable. gradation and extraction. Sample locations shall be as directed by the G. Street Cleaning (Mn/DOT 2331): It shall be Engineer or field representative. the. Contractor's responsibility to thoroughly Samples shall be obtained at the rate of .clean the surface of the binder course before 1 per 500 ton of each mix placed per lift, applying the tack coat, leveling course, if with a minimum of one sample per mix needed, and wearing surface. This Work per lift day. shall be considered incidental. 5. One retest of each failing test will be permitted and the higher of the two H. Structural Concrete (Mn/DOT 2461.4, A4B ' densities will be used in determining the Air Content) pay factor. Re-testing of the bituminous 1. Except as otherwise specifically mixture shall be performed in a timely authorized, the air content of Type 3 manner. Failure to re-test the bituminous concrete shall be maintained at 6.5 mixture within three working days shall percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent, of not relieve the Contractor from the measured volume of the freshly performing re-tests. Pay factors will be mixed concrete. The quantity of air- ~ . based on the applicable tables as shown entraining agent needed to obtain the ~ in the latest edition of Mn/DOT desired air content shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Any Roadways 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 02510 - 4 A-ALBEV 0113 ,~ . adjustments necessary to meet the percent of the contract bid price for desired air content range shall be made the item involved. ~~ immediately. The air content of the concrete shall be maintained within the b. Concrete having an air content less than 3 8 ercent but not less th required limits except that an additional . p , an 3.0 percent, will be paid for at an 0.5 percent deviation (plus or minus 2.0 adjusted unit price equal to 75 percent) will be permitted for one test percent of the contract bid price for each day on paving and base the item involved submit to items construction or for one test per 500 , (e) and (f) below. ~ cubic yards of concrete on other types of c. .Concrete having an air content less , construction. than 3.0 percent, but not less than 2. When air-entraining cement is used, and 2.5 percent, may be left in place it is found that the air content of the without any payment being made concrete is less than 6 percent or more there for, subject to items (e) and (f) than 7 percent, the use of that particular below. brand of cement shall be discontinued immediately until corrective action has d. Concrete having an air content less th 2 5 nt h ll b d . an perce s a e remove been taken to obtain the desired air and replaced, subject to item (e) content, either by adding a sufficient quantity of an approved air-entraining below. e. Concrete having an air content less agent to each batch to bring the air than 3.8 percent, which is placed in content up to the desired range, or by blending a sufficient quantity of Type I any part of a retaining wall, box. culvert, bridge abutment, or similar Portland cement with the air-entraining unit, such that it would not normally cement to bring the air content down to be exposed to salt-brine freeze-thaw the desired range, whichever is cycling, will be accepted for necessary. Once satisfactory proportions payment at an adjusted unit price have been determined, the air content equal to 90 percent of the contract shall not be .allowed to fluctuate outside bid price for the item involved. the desired range without corrective f. Concrete having an air content less action being taken to reestablish than 3.5 percent, which is left in optimum control. place where its surface will be 3. Type 3 concrete not conforming to the exposed to salt-brine freeze-thaw above air content requirements will not cycling, shall be coated with an be allowed in the Work. Should any nonconforming concrete be approved epoxy penetrant sealer at the Contractor's ex ense All p . inadvertently placed in the Work (that determinations regarding the which is found to have an air content disposition, payment or removal of less than 4.8 percent or more than 8.2 , concrete not having the required air -_. percent), when tested in accordance with content shall be made by the the prescribed procedure and excluding Engineer. Price adjustments will permissible exceptions, it will not be apply only to the contract item accepted for payment at contract prices, under which the concrete is but shall be subject to the following furnished. provisions governing acceptance and 4. For determination of compliance with payment: cement-voids ratio requirements as a. Concrete having an air content of described in Table 2461-1 for mix more than 8.2 percent or less than design and 2461.3) for mix adjustments, 4.8 percent, but not less than 3.8 the air content shall be assumed to be percent, will be paid for at an 5.5 percent. adjusted unit price equal to 95 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Roadways A-ALBEV 0113 02510 - 5 I. Concrete Sidewalk and Pedestrian Ramps (Mn/DOT 2521) 1. All concrete walks shall be constructed ; with 4 inches of concrete on existing ~ granular base. 2. The membrane curing method shall be used to cure the concrete. 3. Where the concrete surface exhibits noticeable spalling (loss of surface mortar and aggregate) during the guarantee period, the affected panel. shall be removed and replaced at the Contractors expense. '~ 4. Payment for concrete walkway and pedestrian ramp installation shall be at the appropriate bid item per square foot of walkway installed and shall include all costs for material including concrete, _ labor and .equipment to install the walkway as shown on the Drawings. Pedestrian ramp construction shall be paid for at the unit bid price for the 4 inch concrete walk. J. Concrete Curb and Gutter (Mn/DOT 2531) 1. Joint sealing with hot poured concrete .joint sealer will not be required. 2. The membrane curing method shall be used. 3. Where the concrete surface exhibits noticeable spalling (loss of surface mortar and aggregate) during the guarantee period, the affected panel shall be removed and replaced at the Contractors expense. 4. Payment for curb and gutter per lineal j foot shall include all labor and materials to install the curb and gutter as shown on the Drawings. K. Geotextile (Mn/DOT 3733). 1. Geotextiles shall be installed as required ~, by Mn/DOT 3733. 2. Payment for geotextiles shall include al _ labor, materials and equipment to place the geotextile. END OF SECTION ~_ Roadways 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 02510 - 6 A-ALBEV 0113 SECTION 02660 WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS .~~ PART 1 GENERAL a. Measure valve and box of each size and type as a unit. 1.01 SUMMARY 4. Hydrants ' a. Measure hydrants of each size and ~ A. Conditions of the Contract and pertinent type as a unit. portions of sections in Division One of this b. Unit includes installation of hydrant, ~' Project Manual, apply to the Work of this Section as fully as though repeated herein. base, blocking and crushed rock. 5. Corporation Stops a. Measure corporation stops of each B. Section Includes: 1. The famishing- of all material, labor, size and type as a unit. 6. Curb Stops and Boxes. tools and equipment to construct a. Measure curb stops and boxes of complete in place as shown on the each size and type as a unit. Drawings and specified herein the 7. Service Pipe _ .following: a. Measure by distance in linear feet. a. Water Main Pipe and Fittings b. Measure each size separately. b. Valves and Boxes c. Measure from center of water main c. Hydrants to center of curb stop plus 1 foot for d. Services. slack. e. Insulation 8. Insulation '~ a. Measure by volume in board feet. C. Work shall be done in accordance with 9. Trace Wires applicable state and local codes, rules and a. PVC water main shall be installed ordinances. with a trace wire attached over the entire length. The wire shall be 12 D. Related Sections: 1. Section 01300 -Submittals. gauge standard plastic type TH or THW. Inline compression butt splice with 3M cast kit shall be used ' E. Method of Measurement when spicing of wire is required. ~ 1. Water Main Splicing shall not be more frequent a. Measure by distance in linear feet. than 1 per 250 feet of piping. Wire b. Measure along pipe axis with no nut splices will not be allowed. deduction for fittings or valves. b. At each appurtenance such as a c. Measure in the horizontal plane valve box, the wire shall be securely unless pipe grade exceeds 15 fastened to the metal box on an ~ percent. accepted stand-off (quick bolt) ~ 2. Fittings readily visible. Wiring shall be a. Measure by weight in pounds. connected to the appurtenance in b. Basis of Weight: such a way that a low voltage circuit 1) Fittings 3-inch - 16-inch: can be completed without ANSI/AWWI C153/A21.53-88 excavation of the structure. ~, 2) Fittings 18-inch - 48-inch: ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.10-87 c. Trace wire installation will be .considered incidental to the 3. Valves and Boxes associated water main construction. 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 10. Connect to Existing Water Main Water Distribution Systems A-ALBEV 0113 02660 -1 1 a. Measure by each connection made. F. ANSI/AWWA C509 -AWWA Standard for Payment shall include all fittings, Resilient -Seated Gate Valves, for Water labor, equipment and appurtenances and Sewerage Systems. with the associated work. G. ANSI/AWWA Standard for Installation of F. Basis of Payment Ductile Iron Water Mains and their 1. Payment for acceptable quantities of Appurtenances. water main and appurtenances shall be at the contract unit price as listed on the H. ANSI/AWWA C-900 -AWWA Standard - Bid Form. All associated work items for Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe. ~ ~~ shall be considered incidental. , 2. Payment for water main and 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND appurtenances will be based on the HANDLING following schedule: A. Inspection .Item Unit 1. Inspect all pipe and products during the 6" PVC C900 Water Main LF unloading process. 8" PVC C900 Water Main LF 2. Notify Engineer of any cracked, flawed 10" PVC C900 Water Main LF or otherwise defective products. 12" PVC C900 Water Main LF 3. Remove all products found to be PVC/DIP Adapter EACH defective by the Engineer from the site. 6" Gate Valve & Box EA 8" Gate Valve & Box EA B. Handling and Storage 10" Gate Valve & Box EA 1. Handling and storage of products shall 12" Gate Valve & Box. EA be in accordance with Section 22 of Hydrant EA ANSI/AWWA C600. ?~ Connect to Existing Water Main EA ; .Ductile Iron Fittings LBS 1.04 SUBMITTALS 1.02 REFERENCES A. The Contractor shall submit for acceptance complete Shop Drawings and details for all A. ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50 - American couplings, valves, operators, and other National Standard for the Thickness Design special appurtenances. This shall include of Ductile Iron Pipe, required submission for acceptance including all manufacturers' product data, B. ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 - American dimensions, sizes, types, maximum National Standard for Ductile -Iron Pipe, loadings, and thrust anchorages. Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand- . Lined Molds for Water or other Liquids. PART 2 PRODUCTS C. ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 - American National Standard for Ductile - Iron Compact Fittings, 3-inch through 16-inch, for Water and Other Liquids. D. ANSI/AWWA C-502 - AWWA ~ Standard for Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants. E. ANSI/AWWA C504 AWWA Standard for Rubber -Seated Butterfly Valves. 2.01 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE (PVC) - ~~ C900 A. Polyvinyl chloride pipe shall conform to AWWA C-900 (DR). B. Joints shall be elastomeric gasket joints conforming to ASTM D3139. Said gasket joints must be accepted by the Engineer on Water Distribution Systems 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 02660 - 2 A-ALBEV 0113 i 1 ~` the basis of data furnished by the manufacturer. B. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, hydrants shall be furnished in ~' C. No compensation will be given for bends, conformance with the following caps, plugs, reducers, and sleeves used on supplementary requirements: main or service installation. 1. Hydrants shall have a 5-inch (nominal ~' diameter) main valve opening of the D. Trace wires shall be installed along the type that opens against water pressure. longitudinal length of all PVC water main 2. Hydrant barrels shall be two-piece, non- pipe. jacket type, with flanged joint above finished grade line and with mechanical 2.02 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS joint connection at the hub end for joining asix-inch cast iron branch pipe. ,~ A. Where specified, the pipe furnished shall be 3. Hydrant bury length, measured from the of the ductile iron type, as specified for each bottom of the branch pipe connection to particular use or installation, and shall be the finished ground line at the hydrant, Class 52 unless otherwise noted on the shall be- 8 feet, 0 inches. An aluminum Drawings. Ductile iron pipe shall conform to plate shall be attached to the nozzle the requirements of AWWA C151/ANSI A- 21.51 (Ductile Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast section to denote bury depth. 4. Hydrants shall have two outlet nozzles in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds). for 2-1/2-inch hose connection and one B. Fittings shall conform to the requirements of outlet nozzle for 4-1/2-inch streamer connection. All outlet nozzle threads .. ANSI A21.10, A21.11 and A21.4 or ductile shall be Standard Fire-Hose Coupling iron compact fittings mechanical joint Screw Threads ANSI B-26. Caps shall conforming to ANSI A21.53, A21.11 and be nut-type with chain. A21.4. 5. .Hydrant operating mechanisms shall be provided with "O" ring seals, preventing , C. DI pipe and fittings shall be furnished with entrance of moisture, and shall be ~ r cement mortar lining, meeting the lubricated through an opening in the ~ requirements of AWWA C 104/ANSI A21.4 operating nut or bonnet. for standard thickness lining. All exterior 6. The operating nut shall be No. 5, left surfaces of the pipe and fittings shall have a opening. tar or bituminous seal coating at least 1 mil 7. Hydrant flags shall be included with all thick.. Spotty or thin. seal coating, or poor coating adhesion, shall be cause for hydrants. Hydrant flags shall be "Hydra Finder", "Nordic Flexi Flag", "Flex rejection. Stake" with a polyurethane hinge, or an accepted equal. The length of the flag D. Conductivity may be achieved by shall be 5 feet. The cost of material and conductive gaskets, with accepted copper labor necessary to install the hydrant inserts equal to American Fastite or copper flags shall be incidental to the hydrant straps, welded to the pipe and connected bid item. with a silicone bronze bolt. Conductors shall 8. Detailed Drawings, catalog information, be rated at 600 amps sustained current. and maintenance data shall be furnished as requested by Engineer. 2.03 FIRE HYDRANTS 9. Hydrant drain ports shall come equipped with removable threaded plugs. Where A. Fire hydrants shall be Waterous Model hydrants are determined by the Engineer ~!; Pacer WB-67 with a 16-inch traffic flange, to be in the water table, the plugs shall and shall conform to the applicable- be left in. In this case, a bronze plate requirements of AWWA C-502. stating "No Drain-Pump After Use" 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Water Distribution Systems A-ALBEV 0113 02660 - 3 shall be attached to a hex-head bolt on e. There shall be 2 low torque bearings the hydrant nozzle. located above and below the stem 10. Hydrants operating at depths of over 10 collar. The stem nut. shall be feet or pressures in excess of 75 PSI separate from the wedge and shall shall have heavy-duty operating shafts, be of solid bronze. The waterway as recommended by the manufacturer. shall be smooth and free of all 11. All hydrants shall be repainted by hand pockets, cavities and depressions in brush with Owner approved paint. the seat area. f. Both interior and exterior of the 2.04 BURIED VALVES body and bonnet shall be coated with fusion bonded epoxy. A. Gate Valves: 1. All gate valves, 2-inch to 12-inch, shall B. Valve Boxes: , be resilient-seated wedge gate valves. 1. Valve boxes shall be an assembled unit ~ Mechanical joints shall conform to composed of the valve box, extension AWWA C111/ANSI A21.11-85. stem, and self centering alignment ring. 2. All gears on gate valves shall be cut All moving parts of the extension stem tooth steel gears, housed in heavy cast shall be enclosed in a housing to prevent iron extended type grease cases of contact with the soil. accepted design. 2. Value boxes shall be adjustable and 3. Manufacture shall furnish an affidavit have sufficient length to permit not less stating that the valve and all materials than a 6-inch adjustment above and conform to the applicable requirements below grade when the pipe is laid to the `~ and all tests specified under the specified depth. respective standard have been 3. The valve box upper and lower sections performed and requirements have been shall be made a minimum '/4-inch heavy ~~ met. wall high density polyethylene. All 4. Resilient Wedge Gate Valves: components shall be joined with a a. Resilient wedge gate valve shall permanent locking design. The valve ' ' conform to ANSI/AWWAC509. box top section shall be adaptable to fit ~ Valve shall be resilient wedge gate inside a standard valve box upper valves as manufactured by Clow section. Corporation, or equal. 4. The stem assembly shall be of a b. Valves shall be non-rising stem with telescoping design that allows for a 2-inch square operating nut. variable adjustment length. The material c. The wedge _ shall be cast iron, , shall be galvanized steel square tubing. completely encapsulated with The stem assembly shall have abuilt-in polyurethane rubber (except for device that keeps the stem assembly guide and stem area). The from disengaging at its full extended polyurethane rubber shall be length. The extension must be tested for permanently bonded to the cast iron a torque of 1,000-foot-pound. wedge to meet ASTM tests for 5. Value box may also be a three piece cast ~ rubber to metal bond ASTM D-429. iron type like Tyler No. GE60, type 6 , d. Stems for non-rising stem with a No. 6 base. Provided that box has assemblies shall be cast bronze with an adapter to seat on the valve and an integral collars. The non-rising stem extension stem meeting the above stuffing box shall be the O-ring seal requirements and a debris cap. _ . type with two rings located above 6. Covers shall be cast iron with the word the thrust collar. The rings shall be "water" cast into it. 1~ replaceable with the valve fully open at full rated working pressure. Water Distribution Systems 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 02660 - 4 A-ALBEV 0113 ~ t 2.05 BUTTERFLY VALVE A. All butterfly valves shall be of the tight closing, resilient seat type with rubber seats, which are bonded to the valve body. No metal-to-metal sealing surfaces are permitted. Valves shall be bubble tight at 150 psi rated pressures with flow in either direction, and shall be satisfactory for applications involving valve operation after long periods of inactivity. Valve discs shall rotate 90° from the full open position to the tight shut position. Valves shall meet the full requirements of the AWWA Specification C504-87, Class 150-B and rated for buried service. The manufacturer shall have manufactured tight-closing AWWA rubber seated butterfly valves and buried service operators for a period of at least five years. ~` Valves shall be epoxy coated interior per AWWA C550. B. Bodies shall be constructed of cast iron ASTM A-126 Class B, and shall have integrally cast mechanical joint ends. ~, C. Discs shall be constructed of ductile iron. D. Shafts shall be stainless steel, type 304. E. Seats shall be a Buna N, full circle 360. ~, F. Bearings shall be nylon or Teflon. G. Valve operator shall be traveling nut type designed to withstand 300 feet pounds of input torque at full open or closed positions without damage to the valve or operator; must be fully gasketed and grease packed, _ and designed to withstand submersion in water to 10 psi; valves shall close with a clock-wise rotation of the AWWA nut and shall require a minimum of 30 turns to move from. fully open to fully closed. 2 06 WATER SERVICES . corporation stops shall be made while the main line is under working pressures. The Owner's field representative shall view each complete building service installation prior to backfilling and while the .service pipe is under working pressure. B. Copper. tubing shall comply with the following: Federal Specifications WW-T-799 Type K ASTM Specifications B-88-47 Type K AWWA Specifications C-800-55 Type K C. The copper service. lines as placed between the water mains and the curb boxes shall have a minimum of 8 feet of cover; therefore, service lines mush be placed (incidental to the Project) beneath any obstruction which would prohibit the stated cover if the service line was placed on top of the said obstruction. If tunneling or jacking of water main building services is required, the method used shall be accepted by the Engineer. D. All building service locations will be established in the field by the Engineer. Generally, these locations will agree with those indicated on the Drawings; however; the Contractor shall not install a service until ,its location is verified by the Engineer. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to keep an accurate written record of the location of each service and submit this to the Engineer prior to backfilling. 2.07 CORPORATION STOPS A. Corporation stops shall be Mueller B-25000, Ford FB600, or accepted equal. The sizes of the inlet thread and the size of the copper service coupling shall be: 3/4 inch x 1 inch, 1-1/4 inch x 1-1/2 inch, and 1-1/2 inch x 2 inch for l inch, 1-1/2 inch, and 2 inch services respectively. A. Water services shall be constructed as ~~ shown on the detail Drawing. The copper service pipe shall be type K, unless otherwise specified. All field taps for 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Water Distribution Systems A-ALBEV 0113 02660 - 5 2.08 CURB STOPS A. Curb stops shall be Mueller H-15154 "Mark II Oriseal", Ford B22-344M, or accepted equal (no drain). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION OF WORK A. The Work will be located as shown on the Drawings. 2.09 SERVICE SADDLES A. Service saddles shall be RockwelUSmith Blair, Mode1317, or an accepted equal. 2.10 CURB BOXES A. Curb boxes (8 feet long) shall be Mueller H- 10300 or Ford EM-2-75-56M for the 1 inch size. The box shall be supplied complete with lid and without stationary rods. B. It may be necessary for the Engineer to shift lines a reasonable amount to avoid an obstruction to the construction Work or to reduce right-of--way difficulties. The Contractor will not be allowed any additional compensation due to shift of lines. Additional compensation will be allowed only for lengthening of lines. 3.02 SHORING & SHEETING 1 1 2.11 INSULATION BOARD A. Insulation board shall meet the requirements of Mn/DOT 3760. Thickness shall be as specified on the Drawings. B. The insulation board shall be formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion .process, and shall be homogeneous and essentially uni-cellular. The surface of the boards shall be extruded, with skins. The material shall conform to the following requirements: Compressive strength, at 35 psi minimum yield or 5% deflection Flammability Self extinguishing Water absorption after 24 hours immersion, by 0.25% maximum volume Thermal Conductivity at mean temperature of 75 0.23 maximum deg. F. 2.12 FASTENERS A. Bolts shall be "Cor-Blue" as manufactured by NSS Industries or accepted equal. Shop drawings must be provided A. Shoring, sheeting, bracing etc., shall be put in place and maintained by the Contractor at his own expense, as may be required to support the side of the excavation and to prevent any movement which may in any way endanger personnel or injure or delay the Work, or endanger adjacent buildings or other structures. Where sheeting and bracing are used, the. trench width shall be increased accordingly. Trench sheeting shall remain in place until pipe has been laid, tested for defects, repaired if necessary, and the earth around it compacted in a minimum of one pass with vibrator equipment of a depth of one foot over the top of the pipe. The sheeting and bracing shall be removed in such manner as not to endanger the constructed pipe or other. structures, utilities or property, whether public or private. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility and duty to be familiar with local and state ordinances and regulations relating to this type of Work and he shall assume the responsibility for compliance therewith. 3.03 PIPE LAYING A. The type, kind and class of pipe to be used shall be as shown on the Drawings or specified herein. All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required line and grade. Water Distribution Systems 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 02660 - 6 A-ALBEV 0113 1 T A I 1 1 t t B. Proper implements, tools, equipment and forced home and brought to correct line and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be grade. The pipe shall be secured in place provided and used by the Contractor for the with accepted backfill material, which shall ~~ safe and convenient prosecution of the be thoroughly compacted around the pipe. Work. The joint areas shall remain exposed and precautions shall be taken to prevent the soil ,~ C. At the time of pipe placement, the bedding from entering the joint space until the joint conditions shall be such as to provide seal is effected. uniform and continuous support for the pipe between bell holes. Bell holes shall be H. At all times when pipe laying is not in excavated as necessary to make the joint progress, including noon hour and overnight connections, but they shall be no larger than periods, all open ends of the pipe line shall would be adequate. No pipe material shall be closed by watertight plugs or other means ~, be laid in water, nor when the trench or accepted by the Engineer. If water is present bedding conditions are otherwise unsuitable in the trench, the seals shall remain in-place or improper. Unless otherwise permitted by until the trench is pumped completely dry. the Engineer, bell and spigot pipe shall be laid with the bell ends facing upgrade and I. All stubs installed for future connection ~~ the laying shall start at the downgrade end and proceed upgrade. shall have prefabricated watertight plugs and shall be restrained as an incidental item. D. Before being lowered into laying position, the Contractor shall make a thorough visual inspection of each pipe section and appurtenant units to detect damage or ~! unsound conditions that may need corrective action or be cause for rejection. Inspection procedure shall be as accepted by the Engineer, with special methods being required as he deems necessary to check out suspected defects more definitely. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of any defects discovered and the Engineer will prescribe the required corrective actions or order rejection. E. Immediately before placement, the joint surfaces of each pipe section and fitting shall be inspected for the presence of foreign matter, coating blisters, rough edges or projections; and any imperfections so detected shall be corrected by cleaning, trimming, or repair as needed. F. Any defective or damaged pipe which has ~~ had its grade or-joint disturbed after laying - shall be replaced. r G. As each length of bell and spigot pipe is placed in laying position, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe 3.04 THRUST RESTRAINTS -ALL FLUID PRESSURE SYSTEMS A. Provide all crosses, tees, dead-ends, and bends with suitable means of overcoming thrust including existing pipe where required. The water main shall be restrained using Megalug retaining system or accepted equal. All retaining systems shall receive two coats of bitumastic paint. B. Where connections to existing pipe are required, the existing pipe shall be exposed and tied based upon the following table. C. Based upon a test pressure of 150 psi, the following table shows the minimum length of pipe to be restrained where tied joints are used. Pipe Diameter in _Inches Dead End ~ .Tee Branch or 90° Bend ~~ 0 gcnd 22- I -? Bend 6 23 LF 7 LF ~3 LF 8 25 LF 10 LF 5 LF 10 39 LF 12 LF 5 LF 12 45 LF 16 LF 5 LF 14 60 LF 20 LF 5 LF 16 72 LF 24 LF 10 LF 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Water Distribution Systems A-ALBEV 0113 02660 - 7 r 1 D. The cost of providing thrust restraints shall 3.06 VALVES AND FITTINGS be considered as incidental to the cost of the pipe installation. A. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the ~ " Drawings, install cast iron valve boxes on all '~ 3.05 HYDRANTS gate valves and on all direct burial butterfly valves. Valve boxes shall be firmly A. Support hydrants upon a concrete base 18 supported to maintain centered and plumb inches square and a minimum of 6 inches alignment over the wrench nut with box thick. Each hydrant shall be tied to the cover flush with the surface of the finished fitting at the main with tie rods or as pavement or at such other level as may be otherwise accepted by the Engineer. Install directed by the Engineer. hydrant of sufficient length to provide a minimum of 8 feet of ground cover over the 3.07 TESTING WATER MAINS centerline of the lead pipe. The lowest outlet nozzle on the hydrant shall be not less than A. After the line has been backfilled in 19 inches, nor more than 24 inches above accordance with these Specifications, test all the finished ground line or the final curb line newly laid pipe, or any valved section by the case of a new street. applying a hydrostatic pressure equivalent to that specified in ANSUAWWA C600 except B. Wherever a hydrant is set in pervious soil, that the minimum test pressure shall be 150 provide drainage at the base of the hydrant pounds per squaze inch. The duration of ` by placing coarse gravel or crushed stone mixed with coarse sand from the bottom of each such test shall be at least 2 hours. The test shall determine the leakage which shall. ~ the trench to at least 6 inches above waste not exceed the ,limits specified in Table 6 of , openings in the hydrant, and to a distance of ANSI/AWWA C600. The apparatus for 1 foot around the base elbow. conducting the test shall consist of a ~~ pressure gage with pump and appurtenances, ' C. Wherever a hydrant is set in clay or other and shall be furnished and attached. to the impervious soil, dig a drainage pit 2 feet in mains by the Contractor. Slowly fill each diameter and 3 feet deep below each hydrant valved section of pipe with water and apply base and fill it completely with pea rock or the specified test pressure, measured at the crushed stone and coarse sand, under and lowest point of elevation, by means of a around the elbow and concrete base, to level pump connected to the pipe in a satisfactory of 6 inches above the waste opening. manner. The pump, pipe connection, gages and all necessary appazatus shall be D. Cover all material placed for drainage with a furnished by the Contractor. minimum of 2 layers of tar paper. No 1. Gages and measuring devices must be drainage system shall be .connected to a accepted by the Engineer and the sewer. necessazy pipe taps made as directed. ~. Before applying the specified test E. Hydrants must, maintain their position and pressure, expel all air from the pipe. must not be knocked out of plumb during Any cracked or defective pipes, joints, backfilling. fittings, valves or hydrants discovered in consequence of this pressure test shall F. Hydrants placed where the groundwater be removed and replaced by the ; table is less than 8 feet below the ground Contractor with sound material and the ~~ surface shall have the drain hole plugged test shall be repeated until satisfactory to and be equipped with a tag stating the need the Engineer. for pumping after use. B. After the hydrostatics test has been completed, a conductivity test shall be Water Distribution Systems 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 02660 - 8 A-ALBEV 0113 'f r conducted. When replacing an existing NOT be clamped to the top water main, the conductivity test shall be operating nut. Note: After the test, completed prior to reconnecting the water the hydrant shall be shut off and a services. cap loosened to allow hydrant 1. The system (pipeline and hydrants) shall drainage. Tighten cap after drainage. be tested for electrical continuity and f. A hook-on type D.C. ammeter ,~ current capacity. The electrical test shall placed on one of the cables leading be made after the hydrostatic pressure to the hydrant is an acceptable test. Backfilling shall have been method of measuring current. ~ completed. The line may be tested in g. In using arc welding machines, the sections of convenient length as current control should be set at a accepted by the Engineer. minimum before starting. After a. Direct current of 350 amperes, more starting the machine, advance the or less 10 percent, shall be passed control until the current indicated on through the pipe line for 5 minutes. the ammeter is at the desired test Current flow through the pipe shall value. Caution: In case of open ~' be measured continuously on a circuits at joints or connections, the suitable ammeter and shall remain voltage across the defective joint or steady without interruption or connection will be on the order of excessive fluctuation throughout the 50-100 volts. 5 minute test period. b. Insufficient current or intermittent current or arcing, indicated by large 3.08 DISINFECTION (POTABLE LINES) fluctuation of the ammeter needle, A. Before being placed in service, all new shall be evidence of defective water distribution systems or extensions to electrical contact in the pipe line. existing systems, or any valved section of f The cause shall be isolated and such extension, or any replacement in the corrected. Thereafter, the section in existing distribution system, shall be which the defective test occurred disinfected. shall be retested as a unit and shall 1. Materials: Dry Calcium Hypochlorite meet the requirements. (comparable to commercial products c. Sources of D.C. current for these known as "HTH", "Perchloron", and tests .may be motor generators, "Maxochlor") or Dry Chlorinated Lime batteries, arc welding machines, etc. (frequently called chloride of lime and ~` D.C. arc welding machines will probably be the usual source. These known to industry as bleaching powder) maybe used. machines are available in adequate 2. Dosage: The dosage of calcium capacity for these tests and are equipped with controls for hypochlorite powder containing 70 percent available chlorine shall be one regulating the current output. pound for each 1,680 gallons of water d. Cables from the power source to the pipe capacity treated; chlorine-yielding section of the system under test compounds other than calcium should be of sufficient size to carry hypochlorite powder may, on the test current without overheating acceptance of the Engineer, be used in or excessive voltage drop. Usable amounts proportional to their available sizes will probably be in the range chlorine content. This dosage is of 2/0 to 4/0 A.W.G. equivalent to a treatment of 50 parts per e. Connections for the test shall be million available chlorine. In like made at hydrants. The hydrants shall manner, one pound of calcium be in the open position with the caps hypochlorite powder will treat 2,100 on during the test. The cable shall 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Water Distribution Systems A-ALBEV 0113 02660 - 9 ~~ 1 gallons of water to 40 parts per million basis as construction progresses. Temporary chlorine. water service shall be maintained on a 3. Point of Application: A predetermined continuous basis and paid for as a lump sum. dose shall be shaken into the pipe at the Partial payments will be made on the basis first joint attached to the existing water of the percent of total water main pipe, and shall be repeated at frequent predetermined intervals, preferably at constructed to date. !~t, each pipe joint as the pipe laying C. All service lines, headers, connections, and progresses or as may be directed by the appurtenances shall be disinfected in Engineer. accordance with Minnesota Health ~~ Department and AWWA rules and B. When treated with dry calcium hypochlorite regulations. or with dry chlorinated lime, all newly laid pipe shall be filled very slowly to avoid ~~ washing the powder to the extremity of the END OF SECTION pipeline. .~ C. Water main shall be disinfected for at least 24 hours. Prior to flushing, the chlorine residual shall be at least 10 ppm. D. Samples will be collected and tested for bacteriological quality after the line has been disinfected. The samples shall be collected by an independent testing laboratory for testing.. The costs of the testing (lab costs) ~~ will be paid for by the Contractor. 3.09 REPEAT TESTING A. If initial disinfection fails to produce satisfactory bacteriological samples, the disinfection shall be repeated until ~' satisfactory bacteriological samples are obtained. Costs for additional disinfection shall be borne by the Contractor. 3.10 MAINTAINING WATER SERVICE A. While construction is underwa the Y~ Contractor shall maintain water service to . existing users on a continuous basis until service from the newly installed mains can be restored. The means and methods used are subject to the acceptance of the Engineer. Overland service lines connected to a hydrant via a common header is recommended. B. New water main shall be constructed, tested, and placed in service on a block-by-block ~` Water Distribution Systems 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 02660 - 10 A-ALBEV 0113 `~ r ~; SECTION 02720 STORM SEWER SYSTEMS b. Measure each size and type PART 1 GENERAL separately. 4. Castings 1.01 SUMMARY a. Incidental to catch basin or manhole. A. .Conditions of the Contract and pertinent 5. Aprons portions of sections in Division One of this a. Measure each size and type installed ~, Project Manual, apply to the Work of this as a unit. Section as fully as though repeated herein. 6. Riprap ` a. Measure by volume in cubic yards ~~ B. Section Includes: based on staked surface dimensions 1. The furnishing of all material, labor, and specified thickness. ~' tools and equipment to construct complete, in-place, all buried storm b. Measure each type and class separately. sewer piping as follows: 7. Geotextile Filter a. Storm Sewer Pipe a. Measure by area in square yards b. Storm Manholes & Appurtenances based on staked surface dimensions c. Catch Basins & Appurtenances with no allowance for overlap or d. Aprons seams. e. Riprap b. Measure each type separately. C. Work shall be done in accordance with F. Basis of Payment applicable state and local codes, rules and 1. Payment for acceptable quantities of ordinances. storm sewer items shall be at the contract unit price as listed on the Bid D. Related Sections: Form. All associated work items shall be 1. Section 01300 -Submittals considered incidental. ~' E. Method of Measurement 1. Pipe 1.02 REFERENCES a. Measure by distance in linear feet. A. ASTM A48 -Specification for. Gray Iron b. Measure from structure centers and pipe ends not including end Castings. sections. B. ASTM C76 -Specification for Reinforced c. Measure each pipe size and class Concrete Pipe. separately. 2. Manholes C. ASTM C361 -Specification for Reinforced a. Measure each size and type as a Concrete Low Head Pressure Pipe. unit. b. Measure each size and type D. ASTM C478 - Specification for Precast separately. Reinforced Concrete Manhole. 3. Catch Basins a. Measure each size and type installed as a unit. 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Storm Sewer Systems A-ALBEV 0113 02720 - 1 1.03 DELIVERY OF MATERIALS A. Inspect all pipe and materials during the unloading process. B. Notify Engineer of any cracked, flawed or otherwise defective material. C. Remove all materials found to be unsatisfactory by the Engineer from the site. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit for acceptance, complete Shop Drawings and details for all pipe, fittings, structures and other special appurtenances. This shall include .required submission for acceptance including all manufacturer's product data, dimensions, sizes, types, maximum loadings, and thrust anchorages. B. Source and gradation of each soil material to be used for bedding and backfill. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCED CONCRETE SEWER PIPE (RCP) AND END SECTIONS A. Reinforced concrete sewer pipe and end sections shall conform to Mn/DOT 3236 and shall have rubber gasket joints, Mn/DOT 3726. The class of pipe shall be as stated on the Drawings. B. End sections shall be provided with a galvanized trash guard in accordance with the detailed Drawings, which. shall be considered incidental to the cost of the end section. End sections shall be tied back a minimum of three (3) pipe joints with accepted pipe ties. 2.02 MANHOLE A. Manhole shall be constructed according to dimensions and details shown in the Drawings using materials as follows: Material .Class or Type Specification Concrete ASTM C478 Reinforcing Grade 60 ASTM A615 ASTM C478 Manhole 12" minimum width Aluminum or Steps with minimum 6" " alloy projection, 16 o.c. Polypropylene coated Precast Segmental Radial Solid ASTM C-139 Blocks Manhole Brick Grade MA ASTM C-32 One part Type I Mortar Portland Cement ASTM C-32 and 3 parts clean sharp sand B. An accepted water tight gasket shall be used on all pipes entering and exiting manhole unless specifically noted on the Drawing as not required. 2.03 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be in accordance with the respective NIn/DOT Specification as follows: 1. Riprap Materials - Mn/DOT 3601 2. Geotextile Filter (Type III or IV) - Mn/DOT 3733 3. Provide Type III under the following: a. Class I and Class II Field Stone b. Class I Quarry Stone c. Gabions d. Revet Mattresses PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION OF WORK A. The Work will be located as shown on the Drawings. B. It may be necessary for the Engineer to shift lines a reasonable amount to avoid an obstruction to the construction Work or to reduce right-of--way difficulties. The Contractor will not be allowed any additional compensation due to shift of lines. Additional compensation will be allowed only for lengthening of lines. Storm Sewer Systems 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 02720 - 2 A-ALBEV 0113 1 [~ r 1 1 i r r r 1 r 1 1 or improper. Unless otherwise permitted by 3.02 SHORING AND SHEETING the Engineer, bell and spigot pipe shall be laid with the bell ends facing upgrade and A. Shoring, sheeting, bracing, etc., shall be put the laying shall start at the downgrade end in place and maintained by the Contractor at and proceed upgrade. his own expense, as may be required to support the side of the excavation and to D. Before being lowered into laying position, prevent any movement which may in any the Contractor shall make a thorough visual way endanger personnel or injure or delay inspection of each pipe section and the Work or endanger adjacent buildings or appurtenant units to detect damage or other structures. Where sheeting and bracing unsound conditions that may need corrective are used, the trench width shall be increased action or be cause for rejection. Inspection accordingly. Trench sheeting shall remain in procedure shall be as accepted by the place until pipe has been laid, tested for Engineer, with special methods being. - defects, repaired if necessary, and the earth required as he deems necessary to check out around it compacted in a minimum of one suspected defects more definitely. The pass with vibrator equipment to a depth of Contractor shall inform the Engineer of any one foot over the top of the pipe. The defects discovered and the Engineer will sheeting and bracing shall be removed in prescribe. the required corrective actions or such manner as not to endanger the order rejection. constructed pipe or other structures, utilities or property, whether public or private. It E. Immediately before placement, the joint shall be the Contractor's responsibility and surfaces of each pipe section and fitting duty to be familiar with local and state shall be inspected for the presence of foreign ordinances and regulations relating to this matter, coating blisters, rough edges or type of Work and he shall assume the projections, and any imperfections so responsibility for compliance therewith. detected shall be corrected by cleaning, trimming, or repair as needed. ,~; 3.03 PIPE LAYING D r A 1 I 1 A. The type, kind and class of pipe to be used shall be as shown on the Drawings or specified herein. All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required line and grade. B. Proper implements, tools, equipment and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient prosecution of the Work. C. At the time of pipe placement, the bedding conditions shall be such as to provide uniform and continuous support for the pipe between bell holes. Bell holes shall be excavated as necessary to make the joint connections, but they shall be no larger than would be adequate. No pipe material shall be laid in water nor when the trench or bedding conditions are otherwise unsuitable F. Any defective or damaged pipe which has had its grade or joint disturbed after laying shall be replaced. G. As each length of bell and spigot pipe is placed in laying position, the .spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with accepted backfill material, which shall be thoroughly' compacted around the pipe. The joint areas shall remain exposed and precautions shall be taken to prevent the soil from entering the joint space, until the joint seal is effected. H. At all times when pipe laying is not in progress, including noon hour and overnight periods, all open ends of the pipe line shall be closed by watertight plugs or other means accepted by the Engineer. If water is present 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Storm Sewer Systems A-ALBEV 0113 02720 - 3 C SECTION 02730 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL frame and cover to a depth of 10 feet. 1.01 SUMMARY c. Measure depth from lowest invert to top of frame. A. Conditions of the Contract and pertinent 3. Excess Manhole Depth portions of sections in Division One of this a. Measure by distance in linear feet. Project Manual, apply to the Work of this b. Measure total distance from lowest Section as fully as though repeated herein. invert to top of frame, less 10 feet. 4. Manhole Connections B. Section Includes: a. Measure connections to an existing 1. The furnishing of all material, labor, manhole as a unit. tools and equipment to construct b. Unit includes cutting and patching complete in place all buried sanitary of the manhole wall and base and sewer piping as follows: the construction of a new invert. a. Gravity Sanitary Sewer Pipe 5. Service Connections b. Sanitary Manholes and a. Measure fittings of each size and Appurtenances type as a unit. c. Sewer Service Connections 6. Service Pipe d. Sewer Riser Pipe a. Measure by distance in linear feet of e. Sewer Service Pipe each size. f. Manhole seals b. Measure horizontally from the end of the service connection or riser C. Work shall be done in accordance with fitting to the end of the pipe. '~ applicable state and local codes, rules and 7. Riser Pipe ordinances. a. Measure by distance in linear feet for each size. D. Related Sections: b. Measure along the pipe axis from 1. Section 01300 -Submittals the end of the service connection `~ 2. Section 02221 -Trench Excavation & Backfill fitting to the end of the riser fitting. 8. Manhole Seals a. Incidental to manhole 0-10 feet pay E. Method of Measurement item 1. Sewer Pipe . a. Measure by distance in linear feet. F. Basis of Payment b. Measure from manhole centers with 1. Payment for acceptable quantities of no deduction for fittings. sanitary sewer items shall be at the c. Measure each pipe size, class, and contract unit price as listed on the Bid depth zone separately. Form. All associated. work items shall be, 2. Manholes considered incidental. ~: a. Measure each size and type individually as a unit. 1.02 REFERENCES b. Unit includes granular foundation, base, precast barrel and cone A. ASTM A48 -Specification for Gray Iron sections, steps, rings, manhole seal, Castings 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Sanitary Sewer Systems A-ALBEV 0113 02730 - 1 i B. ASTM C76 -Specification for Reinforced Concrete Pipe PART2 PRODUCTS J C. ASTM C361 -Specification for Reinforced Concrete Low Head Pressure Pipe D. ASTM C478 - Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole E. ASTM D2321 -Recommended Practice for Installation of Flexible Thermo-plastic Sewer Pipe F. ASTM D3034 - Specification for PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings G. ANSI A21.4 -Standard for Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings H. ANSI A21.11 - Standard for Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings I. ANSI A21.51 -Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast J. ANSI A21.53 -Standard for Ductile Iron Compact Fittings, 3 inch through 16 inch 1.03 DELIVERY OF MATERIALS A. Inspect all pipe and materials during unloading process. B. Notify Engineer of any cracked, flawed or otherwise defective material. C. Remove all materials found to be unsatisfactory by the Engineer from the site. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit for acceptance complete Shop Drawings and details for all pipe, fittings, structures, valves, operators, and other special appurtenances. This shall include required submission for acceptance including all manufacturers' product data, dimensions, sizes, types, maximum loadings, and thrust anchorages. 2.01 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE (PVC) - SANITARY A. Polyvinyl chloride pipe shall conform to ASTM D3034 (SDR35) or ASTM F789 and shall be used to a depth not to exceed 20 feet. Sewer pipes with a depth greater than 20 feet shall be SDR 26 PVC. B. Joints shall be elastomeric gasket joints. Said gasket joints must be accepted by the Engineer on the basis of data furnished by the manufacturer. C. An accepted water stop gasket shall be used on the sewer main where it enters and exits a manhole. The gasket shall be placed near the center of the manhole wall. D. No compensation will be given for bends, caps, plugs, reducers, and sleeves used on main sewer or service installation. 2.02 MANHOLE A. Manhole shall be constructed according to dimensions and details shown in the Drawings using materials as follows: Material Class or Type Specification Concrete ASTM C478 Reinforcing Grade 60 ASTM A615 for Billet steel bars 12" min. width ASTM C478 Manhole with min. 6" Aluminum alloy Steps projection or polypropylene 16" o.c. coated Precast Segmental Radial solid ASTM C-139 Blocks Manhole Grade MA ASTM C-32 Brick One part type 1 portland cement Mortar and three parts ASTM C-32 clean sharp sand Sanitary Sewer Systems 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 02730 - 2 A-ALBEV 0113 1 0 e 1 1 1 1 7 r 7 i A 1 1 1 1 u 1 !1 1 I~! ii 1 e B. An accepted water-tight gasket shall be used a. Resilient wedge gate valve shall on all pipes entering and exiting manhole, conform to ANSI/AWWAC509. unless specifically noted on the Drawings as Valve shall be resilient wedge gate not required. valves as manufactured by Clow Corporation; or equal. 2.03 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS b. Valves shall be non-rising stem with a 2-inch square operating nut. A. Where specified, the pipe furnished shall be c. The wedge shall be cast iron of the ductile iron type, as specified for each completely .encapsulated with particular use or installation and shall be polyurethane rubber (except for Class 52 unless otherwise noted on the guide and stem area). The Drawings. Ductile iron pipe shall conform to polyurethane rubber shall the requirements of AWWA C151/ANSI A- permanently bond to the cast iron 21.51 (Ductile Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast wedge to meet ASTM tests for in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds). rubber to metal bond (ASTM D- 429). B. .Fittings shall conform to the requirements of d. Stems for non-rising .stem ANSI A21.10, A21.11 and A21.4, or ductile assemblies shall be cast bronze with iron compact fittings mechanical joint integral collars. The non-rising stem conforming to ANSI A21.53, A21.11 and stuffing box shall be the O-ring seal A21.4. type, with two rings located above the thrust collar. The rings shall be C. DI pipe and fittings shall be furnished with replaceable with the valve fully cement mortar lining meeting the open at full-rated working pressure. requirements of AWWA C104/ANSI A21.4 e. There shall be two low torque for standard thickness lining. All exterior bearings located above and below surfaces of the pipe and fittings shall have a the stem collar. The stem nut shall tar or bituminous seal coating at least 1 mil be separate from the wedge and thick. Spotty or thin seal coating, or poor shall be of solid bronze. The coating adhesion, shall be cause for waterway shall be smooth and free rejection. of all pockets, cavities and depressions in the seat area. 2.04 BURIED VALVES £ Both interior and exterior of the body and bonnet shall be coated A. Gate Valves: with fusion-bonded epoxy. 1. All gate valves 2-inch to 10-inch shall be resilient-seated wedge gate valves. B. Valve Boxes: Mechanical joints shall conform to 1. Valve boxes shall be round base, three AWWA C111/ANSI A21.11-85. piece cast iron, Tyler No. 6860, Type 2. All gears on gate valves shall be cut "G", with a No. 6 base or accepted tooth steel gears, housed in heavy cast equal, suitable for the depth of cover iron extended type grease cases of required by the Drawings or the General accepted design. Requirements. 3. Manufacture shall furnish an affidavit 2. Valve boxes shall be 5-1/4-inch stating that the valve and all materials diameter, and shall have sufficient conform to the applicable requirements length to permit not less than- 6-inch and all tests specified under the adjustment above and below grade when respective standard have been the pipe is laid to the specified depth. performed and requirements have been Length adjustment shall be screw type. met. 3. Covers shall have the word "WATER" 4. Resilient Wedge Gate Valves: cast on the top. 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Sanitary Sewer Systems A-ALBEV 0113 02730 - 3 A 2.05 SERVICE LINES 2.07 MANHOLE SEALS 1 A. The service lines, as placed between the mains and property line, shall have a minimum of 8 feet of cover; therefore, service lines must be placed (incidental to the Project) beneath any obstruction which would prohibit the stated cover if the service line was placed on top of the said obstruction. If tunneling or jacking of building services is required, the method used shall be accepted by the Engineer. B. All building service locations will be established in the field by the Engineer. Generally, these locations will agree with those indicated on the Drawings; however, the Contractor shall not install a service until its location is verified by the Engineer. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to keep an accurate written record of the location and elevation of each service and submit this to the Engineer prior to backfilling. 2.06 INSULATION BOARD A. Insulation-board shall meet the requirements of MN/DOT 3760. Thickness shall be as specified on the Drawings. B. The insulation board shall be formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process and shall be homogeneous, and essentially uni-cellular. The surface of the boards shall be extruded, with skins. The material shall conform to the following requirements: Compressive strength at 35 psi minimum yield or 5 /o deflection Flammability Self extinguishing Water absorption after 24 hours immersion, by 0.25% maximum volume Thermal Conductivity, at 0.23 maximum mean temperature of 75° F A. Casting seals shall be manufactured by Infishield, Inc. or accepted equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION OF WORK A. The Work will be located as shown on the Drawings. B. It may be necessary for the Engineer to shift lines a reasonable amount to avoid an obstruction to the construction Work or to reduce right-of--way difficulties. -The Contractor will not be allowed any additional compensation due to shift of lines. Additional compensation will be allowed only for lengthening of lines. 3.02 SHORING AND SHEETING. A. Shoring, sheeting, bracing etc. shall be put in place and maintained by the Contractor at his own expense, as may be required to support the side of the. excavation and to prevent any movement which may in any way endanger personnel or injure or delay the Work, or endanger adjacent buildings or other structures. Where sheeting and bracing are used, the trench width shall be increased accordingly. Trench sheeting shall remain in place until pipe has been laid, tested for defects, repaired if necessary, and the earth around it compacted in a minimum of one pass with vibrator equipment to a depth of one foot over the top of the pipe. The sheeting and bracing shall be removed in such manner as not to endanger the constructed pipe or other structures, utilities or property, whether public or private. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility and duty to be familiar with local and state ordinances and regulations relating to this type of Work and he shall assume the responsibility for compliance therewith. Sanitary Sewer Systems 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 02730 - 4 A-ALBEV 0113 1 u ~II 1 1 I~ i 1 i e 1 0 '~I C -~ J 3.03 PIPE LAYING A. The type, kind and class of pipe to be used shall be as shown on the Drawings or specified herein. All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required line and grade. B. Proper implements, tools, equipment and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient prosecution of the Work. C. At the time of pipe placement, the bedding conditions shall be such as to provide uniform and continuous support for the pipe between bell holes. Bell holes shall be excavated as necessary to make the joint connections, but they shall be no larger than would be adequate. No pipe material shall be laid in water, nor when the trench or bedding. conditions are otherwise unsuitable or improper. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, bell and spigot pipe shall be laid with the bell ends facing upgrade, and the laying shall start at the downgrade end and proceed upgrade. D. Before being lowered into laying position, the Contractor shall make a thorough visual inspection of each .pipe section. and appurtenant units to detect damage or unsound conditions that may need corrective action or be cause for rejection. Inspection procedure shall be as .accepted by the Engineer, with special methods being required as he deems necessary to check out suspected defects more definitely. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of any defects discovered and the Engineer will prescribe the required corrective actions or order rejection. E. Immediately before placement, the joint surfaces of each pipe section and fitting shall be inspected for the presence of foreign matter, coating blisters, rough edges or projections; and any imperfections so detected shall be corrected by cleaning, trimming, or repair as needed. F. Any defective or damaged pipe which has had its grade or joint disturbed after laying, shall be replaced. G. As each length of bell and spigot pipe is placed in laying position, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with accepted backfill material, thoroughly compacted around the pipe. The joint areas shall remain exposed and precautions shall be taken to prevent the soil from entering the joint space until the joint seal is effected. H. At all times when pipe laying is not in progress, including noon hour-.and overnight periods, all open ends of the pipe line shall be closed by watertight plugs or other means accepted by the Engineer. If water is present in the trench, the seals shall remain in-place until the trench is pumped completely dry. I. All stubs installed for future connection shall have prefabricated watertight plugs and shall be restrained as an incidental item. 3.04 THRUST RESTRAINTS -ALL FLUID PRESSURE SYSTEMS A. Provide all. crosses, tees, dead-ends, and bends with suitable means of overcoming thrust, including existing pipe where required. The .pressure main shall be restrained using Megalug Retaining System or accepted equal. All retaining systems shall receive two coats of bitumastic paint. B. Where connections to existing pipe are required, the existing pipe -shall be exposed and tied based upon the following table. C. Based upon a test pressure of 150 psi, the following table shows the minimum length of pipe to be restrained where tied joints are used. Pipe Dead end tee 22- diameter in branch or 45° 'l/2° inches 90° bend bend bend;, 6 23 LF 7 LF 3 LF' 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Sanitary Sewer Systems A-ALBEV 0113 02730 - 5 t 8 25 LF 10 LF 5 LF 10 39 LF 12 LF 5 LF D. The cost of providing thrust restraints shall be considered as incidental to the cost of the pipe installation. 3.05 VALVES AND FITTINGS A. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, install cast iron valve boxes on all gate valves and on all direct burial butterfly valves. Valve boxes shall be firmly supported to maintain centered and plumb alignment over the wrench nut with box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement or at such other level as may be directed by the Engineer. 3.06 MAINTAINING SEWER SERVICE A. While construction is underway, the Contractor shall maintain the flow in sanitary sewers on a continuous basis until service from the newly constructed mains can be restored. The means and methods used are subject to the acceptance of the Engineer. Sewers shall be plugged by means of an inflatable plug, and all pumps, portable generators, hoses, and related items appurtenant to the Work shall be provided by the Contractor. Sanitary sewer shall be hooked up as the main is installed-. the initial adjustment; however, the. top ' section shall be installed without the use of mastic. At the time of final adjustment, the ' Contractor shall remove the top section of neoprene rubber and add extensions if necessary to meet height and overlap ' requirements. Finally, the upper section shall then be replaced in its' final position using mastic in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. , C. The seal shall be multi-section with a neoprene rubber top section, and all lower ' sections made of EPDM rubber with a minimum thickness of 60 mil. Each unit shall consist of a top and bottom section and shall have mastic on the bottom of the ' bottom section, and mastic on the top of the top section. The mastic shall be non- hardening butyl rubber sealant and shall seal ' to the cone/top slab of the CB/MH and over the lip of the casting. One unit shall seal a casting and up to six 2-inch adjusting rings. ' Depending on the number of adjusting rings needed, the bottom section will either be 6 or 12 inches in height. A 12-inch-high bottom section will cover up to six 2-inch adjusting rings. If there are more adjustment rings. per installation, there will be a ' requirement for an 8-inch EPDM rubber extension section. There will not be an extra pay item for this extension. ' D. Each of these extension sections shall cover B. Where it is necessary to pump sewage up to 2 more adjusting rings. Each extension overnight, the Contractor shall provide an shall overlap the bottom section by 2 inches, ' operator to stay with the pumping operation and shall be overlapped by the top section until construction operations resume the by 2 inches. next day. Sewer service lines to individual ' users may be disconnected for a period not 3.08 SANITARY SEWER TELEVISING to exceed 12 hours in any 1 day. Maintaining sanitary sewer service shall be A. The Contractor shall televise the entire , paid for as a lump sum. length of gravity sanitary sewer main constructed under this Contract and provide 3.07 MANHOLE SEAL INSTALLATION two copies of the tape to the Owner for record. The Contractor shall also provide a A. On all sanitary manholes not under paved log showing location of all service roadway.. connections accurate to within one foot of ' actual location. Televising the sanitary B. On manholes, the external seal system, top sewer shall be considered incidental. and bottom, shall be installed at the time of ' Sanitary Sewer Systems 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 02730 - 6 A-ALBEV 0113 ' 1 n ~i 0 ~I B. Prior to televising the sanitary sewer constructed under this Contract, the Contractor shall clean the lines with a sewer jet cleaning truck. All accumulated debris shall be removed from the sanitary sewer by a vacuum truck or o*.her means acceptable to the Owner. Sewer cleaning shall commence one manhole downstream of the project connection point. Cleaning the sanitary sewer shall be considered incidental. 3.09 TESTING GRAVITY SEWER MAINS A. Upon completion of the sewer construction and before house services are connected, sewers shall be cleaned and Tamped. Runs of sewer between manholes shall be straight and true. B. Gravity sewer pipe 27 inches and smaller shall be air tested as described herein. Gravity sewer, larger than 27 inches shall be tested for infiltration as described herein. C. If the infiltration, exfiltration or air tests fail to meet requirements specified herein, the Engineer reserves the .right to request additional air testing or television work to be done to locate leaks. The Contractor shall receive no additional compensation for this testing or inspection work, nor for repairs or corrective work required to be done to the sewers. The exfiltration test shall be used in areas where no groundwater is present. D. Test Procedure-Hydrostatic (Exfiltration Test) 1. The test section shall be bulkheaded and the pipe subjected to a hydrostatic pressure produced by a head of water at a depth of 3 feet above the top. of the sewer pipe at the upper manhole under test. In areas where groundwater exists, this head of water shall be 3 feet above the existing water table. 2. This head of water shall be maintained for a period of one hour during which it is presumed that full absorption of the pipe body has taken place and thereafter for a further period of 1 hour for the actual test of leakage. During this 1 hour test period, the measured maximum allowable rate of exfiltration for any section of sewer shall be 100 gallons per inch diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours. E. Test Procedure-Air 1. The Contractor shall perform these tests with equipment similar to Air-Loc equipment .manufactured by Cherne Industrial, Inc., Hopkins, Minnesota. 2. The air test shall be made when the pipe is clean. The line shall be plugged at each manhole with pneumatic balls. Low pressure air shall be introduced into the plugged line until the internal air pressure reaches 4.0 psi greater than the average back pressure of any groundwater pressure that may submerge the pipe. Groundwater pressure on the submerged pipe can be determined by multiplying the amount of water above the pipe, in feet, by 0.433.-This number is then added to the initial 4.0 psi introduced into the plugged line. At least 2 minutes shall be allowed for the air temperature to stabilize. before readings are taken and the timing started. 3. The portion of lines being air tested shall pass if it does not lose air at a rate to cause the pressure to drop from 3.5 to 3.0 p.s.i.g. (greater than the average back pressure of any groundwater that -may submerge the pipe) in less time than listed as shown below. F. Infiltration Test 1. Infiltration tests shall be made to determine the amount of groundwater infiltration into the sewer. Measurements will be taken by means of a weir placed in the line or by methods as determined by the Engineer. The maximum allowable rate of leakage shall be .100 gallons per inch diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours for any section of pipe. 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Sanitary Sewer Systems A-ALBEV 0113 02730 - 7 3.10 DEFLECTION TEST A. Deflection tests shall be performed on flexible pipe. The tests shall be conducted after the backfill has been in place at least 30 days. No pipe shall exceed a deflection of 5 percent; if the deflection tests are to be run using a rigid ball or mandrel, it shall have a diameter equal to 95 percent of the inside diameter of the pipe. The tests shall be performed without use of a mechanical pulling device. Any pipe not meeting the deflection test shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner. SPECIFICATION TIME REQUIRED FORA 0.5 PSIG PRESSURE DROP FOR SIZE AND LENGTH OF PIPE INDICATED 1 Pipe Diameter (in.) 2 Minimu m Time (mince c) 3 Length for Minimu m Time (ft.) 4 Time for Longer Length (sec.) pecified Minimum for Length (L) Shown (minsec) 100 ft 150 ft 200 ft 250 R 300 ft 350 ft 400 ft 450 ft 4 1:53 597 .190 L 1:53 1:53 1:53 1:53 1:53 1:53 1:53 1:53 6 2:50 398 .427 L 2:50 2:50 2:50 2:50 2:50 2:50 2:51 3:12 8 3:47 298 .760 L 3:47 3:47 3:47 3:47 3:48 4:26 5:04 5:42 10 4:43 239 1.187 L 4:43 4:43 4:43 4:57 5:56 6:55 7:54 8:54 12 5:40 199 1.709 L 5:40 5:40 5:42 7:08 8:33 9:58 11:24 12:50 15 7:05 159 2.671 L 7:05 7:05 8:54 11:08 13:21 15:35 17:48 20:02 18 8:30 133 3.846 L 8:30 9:37 12:49 16:01 19:14 22:26 25:38 28:51 21 9:55 114 5.235 L 9:55 13:05 17:27 21:49 26:11 30:32 34:54 39:16 24 11:20 99 6.837 L 11:24 17:57 22:48 28:30 34:11 39:53 45:35 51:17 27 12:45 88 8.653 L 14:25 21:38 28:51 36:04 43:16 50:30 57:42 64:54 30 14:10 80 10.683 L 17:48 26:43 35:37 44:31 53:25 62:19 71:13 80:07 33 15:35 72 12.926 L 21:33 32:19 43:56 53:52 64:38 75:24 86:10 96:57 36 17:00 66 15.384 L 25:39 38:28 51:17 64:06 76:55 89:44 102:34 115:23 42 19:74 57 20.942 L 34:54 52:21 69:49 87:15 104:42 122:10 139:37 157:04 48 22:67 50 27.352 L 45:35 68:23 91:11 113:58 136:46 159:33 182:21 205:09 ii 0 Service plugs shall be secured in place to prevent displacement during testing operations. END OF SECTION , n Sanitary Sewer Systems 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 02730 - 8 A-ALBEV 0113 ' n [] C SECTION 02765 PAVEMENT MARKING PART 1 GENERAL 2. All associated work items shall be considered incidental, including the 1.01 SUMMARY following: a. Preparing the surface A. Section Includes: b. Controlling and protecting traffic l . Application of temporary and permanent c. Maintaining the work through the markings on pavement surfaces. .duration of the project. d. Removing conflicting pavement B. Method of Measurement:. markings-and messages. 1. Solid Lines: 3. Consider primer, labor and other a. Measure solid lines (single and materials required for the installation of double) by distance in linear feet of preformed plastic pavement markings as applied material. incidental to the applicable pavement b. Measure each color and line width marking item. separately. c. Measure transverse sections by the 1.02 REFERENCES linear foot of applied material (using 24 inch solid yellow transverse lines A. Minnesota .Manual on Uniform Traffic surrounded by 4 inch solid double Control Devices (MMUTCD). yellow lines). 2. Broken Lines: B. Minnesota Traffic Engineering Manual. a. Measure by distance in linear feet of applied material. C. Mn/DOT Standard Specifications for b. Do not measure spacing between Construction (including all Supplemental line segments. Specifications). c. Measure each color and line width separately. D. Mn/DOT Specification for Epoxy Resin 3. Crosswalks: Pavement Markings (free of toxic heavy a. Measure zebra crosswalks by area in metals) square feet of applied material. b. Measure lined crosswalks by linear E. Mn/DOT Technical Specification No. 1 - foot of solid line as described above. Improved Patterned Polymer Pavement c. Included with Traffic Signal Marking Tape for Lines and Selected System. Symbols and Legends 4. Pavement Messages: a. Measure individually as a unit for F. Mn/DOT Technical Specification No. 3 - each message type (Left Turn High Durability Preformed Pavement Arrow, Right Turn Arrow). Markings (Designed for Stoplines and Crosswalks) C. Basis of Payment: 1. Payment for pavement markings and G. Mn/DOT 3354 - Preformed Plastic messages shall be at the contract unit Markings for Permanent Traffic Lane price as listed on the Bid Form. Delineation and Legends. 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Pavement Marking A-ALBEV 0113 02765 - 1 H. Application Specification for Traffic Marking Paint. PART 2 PRODUCTS I. Mn/DOT Specification for High Solids 2.01 MATERIALS ' Water Based Traffic Paint. J. Mn/DOT specification for .Drop-on Glass A. Tape: 1. Stamark Pavement Marking Tape, ' Beads.. Series 420 (for crosswalks and stop bars), Series 380 (for all other pavement K. Mn/DOT "Sign Details for Striper Train". markings), Scotch-Lane Removable ' Tape, Series 5710 (for construction 1.03 SCHEDULE zones) or Engineer approved equivalents. ' A. Place epoxy pavement markings together with appropriate glass spheres in accordance B. Primer: with the Mn/DOT specifications. 1. "Stamark" brand primer P-46, or Engineer approved equivalent. , B. Coordinate placement of lane tape, symbols and legends installed on new pavement with C. Paint: ' final bituminous overlay. 1. High solids water based traffic paint in conformance with the Mn/DOT C. Apply and roll preformed plastic lane lines, symbols and legends with the final rolling of specification. , the bituminous surface. D. Glass Beads: 1. Provide in accordance with Mn/DOT D. .Application of pavement markings during specification (8 pounds per gallon). ' hours of darkness shall be allowed only by approval of Engineer. 2.02 EQUIPMENT E. On pavement open to traffic, .installation of A. Preformed Plastic Pavement Markings: pavement markings may be suspended by 1. "Scotchliner" brand manual highway direction of Engineer during peak traffic tape applicator (MHTA) or equivalent. ' hours or at any other time traffic is being 2. "Scotchliner" brand RTC-2 roller unduly hampered or delayed by the work in tamper cart, or equivalent, with a progress. minimum 2001b. (90.7 kg) load. 3. Primer applicator - Primer roller ' F. Final acceptance of preformed plastic applicator (SLT-934) with roller sleeves pavement markings may be delayed to June (SLT-935), any solvent-resistant, long 30 of the year following installation, in order nap roller, or "Greenlite" brand GLG-12 ' to evaluate adhesive and retroreflective or PS-14 primer spray applicator. characteristics of the pavement markings. B. Paint: , G. Apply paint to bituminous surface not less 1. Self-propelled, pressure type applicator than 7 days after placement of bituminous .subject to Engineer approval. surface. H. Apply epoxy pavement marking to bituminous surface not less than 24 hours after placement of bituminous surface. ' Pavement Marking 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 02765 - 2 A-ALBEV 0113 , C ~J 0 n n PART 3 EXECUTION b. Properly position the tape while unwinding. 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION c. Cut off the desired length of tape. d. Walk on tape for initial tamping. A. Clean the road by sweeping immediately 6. After application, firmly tamp the prior to application. markings with a "Scotchliner" brand RTC-2 roller tamper cart, or equivalent, B. Do not apply pavement markings to wet- with a minimum 200 lb. (90.7 kg) load. surfaces. 7. If conditions preclude the application of preformed pavement markings, paint 3.02 APPLICATION shall be used until the preformed A. Polypreformed Pavement Marking pavement markings can be properly applied. Application 1. Install preformed plastic pavement B. Paint Application: markings in accordance with the 1. Apply all paint to a minimum thickness manufacturer's specifications and as of 15 mils (wet). follows. 2. Premark the road where tape will be C. Spacing and Layout applied. 1. Apply all markings in accordance with 3. Prime the road: plan layout and details. a. For overlay on existing roadway 2. Center 4 inch space between double surfaces, prime first with "Stamark" lines on the roadway centerline, as brand primer P-46, or equivalent. shown in Plans, or as directed by b. Typical equipment includes a primer Engineer. roller applicator (SLT-934) with 3. Provide 4 inch space between 4 inch roller sleeves (SLT-935) or any solid yellow and 4 inch broken yellow solvent-resistant long nap roller, or where used for center left turn lane "Greenlite" brand GLG-12 or PS-14 delineation or for centerline striping. primer spray .applicator (P-14 4. Apply broken lines in a pattern of 10 coverage is approximately 200 feet of marking and 40 feet of space. square feet/gallon). Clean 5. Apply 24 inch wide stop lines from edge equipment with any common of gutter across all approach lanes to the solvent. intersection, as shown in Plans. c. Procedure for applying primer. will 6. Locate 24 inch wide stop. lines 4-foot include: (1) marking the road where behind crosswalk pavement markings or tape will be applied. (2) applying as directed by Engineer. one thin coat of P-46 to pavement, 7. Apply zebra crosswalk design in extending at least 1 inch (2.54 cm) accordance with Figure 7.23 of the beyond outlined areas. Let dry until Minnesota Traffic Engineering Manual 15 minutes at 70 degrees F. (21 and the following: degrees C.). It is very important that a. Dimension "W" shall be 3 feet the primer dry to prevent the b. Dimension "S" shall be 3 feet. pavement tape from sliding after c. Crosswalk width shall be 6 feet. application. d. No transverse lines. 4. Apply tape by hand, with a 8. Transverse areas shown on Plans shall "Scotchliner" brand manual highway consist of 24 inch solid yellow lines. A 4 tape applicator (MHTA) or equivalent. inch solid double yellow line shall be 5. For hand application: installed along each end of the a. Position the lead edge. transverse markings in accordance with Figure 7.13 of the Minnesota Traffic 2002 Northwest Commercial Park Pavement Marking A-ALBEV 0113 02765 - 3 ILJ Engineering Manual. Approximately 20 feet of space shall be left between each B. When necessary, a pilot car and flaggers transverse line. shall be used to provide adequate control 9. Turn lane pavement messages shall be and direction of traffic. ' installed as shown in Figure 7.11 of the Minnesota Traffic Engineering Manual C. Warning signs and barricades shall be and shall be installed near the midpoint placed only where marking operations are in ' of the lane for which the pavement progress, shall be relocated as often as message is serving. Top to bottom necessary, and shall not be left in place length of arrows shall be 6' 11 ". Top to overnight. ' bottom length of words (ONLY) shall be 8' 0". D. Traffic shall be allowed to keep moving at 10. Distance between arrows in two-way all times and the striping equipment shall be center left turn lanes shall be 32 feet, operated in a manner that will not make it ' measured from top of arrow to top of necessary for traffic to cross uncured arrow. markings. 11. The Engineer shall place necessary ' "spotting" at appropriate points to E. Protective devices such as "cones" shall be provide horizontal control for striping, of an approved type that will .not cause and determine necessary starting and damage to the vehicle when accidentally , cutoff points. Skip line intervals will not struck. be marked. Longitudinal joints and pavement edges shall serve as horizontal F. Protect traffic and markings in accordance ' control when so directed. with applicable details of the Mn/DOT 12: A tolerance of 1/8 inch under and 1/2 "Sign Details for Striper Train". inch over the specified width will be , allowed for striping provided the variance is gradual and does not detract END OF SECTION from the general appearance. Skip line ' segments may vary up to 1/4 foot from the specified lengths provided the over and under variations are reasonably compensatory. Alignment deviations , from the control guide shall not exceed 2 inches. Material shall not be applied over a longitudinal joint. Establishment ' of application tolerances shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to comply as closely as ' practicable with the planned dimensions. 3.03. PROTECTION OF TRAFFIC AND ' MARKINGS A. Furnish and install all necessary warning and directional signs and devices in order to; maintain traffic whenever pavement markings are applied in the presence of traffic, and to protect uncured markings as ' needed until traffic can cross markings without damaging markings. , Pavement Marking 2002 Northwest Commercial Park 02765 - 4 A-ALBEV 0113 ' July 1, 2000 TRAFFIC ENGINEERING MANUAL TYPICAL LEFT TURN LANE rY 3.6m (12') 3.6m (12') TURN LANE TURN LANE 100 mm (4") SOLID 1D0 mm {4") LINE LINE WHITE 50 mm + 25 mm I I 100 mm (4 )~ ~ + -.1 I+•- 50 mm + 25 mm~ ~ r(2" 1") MAX. (2" + 1") MAX. MAX. 100 mm (4^)SOLID LINE YELLOW TYPICAL MESSAGE PLACEMENT FOR TURN LANES I 1 ~ 60 m (200') ) OR LESS ( ARROW AT MIDPOINT ( - 15 m (50') ) ( t _ 6 m (20') ~ ARROWS' 2.4 m (8"0") ( ( 10 m-25 m (30'-80') OVER 60 m (200') 15 m (50') ~ TYPICAL RIGHT TURN LANE 3.6 m (12') - 3.6 m (12') LANE LANE 100 mm (4") LINE iD0 mm i4") SOLID LINE WHITE ~50 mm ± 25 mm I ~ 100 mm ~50 mm ± 25 mm (2" . 1") MAX-- 11~~-- 4 MAX. HHHH---- ( ") (2" + 1") MAX. 100 mm (4") SOLID LINE WHRE TYPICAL MARKINGS FOR rl I~II I LEFT TURN ISLANDS 6 m (20') \ • 45° -2 - 100 mm (4") OLID LINES YEIL~ 600 mm (24") SOLID LINE YELLOW 150 m (500') SOLID LINE YELLOW ** IF THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE BEGINNING OF THE SOLID LINE YELLOW FOR THE PAINTED LEFT TURN LANE ISLAND AND AN EXISTING NO PASSING ZONE (SOLID LINE YELLOW) FOR THE SAME LANE IS LESS THAN: 1. 150 m (500') WHEN THE SPEED LIMIT IS 35 MPH OR LESS, 2. 200m (650') WHEN THE SPEED LIMIT IS 40-50 MPH, 3, 245m (800') WHEN THE SPEED LIM17 IS 55 MPH OR GREATER THE NO PASSING ZONES SHALL BE CONNECTED. Text Ref.: 7-4.05.09 AT SPEEDS OVER 40 MPH THE CROSSHATCH SPACING MAY BE INCREASED TO ** 10 m (30') BETWEEN CROSSHATCH LINES. AT SPEEDS LESS THAN 40 MPH THE WIDTH OF THE CROSSHATCH LINE MAY BE REDUCED TO 300 mm (12"). TURN LANE AND LEFT TURN ISLAND FIGURE July 1,1999 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 7 . J July 1, 2000 TRAFFIC ENGINEERING MANUAL 100 mm (4") Broken Line Yellow **150 m (500') SOLID LINE ** 150 m (500') YELLOW SOLID LINE 3.6m 100mm (4") Solid line White 3.6m YELLOW (12) (72') I White Delineation • ~ 100 mm (4") Double ~ Solid Line Yellow • ~ ~ 600 mm (24") Solid Line Yellow ~ 45~ at 6m (20') spacing ~ (See Figure 7.11) ~ ~ Yellow Delineation ~ ~ ~~ •~ 42m ~ I 4.2m (14') (tai 30m - 60m (100'-200') I 30m - 60m (100'-200') • • 100mm (4") Solid Line Yellow I 100mm (4") Solid I Line White 1:70 1:70 Taper Taper i 60 m (200') 60 m (200') I I ~ I Tlt ~- 100mm (4") Broken Line White ** IF THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE BEGINNING OF THE NO PASSING ZONE TO THE BEGINNING OF THE TAPER FOR A MEDIAN ISLAND AND AN EXISTING NO PASSING ZONE (SOLID LINE YELLOW) FOR THE SAME LANE IS LESS THAN_ 1. 150 m (500') WHEN THE SPEED LIMIT IS 35 MPH OR LESS, 2. 200 m (650') WHEN THE SPEED LIMIT IS 40-50 MPH, 3. 245 m (800') WHEN THE SPEED LIMIT IS 55 MPH OR GREATER THE NO PASSING ZONES SHALL BE CONNECTED. Text Refi.: 7-4.05.12 DIVIDED ROADWAY TRANSITION FIGURE July 1,1998 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 7 . '~ '~ ~., TRAFFIC ENGINEERING MANUAL Use the same signing and marking for the opposite direction. R R/ T W10-1 .600 mm ~~ ) -I 2m 5m (16') ~(6" 6"~ 400 mm (16") I 6 m (20') 0.5 m 2m !!R R'' (6') 7m'(24') (3') -~_ 1 i00 mm I (2') R R W10-1 X PASSING ZONE W 14-3 Text Ref.: 7-4.05.14 R R W 10-1 RAILROAD CROSSINGS WITH TRUCK STOPPING LANE FIGURE July 1,1998 PAVEMENT MARKINGS ~ .14 I I I 600 mm (2') 600 mm~ (2') ar i SPEED LIMIT 30 mph 40 mph 50 mph 55 mph 1.15 Taper X 45m 150' 85m 275' 130m 425' 150m 500' 115 m (50') Minimum I ~ Optional W4-2 100 mm (4") Broken Line White >L~Without Gate Arm -- 5m (15') from nearest rail With Gate Arm - 2.4m (5') from gate arm - 100 mm (4") Solid Line White ~- 15im (50') - TRUCK 1 Si OPPINO LANE R4-X4 1:15 Taper 100 mm (4") Solid Edge Line White it aA July 1, 2000 TRAFFIC ENGINEERING MANUAL (L> WIDTH OF INSIDE LANE tw) WIDTH OF PAINTED AREA (s) WIDTH OF SPACE 2.7m (9') 600mm (2.0') 750mm (2.5') 3.Om (10') 750mm (2.5') 750mm (2.5') 3.3m (11') 750mm (2.5') 900mm (3.0') 3.6m (12') 900mm (3.0') 900mm (3.0') 4.Om (13') 900mm (3.0') 1100mm (3.5') ~ ~ - - -~~S - - ~ - - ~~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ _ ~ ~~ ~ ~~ _ ~ 1.8m (6') MIN. 450mm (1.5') MINIMUM UNSTRIPPED DISTANCE NOTES: 1. Painted areas to be centered on centerline and lane lines. 2. A minimum of 450 mm (1.5 feet) clear distance shall be left adjacent to the curb. If the last painted area falls into this distance, it must be omitted. 3. On two-lane, two-way streets, use the spacing shown for a 3.3 m (11 ,foot) inside lane. 4. For divided roadways, adjustments in spacing of the blocks should be made in the median so that the blocks are maintained in their proper location across the traveled portion of the roadway. 5. At skewed crosswalks, the blocks are to remain parallel- to the lane lines as shown. Text Ref.: 7-4.08.01 PEDESTRIAN CROSSWALK MARKINGS - FIGURE January 1,1996 ZEBRA DESIGN 7.20 ~_ ~~ March 1, 1999 METRIC (ENGLISH) ATTACHMENT SPECIFICATIONS FOR EPOXY RESIN PAVEMENT MARHINGS (FREE OF TOXIC HEAVY METALS) 1.0 DESCRIPTION The work shall consist of furnishing and installing reflectorized white and yellow two-component, 100 percent solids epoxy pavement markings. Applications are lines, legends, symbols, crosswalks and stop lines placed on properly prepared asphaltic and portland cement concrete pavement surfaces in accordance with the Special Provisions, 1 Plans, this Attachment and as directed by the Engineer. Upon curing, the materials produce pavement markings of specified thickness, width and retroreflectivity that resist wear from high traffic volumes for several years. During darkness and weather permitting, yellow markings shall be readily distinguishable from white markings. Values stated in the International System of Units SI apply only to projects to be constructed in Metric units of measure. Values stated in inch-pound units (in parenthesis) apply only to projects to be constructed in English units of measure. 2.0 QUALIFICATIONS 2.l Epoxy striping is a technical process requiring specialized equipment, quality controlled materials and well-trained operators to produce functional, long life pavement markings. To minimize application failures, Mn/DOT requires epoxy materials, beads, the pavement marking contractor, and striper to be approved prior to the bidding process. 2.l .1 A pavement marking contractor and/or equipment may be qualified as follows: 1. No previous epoxy striping on any construction contract-- contact Mn/DOT to arrange for field demonstration. 2. Recent epoxy striping experience with other state transportation departments-- contact Mn/DOT and provide experience summary, including names of persons to be contacted. 3. If striper is new, contact Mn/DOT to arrange for field demonstration. 2.1.2 Before any epoxy product is acceptable for bid, it shall be field tested, evaluated, approved and assigned a product identification number by the Mn/DOT Materials Engineering Section. An approved product is placed on the APPROVED PRODUCTS LIST which is shown in Section 2.1.4. 2.1.3 No change in product identification, chemical composition as indicated by infrared spectrophotometry and/or chemical analysis, or changes in the application requirements will be allowed. Any such changes shall be submitted for further evaluation. Paee l of l0 March 1, 1999 METRIC (ENGLISH) Mn/DOT EPOXY PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIAL APPROVED PRODUCTS LIST 2.1.4 Fast Drv (Type Il Manufacturer Product Appr Date Polycarb Inc. MARK 55.3 1998 Epoplex LS 50 1998 Slow Dry (Type II) Manufacturer Product Appr Date , Polycarb Inc. MARK 55 1991 Epoplex LS 60 1998 3.0 MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS 3.1 This specification provides for the classification of epoxy resin pavement marking systems by tYPe- 3.l .1 Type I - A fast cure material suitable for line applications and, under ideal conditions ,may not require coning. 3.1.2 Type II - A slow cure material suitable for all applications of pavement markings under controlled traffic conditions, i.e., coning is required and flagging may be as directed by the Engineer. 3.1.2 Only Slow Dry Type II epoxy material shall be used for epoxypavement markings except when specified as otherwise in the Special Provisions. 4.0 EPOXY AND BEAD REQUIREMENTS 4.1 Epoxy Resin Material 4.1.1 .The material shall be composed of epoxy resins and pigments only. No solvents are to be given off to the environment upon application to a pavement surface. 4.1.2 The composition shall be within the tolerance permitted for the product tested and approved by Mn/DOT. Type Il material shall be completely free of TMPTA (Tri-Methyol Propane Tri-Acrylate) and other multi-functional monomers. 4.l .3 All. materials shall be free of lead, cadmium. mercury hexavalent chromium and other toxic , heavy metals as defined by the United States Environmental Protection A ency. 4.I.4 Color -- The color of the white epoxy shall be a pure flat white, free of tints. The color of the yellow epoxy shall closely match Color Number 33538 of Federal Standard 595 and shall conform to the following CIE Chromaticity limits using illuminant "C": x l 0.470 10.485 10.520 10.480 y 10.440 10.460 10.450 10.420 Daylight Directional Reflectance (Y), white, minimum 83 , Pa e2of l0 - March I, 1999 METRIC (ENGLISH) Daylight Directional Reflectance (Y), yellow, minimum SO Testing will be according to Daylight Directional Reflectance ASTM D 2805 Color ASTM D 2805 4.1.5 Adhesion Capabilities -- When the adhesion of the material to portland cement concrete (the concrete shall have a minimum of 2,070 kPa (300 psi.) tensile strength) is tested according to American Concrete Institute Committee 403 testing procedure, the failure of the system must take place in the concrete. The concrete shall be 32°C when the material is applied, after which the material shall be allowed to cure for 72 hours at 23±2°C. 4.1.6 Abrasion Resistance -- When the abrasion resistance of the material is tested according to ' ASTM C SO1 with a CS-17 wheel under a load of 1000 grams for 1000-cycles, the wear . index shall be no greater than 82. (The wear index is the weight in milligrams that is abraded from the sample under the test conditions). 4.l .7 Hardness -- The Type D durometer hardness of the material shall be not less than 7S nor more than 90 when tested according to ASTM D2240 after the material has cured for 72 hours at 23±2°C. ' 4.1.8 Tensile Strength -- The tensile strength of the material, when tested according to ASTM D 638, shall not be less than 41,370 kPa (6,000 psi.) after 72 hours cure at 23±2°C. 4.1.9 Compressive Strength -- The compressive strength of the material, when tested according to ' ASTM D 695, shall not be less than 82,700 kPa (12,000 psi.) after 72 hours cure at 23±2°C. 4.1.]0 Shelf Life -- The individual components shall not require mixing prior to use when stored for a period of 12 months. 4.2 Glass Beads 4.2.1 Glass beads shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M247, Type I, and: a. Coatings -- the-beads shall be treated according to the manufacturers i recommendations and meet the requirements of Section 4.4.2 of M247, and b. Roundness-- the beads shall have a roundness of at least 80%. 4.2.2 For 380 µm (1S mil) applications, glass beads shall be applied at a rate of at ]east 3.0 kg/L (2S ]b./gal.). A greater bead application rate may be necessary for meeting the performance criteria (minimum levels of retroreflectivity). This will require contractors to consult with all the material manufacturers. 4.3 Time to No-Track -- Type I material shall be in "no-tracking" condition in 1 S minutes or less and within 4S minutes for Type II material. The "no-tracking" condition shall be determined on an application of specified thickness to the pavement and covered with glass beads at the rate of at ]east 3.0 kg/L. (2S lb./gal.). The lines for this test shall be applied with striping equipment operated so as to have the material at manufacturer's recommended application temperature. This maximum "no-tracking" time shall not be exceeded when the pavement temperature varies from 10 to 49° C (SO to 120° F) and under all humidity conditions, providing the pavement is dry. The no-tracking time shall be determined by passing over the line with a passenger car or pickup truck at a speed of 40 to SS kmph (2S to 3S mph) in a simulated passing maneuver. Aline showing no visual deposition of the material to the pavement surface when viewed from a distance of 1 S m (SO ft.) shall be considered as showing "no-tracking" and conforming to this requirement for time to "no-track." Page 3 of ] 0 March 1, 1999 METRIC (ENGLISH) , 5.0 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT AND PROCEDURES 5.1 Equipment ' 5.1.1 Equipment furnished shall include an applicator truck of adequate size and power, designed to apply an epoxy resin material and glass beads in a continuous or intermittent line pattern. The equipment shall be capable of placing stripes on the left and right sides. Theleft carriage ~~ shall be capable of placing two lines simultaneously with either line in a solid or intermittent pattern in yellow or white. With change in color usage, an amount of material equal to fifteen 3 m (10 ft.} stripes shall be wasted to eliminate the change of the incorrect color being applied. 5.1.2 The applicator truck (striper) and other vehicles in the striping train shall have permanently mounted Type C flashing arrowboards. -They shall be visible to oncoming or following traffic, depending on the type of line being placed. Arrowboard requirements are detailed in the "Field Manual" of the Minnesota Manual of Traffic Control Devices. Also, truck equipment shall be capable of accumulating the footage applied per gun, individually each day. Only material application shall activate the footage accumulators. The readout shall be digital and not adjustable. 5.1.3 The equipment shall be capable of applying glass beads in a pressurized system at a rate of at least 3.0 kg/L (25 lb./gal.). A greater bead application rate may be necessary for meeting the performance criteria (minimum levels of retroreflectivity). This will require ' contractors to consult with all the material manufacturers. 5.1.4 All guns on the spray carriages shall be in full view of the operator(s) during operation. 5.1.5 Each crew shall include at ]east one technical expert knowledgeable in equipment operation, ' application techniques, control of traffic, and safety regulations. 5.2 Procedures. 5.2.1 Pavement markings shall be placed in accordance with the details shown in the Plans and the 1 control points established by the Engineer. 5.2.2 The road surface shall be cleaned at the direction of the Engineer just prior to an application. Pavement cleaning shall consist of at least brushing with a rotary broom (non-metallic), or as recommended by the material manufacturer and acceptable to the Engineer. New Portland cement concrete surfaces shall be sandblasted clean to remove any surface treatments and/or laitance. On low speed [Speed Limit 65 km/h (40 mph} or less] urban portland cement concrete roadways, sandblast cleaning shall be used for all epoxy. pavement markings.. 5.2.3 If the roadway surface is dry, the epoxy material application shall immediately follow the pavement cleaning and be preceded by an air blast. However, markings shall not be applied when the wind or other conditions cause a film of dust to be deposited on-the pavement surface before the material can be applied. 5.2.4 The Engineer will place necessary spotting at appropriate points as overall horizontal control for striping and to indicate necessary starting and cutoff points. Broken-line intervals will not be marked. Longitudinal joints, pavement edges, and existing markings shall serve as control points when so directed. 5.2.5 A 380µm (I S mil) epoxy line requires a liter of mixed components for every 25.8 m (84.5 ft.) of 100 mm (4 in.) wide line. Field measurements are inserted into the following equation: Line Thickness in micrometers = Liters x O.OOI x 10-3x m3 divided by the quantity Length in meters x width in meters (Thickness in inches = Gallons x 231 cubic inches divided by the quantity Length (inches) x Width (inches)). Use 3.785 liters per gallon if epoxy is metered in gallons. Page 4 of l0 March 1, 1999 I METRIC (ENGLISH) 5.2.6 The minimum line width shall be its nominal width with 6 mm ('/a in.) greater than the nominal width allowed provided the variation is gradual and does not detract from the general appearance. Broken line segments, normally 2 m (6.56 ft.) every 10 m (32.81 ft.), may vary up to 75 mm (3 in.) from the specified lengths provided the over and under variations are reasonably compensatory. Alignment deviations from the control guide shall not exceed ,except when approved by the Engineer. Material shall not be applied over a longitudinal joint. Establishment of application tolerances shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to comply as closely as practicable with the planned dimensions. 5.3 Spraying Operation 5.3.1 Placement of epoxy materials shall be permitted only on a clean, dry pavement surface and air and pavement temperatures at least 10° C (50° F) unless the manufacturer, in writing, approves a lower temperature. 5.3.2 Two parts of epoxy component A (pigment) and one part component B (hardener) shall be heated separately at 43°±1 ° C (1 l0°±30° F) and thoroughly mixed. All material heated over 60° C (140° F) shall be discarded. The sprayed epoxy shall be applied at 43 °±I ° C (110°±30°F) or as recommended by the manufacturer. 5.3.3 Glass beads shall be applied immediately after the placement of the epoxy. If two bead gradations are required by the Special Provisions, two bead dispensers are required to deliver the specified drop rates. Otherwise the dispenser system must deliver at a minimum 3.0 kg (25 Ib_/gal.) of beads per liter of epoxy material. A greater bead application rate may be .necessary for meeting the performance criteria (minimum levels of retroreflectivity). This will require contractors to consult with all the material manufacturers. 5.3.4 The Contractor shall cooperate with inspection personnel in reviewing operation of the equipment, safety precautions, measurement of materials (components and beads), computations to determine specific and daily application rates, sampling materials, making other measurements, such as epoxy thickness, and notifications as to work schedule. 5.3.5 Only Tvpe II epoxy material shall be used for epoxy pavement markings except when specified as otherwise in the Special Provisions 5.3.6 Traffic control for the pavement marking operations shall be in substantial conformance with the "Field Manual," Minnesota Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices . A shadow vehicle with atruck-mounted attenuator shall be used on high speed [SPEED LIMIT (65 km/h) (40 mph) and greater], high volume (ADT 1500 and greater) highways. 6.0 SAMPLING RATE & PROCEDURES 6.1 One pint samples of each manufacturer's lot or batch furnished for the contract shall be submitted to Mn/DOT at the time of manufacturing. One pint samples of both Part A (yellow/white) & part B must be submitted to the Mn/DOT Materials Laboratory, 1400 Gervais Ave., Maplewood, Minnesota 55109. (612) 779-5550 or 5549, FAX: (612) 779-5616. Samples shall be identified as follows: 1. Manufacturer's Name 5. Color . 2. Manufacturer's Product Number 6. Intended state project numbers. 3. Lot/Batch Number 4. Date Manufactured 6.2 Contractors will not be allowed to use material that has not. meet the requirements of Sections 6.1 & 7.0. Contractors will be asked to remove material that does not conform to Sections 6.1 & 7.0 and replace with material that does. Page 5 of 10 March i, 1999 METRIC (ENGLISH) , 7.0 CERTIFICATIONS 7.1 The manufacturer shall certify that the components meet the requirements of these specifications and are on the Mn/DOT Approved Product List. 7.2 Certifications shall be sent along with the samples in section 6.1. 8.0 CONTAINER MARHINGS 8.1 Containers for epoxy components shall be marked with the manufacturer's name, product identification number, lot or batch number, date of manufacture, color, net weight of contents. 8.2 Containers for glass beads shall be marked with the name of manufacturer, the wording "Glass. Beads," lot or batch number, coating type, date manufactured, and the net weight. 9.0 ACCEPTANCE OF PAVEMENT MARHINGS In order to be a long-life pavement marking, epoxy markings placed in Minnesota must retain a satisfactory level of retroreflectivity in addition to demonstrating good adhesion, resisting chipping, and exhibiting proper daytime and nighttime colors. These attributes have been observed and evaluated for several years and are the basis for acceptance/rejection procedures and values used herein. 9.1 Retroreflectivity , 9.1.1 Acceptable Minimum Retroreflectivity Values MINIMUM AVERAGE RETROREFLECTNITY VALUES FOR EPOXY MARKINGS (mcd/m2/lux) Period White Yellow Initial* 300 200 After-One-Winter* 175 140 * Described in Section 9.1.4 Miscellaneous Traffic Controls, Numbers 4 and 5. 9.1.2 Retroreflectometers-- Measurements shall be taken with either a portable or mobile retroreflectometer conforming to 30-meter geometry which is defined as: the entrance angle (the angle between the illumination axis and the retroreflector axis) shall fall between 88.50° and 88.76° and the observation angle (the angle between the illumination axis and the observation axis) shall fall between 1.0° and 1.05°; and, the co-viewing angle (the complement of the entrance angle) shall fall between 2.29° and 2.50°. All retroreflectivity readings and data analysis will be provided by Mn/DOT at no cost to the Contractor. Mn/DOT reserves the right to: • make daytime and/or nighttime visual inspections with or without the presence of the Contractor's representative, mainly to locate obvious or suspect areas of deficiency, and • determine retroreflectivity of symbols, legends and lines wider than 200 mm (8 in.) using the portable retroreflectometer only. 9.1.3 Test Se meets -- The following methodology will be used to evaluate retroreflectivity performance of in-service longitudinal line pavement markings: ~, Page 6 of 10 March 1, 1999 METRIC (ENGLISH) LENGTH AND NUMBER OF TEST SEGMENTSa PER ROADWAYb PER LINE TYPE` Len th of Roadwa g y Number of Test Length of Test Segments Segments Less than l .5 km (1 mi.) 1 300 m (0.2 mi.} Greater than or equal to 1.5 1 per 1.5 km (1 mi.) 300 m (0.2 mi.) km (l mi.) a TEST SEGMENTS-- Areas of a roadway chosen for measuring retroreflectivity of the line types. n ROADWAY--As used here, means that portion of a street or highway ordinarily used for vehicular traffic. In the event a street or highway includes two or more separate roadways, the term roadway sha1J refer to each roadway separately. ` LINE TYPE-- Longitudinal lines of the same color and function. For example, white and yellow edge.lines are each a line type. 9.l .4 Measurements in Test Se menu Portable Retroreflectometer l . Take a minimum of 20 readings in each test segment per line type. 2. On broken lines (skip striping), measure every other stripe, taking no more than two readings per stripe with readings 0.5 m (20 in.) from the ends of the marking. 3. For solid lines, divide test segment into ten areas of 30 m-(100 ft.); space readings a . minimum of 10 m (33 ft.) and a maximum of 30 m (100 ft.) apart. ~, ~ 4. For l0 percent of each message type, take 5 readings on each message line; for 10 percent of each symbol type, take 5 readings on each symbol. 5. Upon completion of the evaluation, regardless of the results, additional test segments may be ordered by the Engineer. ,- - Mobile Retroreflectometer 1. Calibration of the instruments shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Retroreflectivity shall be measured at a minimum rate of 20 percent of each roadway length byline type. 3. Should another mobile unit be available, the maximum acceptable deviation for measurements made by the two different instruments of the same manufacturer and for the same roadway length shall be ± 10%. 4. Repeatability for the given mobile unit shall be ± 6%. 5. Upon completion of the evaluation, regardless of the results, additional test segments may be ordered by the Engineer . Miscellaneous Controls 1. Take measurements on a clean, dry roadway. 2. Collect data in direction of traffic flow. 3. Measurement units are: mcd/m2/lux. 4. Wait at least two (2) weeks from date of placement of the markings before taking initial readings. Paoe 7 of 10 9.1.5 9.2 March ], 1999 METRIC (ENGLISH) 5. Take after-one-winter readings in May or June to assure that spring rains have cleaned the beads. 6. Randomly select test segments unless night reviews or other knowledge supersedes a random selection process. 7. Measure each line type separately. 8. The Engineer may request additional readings or test segments. 9. In the event LASERLUX is not available, the Engineer may require the use of the portable retroreflectometer or establish an alternative evaluation plan. Contents of Retroreflectivity Report The report shall consist of: • State Project number Trunk Highway number • Test date • Geographical location of the test site(s), including distance from the nearest permanent site identification, such as a reference point. • Identification of the pavement marking material tested: type, color, age, and transverse location on the road • Identification of the. retroreflectometer • .Remarks concerning the overall condition of the line, messages and symbols such as carryover of asphalt, snow plow damage, uneven distribution of beads, etc. • Average of the readings for each test segment with one standard deviation calculated. • Average of the readings for each message and symbol type. Correction of Defects/Penalties l . All pavement markings not conforming to the requirements of the Contract shall be removed and replaced or otherwise repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Removal of unacceptable work shall be accomplished with suitable blasting or grinding equipment unless other means are authorized by the Engineer: 2. Where yield computations show a deficiency in material usage of not more than 20 percent, Mn/DOT may require satisfactory repair or may accept the work at a reduced unit price which is in direct proportion to the percent of the deficiency. Where the deficiency in material usage exceeds 20%, Mn/DOT may require removal and replacement to the satisfaction of the Engineer unless other means are approved by the Engineer. 3. If the Engineer requires removal and replacement, the contractor shall remove (by an approved process) at least 90% of the deficient line, with no excessive scarring of the existing pavement. The removal width shall be one inch wider all around the nominal width of the pavement marking to be removed. t 1 u t n U Page 8 of l0 t f fl i [1 n 1 1 ~~ March 1, 1999 METRIC (ENGLISH) 4. Where initial retroreflectivity falls below the minimum acceptable levels but not more than 20%, the Engineer may require satisfactory repair or may accept the work at a reduced unit price which is in direct proportion to the percent of the deficiency. Where the deficiency in retroreflectivity exceeds 20%, i.e., less than 240 mcd/m2/lux for white and ] 60 mcd/mz/lux for yellow, the Engineer may require the removal and replacement to the satisfaction of the Engineer unless.other means are approved by the Engineer.. Where minimum levels after one winter fall below the specified levels (170 mcd/mz/lux - 135 mcd/m2/lux), Mn/DOT will notify the project contractor and manufacturer(s) of the failure. If the initial readings were above Mn/DOT's specified initial minimum levels (300 mcd/mZ/lux - 200 mcd/m211ux), the Engineer, contractor, and manufacturer(s) of the materials} shall review the project together. Based on the review an of all known aspects, the Engineer will make a determination as to why the job failed and notify the Contractor, pavement marking contractor, and/or manufacturer(s) in writing. 5. If this process has to be repeated on several projects with either the same contractor and/or manufacturer(s), Mn/DOT will take corrective action. This corrective action will be a two step process: Step l Pavement marking contractor/manufacturer(s) will be considered not approved for Mn/DOT projects, except to bring workmanship/product back into compliance. Step 2 U the first step cannot be attained, pavement marking contractor/ manufacturer(s) will not be allowed to participate in Mn/DOT projects and/or be removed from Approved Product List. 10.0 DOCUMENTATION Contractors applying epoxy pavement markings for Mn/DOT under a contract are required to fill out the attached "Construction Striper Operations Daily Log" form. These forms shall be completed at the end of each project and faxed to the "Reflective Systems Unit" at (6l2) 797-3181 Attn: Jim Carlson. Failure to submit completed forms may result in 10% of the overall contract price for epoxy pavement markings held back. Also, if forms are not sent in to the reflective systems unit in a timely manner projects will not be inspected during optimum times for meeting their performance criteria. Any questions regarding this form can be answered by calling the Reflective Systems Unit at (612} 797-3183. Page 9 of 10 March l , l 999 METRIC (ENGLISH) Construction Striper Operations Daily Log D~tt~_' __.__e_..~ _.° 5P Number ~ Coritrackoi~'" ~ Recotd ', 0_ " of Q . E~uiK~rrr~rtr~m~~ers ~tt~tenal; Suppliar ~ ' .Lr~t hto. .~ fnspa~ ~~upTM ``Re,, Hrs C T H s ~#n er Het Co~ _ ...... ~ ~ , Memo ke TiafFicl ~~ . . __ Traffic 2. ,L ~ ;~jy~1 yr. ~~ .W. v ~~ , DeFaulk Aux Urnk ~~ ~~~~~} 1-'~l~ „r,:_. _ ,-. _ JLI .Save. __~ ~,_ .. _~R - - - ~_; `.Matenz~l s - ~ • ~ ~ _ - ~ ~ Undo.. ~I 8,~ ~ Down ~~__ ~~ (~ ~ ~~>~~ Exrt toad Beads Pounds Segment '`qf Lt~; County= ~ Gt ~- District ~- y- ~~ ~ - .. . R S Hw,y Begrn Ref_Fnk End _f~ef Pnt Int seek .Ink cht~ Material C Tram Timc Equip Drlip ',wthr Dc~,-sy __._ 1~fork Tppes A White Edge B: Yellow Edge C: White Skip D: Sr'ellow CtL E= f2" White Gore F_ B" Yellow [lore G- Messages H. 51op Bars l: Coss walk M: Qlher Work ha: Orly Interseckionsllnterrhanges Page 10 of 10 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 SPECIFICATION FOR PREFORMED REMOVABLE RETROREFLECTIVE PAVEMENT MARKINGS USED IN CONSTRUCTION WORK ZONES January 1995 General Description This work shall consist of furnishing, installing, removing or obliterating pavement markings in construction work zones in accordance with this provision and in reasonably close. conformity with the dimensions and lines shown on the plans or established by the Engineer. ~' Materials -General The preformed markings shall consist of white or yellow retroreflective film, on a conformable backing. The size, quality, and refractive index of the glass beads shall be such that the performance requirements for the markings shall be met. The pigments shall be selected and blended to provide pavement markings which are The markings shall be precoated with a pressure sensitive adhesive and shall be capable of being adhered to asphalt concrete or Portland cement concrete at temperatures as low as 50°F and in accordance with the •manufacture's instructions without the use of heat, solvents or other adhesive means, and shall be immediately ready for traffic after application. white or yellow, conforming to standard highway colors. Preformed words and symbols shall conform to the applicable shapes and sizes as outlined in the current "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways". When stored in a cool dry area indoors, the materials shall be suitable for use for one -year after the~date of purchase. Classification The removable retroreflective striping tape must be designed and constructed in such a manner that it can be readily removed when the markings are no longer applicable. The tape shall be capable of performing for the duration of a normal construction season and shall then be capable of being removed intact or in large pieces either manually or with a recommended roll-up device. Requirements Composition: The removable, preformed, retroreflective pavement markings shall consists of glass beads embedded in a white or yellow film with a thin, flexible, conformable backing which is precoated with a pressure sensitive adhesive. A structured 1 interlaced medium shall be incorporated to facilitate removal. Reflectance: The white and yellow films shall have the following initial minimum reflectance values at 0.2° and 0.5° observation angles and 86.0° entrance angle as measured in accordance with the testing procedure of ASTM D-4061. The photometric quantity to be measured shall be specific luminance (SL), and shall be expressed as millicandelas per square foot per foot candle (mcdxft- )xfc- ). The metric equivalent shall be expressed as millicandelas per square meter per lux. The test distance shall be 50 ft. (15m) and the sample size shall be a 2.0 x 2.5 ft. rectangle (0.61 m x 0.76m). The angular aperture of both the photoreceptor and light projector shall be 6 minutes of ~ arc. The reference center shall be the geometric center of the sample, and the reference ' axis shall be taken perpendicular to the test sample. WHITE YELLOW Entrance Angle 86.0° 86.0° 86.5° 88.8° 86.0° 86.0° 86.5° 88.8° Observation Angle 0.2° 0.5° 1.0° 1.05° 0.2° 0.5° 1.0° 1.05° Specific Luminance 1770 1270 .750 500 1310 810 450 300 SL mcd"ft~~ *fc'] Adhesion: The manufacturer shall be required to demonstrate that the properly applied pavement marking adheres to the roadway under climatic and traffic conditions normally encountered in the construction work zone. Removability: The marking film shall be removable from asphalt concrete and portland cement concrete intact or in large pieces, either manually or with aroll-up device, at temperatures above 40°F without the use of heat, solvents, grinding or blasting. Skid Resistance: The surface of the markings provides an initial minimum skid resistance value of 50 BPN when tested according to ASTM E303-74. Installation Pavement markings in construction work zones shall be placed in accordance with the following provisions: At the end of each day's work, pavement markin s shall be in lace on each avin 9 P p g hft that is open to normal traffic flow. Materials requiring removal shall be as specified above, and marking configurations shall be in accordance with the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices. The pavement markings shall be maintained and replaced by the Contractor without additional compensation until they have served their purpose, at which time the contractor s [~ 1 r 1 r 1 will be required to remove them. Pavement markings .shall be applied to clean, dry surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions or a method approved by the Engineer. Method of Measurement Linear pavement markings will be measured in linear feet complete-in-place for the width specified. Work and symbol markings will be measured in units of each or in square feet complete- in-place. Removal or obliteration of pavement markings in construction work .zones wil( not be measured for payment, but shall be considered incidental to the work. Basis of Payment Retroreflective preformed pavement markings will be paid for at the contract unit price, which price shall be full compensation for cleaning and preparing the pavement surface, for furnishing and placing all materials, and for all materials, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment will be made under: Pay Item Pavement Markings, linear (width} Pay Unit Linear Foot Pavement Markings, words/symbols 3 Each or Square Foot {1 SPECIFICATION FOR DURABLE, RETROREFLECTIVE, PREFORMED, PATTERNED PAVEMENT MARKINGS WITH IMPROVED RETROREFLECTIVITY RETENTION December 1996 I. DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of furnishing and installing retroreflective preformed patterned pavement markings in accordance with this provision and in reasonably close conformance. to the dimensions and lines shown on the plans or established by the engineer. II. MATERIALS -GENERAL The preformed patterned markings shall consist of white or yellow films with clear and/or yellow-tinted microcrystalline ceramic beads incorporated to provide immediate and continuing retroreflection. These films shall be manufactured without the use of lead chromate pigments or other similar, lead-containing chemicals. '~ Preformed words and symbols shall conform to the applicable shapes and sizes as outlined in the "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways." The preformed markings shall be capable of being .adhered to asphaltic cement concrete and Portland cement concrete by apre-coated pressure sensitive adhesive. A surface preparation adhesive may be used to precondition the pavement surface. The preformed markings shall conform to pavement contours by the action of traffic. The pavement markings shall be capable of application on new, dense and open-graded asphalt concrete wearing courses during the paving operation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. After application, the markings shall be immediately ready for traffic. The bidder shall identify proper surface preparation adhesives (where necessary) to be applied at the time of application, all equipment necessary for proper application, and recommendations for application that will assure effective product performance. The preformed markings shall be suitable for use for one year after the date of receipt when stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 1 IV. CLASSIFICATION The markings shall be highly durable, retroreflective, pliant polymer materials designed for longitudinal and word/symbol markings subjected to high .traffic volumes and severe wear conditions such as shear action from crossover or encroachment on typical longitudinal configurations such as edge lines and lane lines. REQUIREMENTS Composition: The retroreflective pliant polymer pavement markings shall consist of a mixture of high-quality polymeric materials, pigments and glass beads distributed throughout its base cross-sectional area, with a reflective layer of microcrystalline ceramic beads bonded to a durable polyurethane topcoat surface. The patterned surface shall have approximately 50% + or - 15% of the surface area raised and presenting a near vertical face (f3 angle of 0° to 60°) to traffic from any direction. (See diagram below.) The channels between the raised areas shall be substantially free of exposed beads or particles. t Reflectance: The white and yellow markings shall have the following initial expected retroreflectance values as measured in accordance with the testing procedures of ASTM D4061. The photometric quantity to be measured shall be coefficient of retroreflected luminance (R~) and shall be expressed as millicandelas per square foot per foot-candle [(mcd ft-2) fc']. The metric equivalent shall be expressed as millicandelas per square meter per lux [(mcd • m2) • Ix']. The test distance shall be 50 feet (15 m). EXPECTED INITIAL REFLECTANCE White Yellow Entrance Angle 86.0° 86.5°" 88.8° 86.0° 86.5°* 88.8° Observation Angle 0.2° 1.0° 1.05° 0.2° 1.0° 1.05° Retroreflected Luminance 1100 700 500 800 500 300 R [ mcd • ff2 • fc'] ''These retroreflectance values are based on dark room photometric readings per 2 t 1 1 1 1 r L1 1 1 TESTING PROCEDURE FOR REFRACTIVE INDEX OF BEADS BY LIQUID IMMERSION I. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: A. Microscope (minimum 100X magnification) B. Light source -preferably sodium light or other monochromatic source, but not absolutely essential C. Refractive index liquids" D. Microscope slide and slide cover E. Mortar and pestle *Available from R.P. Cargille Laboratories, Inc., Cedar Grove, NJ. I1. PROCEDURE: A. Using the mortar and pestle, crush a few representative beads and place a few of these crushed particles on a microscope slide. B. Place a drop of a refractive index liquid, with an index as close to that of the glass as can be estimated, on the particles. C. Cover the slide with a microscope slide cover and view the crushed particles by transmitted light normal to the slide surface (illuminated from the bottom). ' D. Adjust the microscope mirror to allow a minimum light intensity for viewing. This is particularly important if sodium light is not used. E Bring a relatively flat and transparent particle into focus. F. By slightly raising and lowering the objective (microscope tube), look for one or both of the following: 1. Becke Line -This light line will appear to move either into the particle or away from it. In general, if the objective is raised, the line will move toward the material of higher refractive index; if the objective is lowered, the line will move toward the material of lower index. 4 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 2. Variation in Particle Brightness -When raising the object from a sharp focus, the particle will appear to get brighter or darker than the surrounding field. If it becomes brighter, the glass has a higher refractive index than the liquid. If it becomes darker, the glass has a lower refractive index than the liquid. In both cases, the opposite will be true if the object is lowered. G. This test can be used to confirm tha t the beads are above or below a specified index. It can also be used to give an accurate determination of the index (+ or - 0.001). This is done by using several refractive index liquids until a match or near match of indices occurs. The index of the glass will equal that of the liquid when no Becke line and no variation in bead brightness can be observed. The size and quality of the beads shall be such that the performance requirements for the retroreflective pliant polymer shall be met. ' Acid Resistance: The beads shall show resistance to corrosion of their surface after exposure to a 1 % solution (by weight) of sulfuric acid. The 1 % acid solution shall be made by adding 5.7cc of concentrated acid into 1000cc of distilled water. CAUTION: Always add the concentrated acid into the water, not the reverse. The test shall be performed as follows: Take a 1 " x 2" sample, adhere it to the bottom of a glass tray and place just enough acid solution to completely immerse the sample. Cover the tray with a piece of glass to prevent evaporation and allow the sample to be exposed for 24 hours under these conditions. Then decant the acid solution (do not rinse, touch or otherwise disturb the bead surfaces) and dry the sample while adhered to the glass tray in a 150° F. (66° C.) oven for approximately 15 minutes. Microscopic examination 20X shall show no ° ( ) more than 15 /° of the beads having a formation of a very distinct opaque white (corroded) layer on their entire surface. Color: The reformed markin s sh-all consist of w p g hite and yellow films with pigments selected and blended to conform to standard highway colors. Skid Resistance: The at p terned surface of the retroreflective pliant polymer shall provide an initial average skid resistance value of 45 BPN when tested according to ASTM E303 except values shall be taken in one direction and then at a 45° angle from that direction. These two values shall then be averaged to find the skid resistance of the .patterned surface. Patchability: The pavement marking material shall be capable of use for patching worn areas of the same type in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. i Thickness: The patterned material without adhesive shall have a minimum caliper of 0.065" (1.651 mm) at the thickest portion of the patterned cross-section and a minimum caliper of 0.02" (.508mm) at the thinnest portion of the cross-section. .065 in. .020 in 1 1 V. WARRANTY The manufacturer shall warrant that pavement marking material sold for this application in the United States and Canada will remain effective for its intended use under normal traffic conditions and meet the minimum retained coefficient of retroreflection value of 100 millicandelas per foot squared per foot-candle (measured at 1.0° observation and 86.5° entrance angles) subject to the following provisions: TABLE 1 APPLICATION* WARRANTY PERIOD Longitudinal Markings Words and S mbols 4 years 2 ears "Applications in mountainous, heavy- snowfall areas above 5,000 ft.(1500m) are not covered by this warranty. If the markings are applied in accordance with all the .manufacturer's application recommendations and fail during the warranty period to retain the minimum reflectance values, fail to adhere to the roadway, or fail due to complete -wear-through during the warran#y period .shown above (from the date of installation), the manufacturer's sole responsibility and purchaser's and user's exclusive remedy shall be: The manufacturer will. provide the replacement materials to restore the marking to its original effectiveness. Conditions Such failure must be solely the result of design or manufacturing defects in the pavement marking material and not of outside causes such as improper installation or substrate failure. Failure to follow recommended application procedures will void this warranty. 6 1 t Damage to pavement markings caused by snow removal equipment is not covered under this warranty. A visual night inspection must be made with a manufacturer's representative and a customer representative present to identify areas of the installation which appear to be below the minimum retained reflectance values of 100 millicandelas per foot squared per foot-candle. Areas which appear to be below the minimum retained reflectance value shall be identified as "zones of measurement." To qualify for material replacement, a "zone" must be at least 360 feet in road length and consist of either edge lines, center lines or lane lines, but not in combination, or a single word or symbol marking. Detailed reflectance measurement procedures are provided in the product bulletin provided by the manufacturer. VIII. INSTALLATION The markings shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Marking configurations shall be in accordance with the "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices." When markings are specified in the contract for newly paved asphalt concrete surfaces, they shall be applied before public traffic is allowed on the freshly paved surface. Preferably, the markings should be inlaid in the fresh surface ~~ during final rolling of the mat, but in any case they shall be applied before the close of the shift on the day which the surface is paved. These markings can also be overlaid on existing pavement surfaces. The manufacturer shall provide application equipment, manual or automatic, as necessary for the job requirements. These units shall be capable of applying an unlinered, pre-coated pressure sensitive adhesive pavement marking tape. The manual unit shall have a manually actuated tape advance system and a foot-operated cutting mechanism. The automatic unit shall have the capability of advancing, applying and cutting the pavement marking tape at specific pre-programmed lengths, at speeds up to 6.5 mph when towed by an appropriate vehicle. Additional su lemental pp equipment for manual application of required surface preparation adhesives or for manual tamping of the applied markings shall also be provided. This equipment shall be provided to the agency or its contractor representative at no cost for whatever period or number of occasions necessary to complete the work schedule. ~ , t IX. CONTRACT UNITS-AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT Linear pavement markings will be measured in linear feet complete-in-place for the width specified. Retroreflective preformed pavement markings will be paid for at the contract unit price, which shall be full compensation for cleaning and preparing the pavement surface, for furnishing and placing all materials, and for all materials, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment will be made under: Pay Item Preformed Pavement Marking, Linear (width) Preformed Pavement Marking, Words/Symbols Pay Unit Linear Foot Each 1 t t t 8 L DESCRIPTION July 1997 This work. shall consist of furnishing and installing retroreflective preformed pavement markings in accordance with this provision and in conformance to the dimensions and lines shown on the plans or established by the engineer. 11. MATERIALS -GENERAL i The preformed markings shall consist of white or yellow films with pigments selected to conform to standard highway colors. These films shall be manufactured without the use of lead-chromate pigments or other, similar, lead-containing chemicals. Glass beads shall be incorporated to provide immediate and continuing retroreflection. Ceramic skid particles shall be bonded to the top layer to provide a skid-resistant surface. Preformed word and symbol markings shall conform to the applicable shapes and sizes as outlined in the "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and _ Highways." The preformed markings shall be capable of being adhered to asphalt cement concrete (ACC) or Portland cement concrete (PCC) by apre-coated pressure sensitive adhesive. A surface preparation adhesive may be used to precondition the pavement surface. The preformed marking film shall mold itself to pavement contours by the action of traffic. The pavement marking films .shall be capable of overlay application on new, dense and open-graded asphalt concrete wearing courses in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Following proper application and tamping, the markings shall be immediately ready for traffic. The bidder, when bidding, shall identify the proper solvents and/or surface preparation adhesives (where necessary) to be applied at the time of application and all equipment necessary for proper application, and shall make recommendations for application that will assure effective product performance. The preformed markings shall be suitable for use for one year after the date of receipt when stored in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. III. CLASSIFICATION High durability, retroreflective preformed pavement marking film shall be used as transverse, channelizing and symbol/legend markings subjected to high-traffic. volumes and severe wear conditions such as repeated shear action from crossover or encroachment on channelization lines and stop, start or turn movements. r J IV. REQUIREMENTS Composition: The retroreflective pavement marking film shall consist of a mixture of high-quality polymeric materials, pigments and glass beads distributed throughout its base cross-sectional area. A reflective layer of glass beads and a layer of skid- resistant ceramic particles shall be bonded to the top urethane wear surface. The urethane wear surface shall have a nominal thickness of 0.005 inches (0.13mm). The film shall have apre-coated, shear-resistant, pressure sensitive adhesive. Color: The daytime color of the white film shall provide a minimum initial luminance factor, Y, of 80 and shall conform to the following chromaticity requirements: x = 0.290,- y = 0.315; x = 0.310, y = 0.295; x = 0.330, y = 0.360; x = 0.350, y = 0.340. The daytime color of the yellow film shall provide a initial luminance factor, Y, in a range of 36 to 59 and shall conform to the following chromaticity requirements: x = 0.474, y = 0.455; x = 0.491, y = 0.435; x = 0.512, y = 0.486; x = 0.536, y = 0.463. Measurements shall be made in accordance with ASTM E 1349, using illuminant "C" and 0/45 (45/0) geometry. Calculations shall be in accordance with ASTM E 308 for the 2° standard observer. Reflectance: The white and yellow films shall have the following initial minimum reflectance values as measured in accordance with the testing: procedures of ASTM D 4061. The photometric quantity to be measured shall be coefficient of retroreflected luminance (R~) and shall be expressed as millicandelas per square foot per foot-candle (mcd • ft-2) • fc'). The metric equivalent shall be expressed as millicandelas per square meter per lux (mcd • m~2) • Ix'). White ~ Yellow Entrance Angle Observation Angle Retroreflected Luminance R~ [(mcd • ff2) • fc'] 86.0° 86.0° 86.5° 88.8° 0.2° 0.5° 1.0° 1.05° 700 500 400 250 86.0° 86.0° 86.5° 88.8° 0.2° 0.5° 1.0° 1.05° ~ 410 250 1.57 .120 Skid Resistance: The surface of the retroreflective films shall provide an initial minimum skid resistance values of 55 BPN as measured by the British Portable Skid Tester in accordance with ASTM E303. i~ L! 1 t 1 1 2 Retained Skid Resistance: The surface of the retroreflective film shall retain an average skid resistance value of 45 BPN, when tested in accordance with ASTM E303, for a period of one year when installed in non-snow removal areas. The 45 BPN minimum value shall be an average of several readings taken in both the wheel track and non-wheel track areas. Patchability: The pavement marking materials shall be capable of use for patching wom areas of the same type in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Tensile Strength and Elongation: The film shall have a minimum tensile strength of 150 pounds per square inch (28 kgs/cm2) of cross-section when measured in the direction of the length of the roll and tested according to ASTM D638-76, except that a sample 6" x 1" (2.54 cm x 15-.24 cm) shall be tested at_ a temperature between 70°F and 80°F (21 °C and 26°C) using a jaw speed of 10 to 12 inches (25.4 cm to 30.5 cm) per minute. The sample shall have a maximum elongation of 50% at break when tested by this method. Reflectivity Retention: To have a good, effective performance life, the glass beads must be strongly bonded and not be easil remo d b t ffi Th y ve y ra c wear. e following test shall. be employed to measure reflectivity retention: Taber Abraser Simulation Test Using a Taber Abraser with an H-18 wheel and a 125 gram load, the sample shall be inspected at 200 cycles, under a microscope, to observe the extent and type of bead failure. N h n o more t a 15% of the beads shall be lost due to 0 out and the p P predominate mode of failure shall be "wear down" of the beads. Gl B d ass ea s: The size, quality and refractive index of the glass beads shall be such that the performance requirements for the markings shall be met. The bead adhesion shall be such that beads are not easily removed when the material surface is scratched. Glass Bead Retention: The films shall have glass bead retention qualities such that when a 2" x 6" sample is bent over a 1/2" .diameter-mandrel, with the 2" dimension perpendicular to the mandrel axis, microscopic examination of the area on the mandrel shall show no more than 10% of the beads with entrapment by the binder of less than 40%. Thickness: The film, without adhesive, shall have a minimum thickness of 0.060 in. (1.52mm). t V. WARRANTY The manufacturer shall warrant that pavement marking material sold for applications in the United States and Canada will remain effective for its intended use under normal traffic conditions and meet the stated minimum value for skid resistance subject to the following provisions: TABLE 1 WARRANTY PERIOD Snow Removal Areas Non-Snow Removal Areas APPLICATION Road presence and non wear-through Road presence and non wear-through Legends, Symbols and Channelizin Markin s New As halt Inla 2 ears 2 ears As halt Overla 1 ear 2 ears New Concrete Overla 1 Year 2 Years Stop Bars, Crosswalks and Gore Markings with ADT/Lane of 6,000 or Less New As halt Inla 1 Year 2 ears As halt Overla --- 1 ear New Concrete Overla --- 1 ear If the pavement markings are applied in accordance with application procedures and guidelines (refer to 3M Road Surface and Climate Guides) provided by the manufacturer (which will be furnished to the applier upon request) and fail to retain the minimum skid resistance value, fail to adhere to the roadway or fail due to complete wear-through during the warranty period shown above (from the date of installation), the manufacturer's sole responsibility and purchaser's and user's exclusive remedy shall be: The manufacturer will provide replacement materials to restore the marking to its original effectiveness. 4 1 1 t [l 1 General Conditions Such- failure must be solely the result of defects in the pavement marking material .and not of outside causes such as improper installation or road surface failure. Failure to follow recommended application procedures and guidelines (refer to 3M Road Surface and Climate Guides) will void this warranty. Damage to pavement markin s caused b snow removal g y equipment ~s not covered under this warranty. Re lacement markin swill p g carry the unexpired warranty of the marking it replaces. Claims made under this warranty will be honored only if the .customer has maintained an accurate record of the dates of .material installation, which constitutes the start of the warranty period. Claims made under this warranty will be honored only if the manufacturer is notified of a failure within a reasonable time, reasonable information requested by the manufacturer is provided, and the manufacturer is permitted to verify the cause of the failure. Limitation Of Liability 3M's liability under this warranty is limited to replacement as stated herein, and 3M assumes no liability. for any incidental or consequential damages, such. as lost profits, business or revenues in any way related to the product regardless of the legal theory on which the claim is based. This warranty is made in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including but- not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, and any implied warranty arising out of a course of dealing or of performance, .custom or usage of trade. VI. INSTALLATION The markings shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Marking configurations shall be in accordance with the "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices." VII. CONTRACT UNITS AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT Lon itudi g nal pavement markings will be measured m linear feet complete-in-place for the width specified. Symbol/legend markings will be measured in units of each or in square feet. complete-in-place. March 16, 1998 METRIC (ENGLISH) APPLICATION SPECIFICATION CONVENTIONAL PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIALS 3 MINUTE DRY ALKYD AND HIGH SOLIDS LATEX Values stated in the International S stem of Units SI a I Y pp y only to projects to be constructed in Metric units of measure. Values stated in inch-pound units (in parenthesis) apply only to projects to be constructed in English units of measure. Materials The traffic marking paint shall be yellow or white in color and shall conform to the attached Mn/DOT Specification. ALL MATERIALS shall be free of lead, cadmium mercury hexavelent chromium and other toxic heave metals as defined by the United States Environmental Protection A enc . The material shall be marked as follows: 1. Manufacturer's Name 4. Color of Material 2 Place of Manufacture 5. Batch Number 3. Date of Manufacture Only material manufactured by a Mn/DOT approved manufacturer will be allowed for use on Mn/DOT projects. The following manufacturers are approved to supply material: _ Beads Quality Paint. Potters, Inc. Vogel Paints, Inc. Linear Dynamics, Inc. Centerline Industries, Inc. Sherwin Williams, Inc. A sample from each batch shall be submitted to the Mn/DOT Laboratory for inspection and testing at least 15 days prior to use in the field. ~, Equipment Application equipment for permanent markings shall consist of a machine of the spray type capable of applying the material under pressure at a controlled temperature through. nozzles equipped with remotely ~` controlled cutoff mechanisms and suitable line guides that will produce Page 1 of 6 TR 1669. r 1 March 1 b, 1998 METRIC (ENGLISH) ~ clean cut lines and prevent excessive material drill. The marking material ~ shall be applied with truck-mounted traveling units properly equipped to apply the paint stripes as required. Where two or more lines are to be applied closely spaced, the machine shall be equipped to apply those stripes simultaneously. For application of broken lines, the spray unit shall include an automatic feed control device capable of being set to produce the specified stripe to gap ratio. The truck equipment shall be capable of accumulating the length applied by each gun individually ~; each day. Only material application shall activate the length accumulators. The read out shall be digital and not externally adjustable. Vehicles in the striper train shall be deployed and equipped with traffic control devices as set forth in the "Field Manual" of the Minnesota Manua/ ; on Uniform Traffic Control Devices. Additionally, the shadow vehicle- shall ~ be equipped with atruck-mounted attenuator on high speed (SPEED LIMIT 65 kmph (40 mph) and greater), high volume (ADT 1500 and greater) highways. The equipment shall also be capable of applying glass beads by a pressurized system. All guns on the spray carriage shall be in full view of the operators during the spraying operation. Application The Engineer will place necessary "spotting" at appropriate points to provide horizontal control for longitudinal striping, determine starting and cutoff points and provide inspection of all work. Broken line intervals will not be marked. The Contractor shall cooperate with inspection personnel and take appropriate actions to assure quality pavement marking installations. Pavement markings shall only be applied when the air temperature is at least 10 C (50 F) unless the manufacturer, in writing, authorizes a lower temperature. Markings shall not be applied when the wind or other conditions cause a film of dust to be deposited on the pavement surface affer cleaning and before the marking material can be applied. No striping operations will be permitted between sundown and sunrise without written permission from the Engineer. ~~ At the time of applying the marking material, the application area shall be free of contamination. The contractor shall clean the roadway surface prior to the line application in a manner and to the extent required by the Engineer. Page 2 of b TR1669.r1 ~_ March 1 b, 1998 METRIC (ENGLISH} The filling of tanks, pouring of materials or cleaning of equipment shall not be performed on unprotected pavement surfaces unless adequate provisions are made to prevent spillage of the material. Waste material, spent solvents and cleaning materials shall be properly stored and disposed of in accordance with all federal, state and local laws, regulations and ordinances. Glass beads shall be applied immediately after application of a paint line at a rate of 960 g/L (8 lbs./gal.). Beads shall be evenly distributed on pavement. All material shall be placed in a workmanlike manner, which shall result in a clearly defined line that has been adequately reflectorized with glass beads. All pavement striping shall be 100 mm (4 in.) wide, unless otherwise specified, and broken line shall be in lengths of 2 m (6.56 ff.) separated by a gap of 8 m (26.25 ff.) fora 10 m (32.81 ff.) cycle length. All pavement striping shall be a minimum of 380 m thick (wet thickness) and the thickness shall be uniform across the width of the line. A tolerance of 6 mm (/a in.) over or under the specified width will be allowed for striping provided the variation is gradual and does not detract from the general appearance. Broken line segments may vary up to 75 mm (3 in.) from the specified lengths provided the over and under variations are reasonably compensatory. Alignment deviations from the control guides shall not exceed 50 mm (2 in.). Material shall not be placed over a longitudinal joint. Establishment of application tolerances shall not relieve the contractor of his responsibility to comply as closely as possible with the planned dimensions. Application for the marking material shall be such as to provide uniform film thickness throughout the coverage area. Stripe ends shall be clean cut and square, with a minimum of material beyond the cutoff. Acce tance Re'ection of Pavement Markin s ~~ Acceptance or rejection of pavement markings will be based on thickness and width of material placed as determined by field measurements and yield calculations. Visual observations will determine whether adhesion, chipping and color of the inplace pavement markings is acceptable. The minimum acceptable initial retroreflectivity, as determined in the attached METHOD OF MEASUREMENT FOR DETERMINING AVERAGE RETROREFLECTIVITY shall equal or exceed 275 mcd/m2/lux for white and 180 mcd/m2/lux for yellow material, respectively. Page3of6 TR 1669. r 1 March 16, 1998 METRIC (ENGLISH) All retrorefiectivity readings and data analysis will be provided by Mn/DOT at no cost to the Contractor. Mn/DOT reserves the right to: make daytime and/or nighttime visual inspections with or without the presence of the Contractor's representative, mainly to locate obvious or suspect areas of deficiency, determine retroreflectivity of symbols, legends and lines wider than 200 mm (8 in.) using a portable unit only, and accept initial retroreflecfivity based on random sampling by color of all markings if computed averages exceed the specified minimum values. 1 1 1 Page 4 of 6 7R 1669. r 1 March 16, 1998 METRIC (ENGL{SH) Reduction in Payment A reduction in pay shall be made for reduced thickness, retroreflectivi and width. Thickness and retroreflectivity shall be computed by random . measuring. Thickness shall be computed by the following formula: Thickness (micrometers) = Liters x 0.001 meters3 x 10-3 ~, Length (meters) x Width (meters) Use 3.785 liters x gallons if paint is metered in gallons. Example: A 380 micrometers thick paint line requires a liter of material for every 25.8 m of 100 mm wide line. The equation in English units is: Thickness (inches) = Gallons x 231 cubic inches Length (inches) x Width (inches) And 1 mil = 0.001 of an inch. A 15 mil thick 4 inch wide line yields 320 feet per gallon. ,~ Correction of Defects All pavement markings not conforming to the requirements of the Contract shall be removed and replaced or otherwise repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Removal of unacceptable work shall be accomplished. with suitable blasting or grinding equipment unless other means are approved by the Engineer. Where yield computations show a deficiency in material usage of not more than 20 percent, the Engineer may require satisfactory repair or may accept the work at a reduced unit price which is in direct proportion to ~~ the percent of the deficiency. Where the deficiency in material usage '~ exceeds 20 percent, the Engineer may require removal and replacement or otherwise corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer. ;~ If the Engineer requires removal and replacement of a deficient line, message or symbol, the contractor shall remove, by an approved process, at least 90% of the marking material without excessive scarring the existing pavement. The removal width shall be approximately 25 mm (1 in.) wider all around the .deficient marking. ~' Page 5 of 6 TR1669.r1 March 16, 1998 METRIC (ENGLISH) Where initial reflectivity readings fall below the minimum acceptable levels by not more than 20%, the Engineer may require satisfactory repair or may accept the work at a reduced unit price which is in direct proportion to the percent of the deficiency. Where the deficiency in retroreflectivity exceeds 20 percent, i.e., less than 220 mcd/m2/lux for white and 145 mcd/m2/lux for yellow, the Engineer may require removal and replacement or otherwise corrected to his satisfaction. If this process has to be repeated on several projects with either the same Contractor, subcontractor and/or manufacturer(s), Mn/DOT will take corrective action. This corrective action will be a two step process: - Step 1 Pavement marking contractor/manufacturer(s}will be considered not approved for Mn/DOT projects, except to bring workmanship/product back into compliance. r~ Step 2 If the first step cannot be attained, the pavement marking contractor/manufacturer(s) will not be allowed to bid on Mn/DOT projects and/or will be removed from product lists. r t Page 6 of 6 ,~ TR 1659. r 1 ATTACHMENT .February 23, 1996 METRIC (ENGLISH) METHOD OF MEASUREMENT FOR DETERMINING AVERAGE RETROREFLECTIVITY Measurements shall be taken with either a portable or mobile retroreflectometer conforming to 30-meter geometry which is defined as: '~' the entrance angle (the angle between the illumination axis and the retroreflector axis) shall fall between 88.50 and 88.76 and the observation angle (the angle between the illumination axis and the observation axis) shall fall between 1.0 and 1.05 ;and, the co-viewing angle (the complement of the entrance angle) shall fall between 2.29 and 2.50 . The following methodology will be used to evaluate retroreflectivity performance of in-service longitudinal line pavement markings: LENGTH AND NUMBER OF TEST SEGMENT ° b S PER ROADWAY .PER LINE TYPE Length of Number of Test Length of Test Roadway Segments Segments 1.5 km (1 mi.) 1 300 m (0.2 mi.) Greater than 1 per 1.5 km (1 300 m (0.2 mi.) or mi.) 1.5 km (1 mi.) ° TEST SEGMENTS-- Areas of a roadwa chosen Y for measuring retroreflectivity of the line types. b ROADWAY--As used here, means that portion of a street or highway ordinarily used for vehicular traffic. In the event a street or highway includes two or more separate roadways, the term roadway shall refer to each roadway separately. ,~ LINE TYPE-- Longitudinal lines of the same color and function. For example, white. and yellow edge lines are each a line type. Measurements in Test Se ments PORTABLE RETROREFLECTOMETER 1. Take a minimum of 10 readings in each test segment per line type. 2. On broken lines (skip striping), take no more than two readings per stripe, with readings 0.5 m (20 in.) from ends of .marking. 3. For solid lines, divide test segment into ten areas of 30 m (100 ff.); space readings a minimum of 10 m (32.81 ff.) and a maximum of 30 m (100 ff.) apart. 4. For 10 percent of each message type, take 5 readings on each message line; for 10 percent of each symbol type, take 5 readings on each symbol. Page 7 of 6 ~' TR1669.r1 ~~ .ATTACHMENT February 23, 1996 METRIC (ENGLISH MOBI LE RETROREFLECTOMETER 1. Calibration of the instrurents shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Retroreflectivity shall be measured at a minimum rate of 10 percent of each roadway length by line type. 3. Should another mobile unit be available, the maximum acceptable deviation for measurements made by the two different instruments of the same manufacturer and for the same roadway length shall be ± 10%. 4. Repeatability for the given mobile unit shall be ± 6%. 5. Upon completion of the evaluation, regardless of the results, additional test segments may be ordered by the Engineer. MISC ELLANEOUS CONTROLS 1. Take measurements on a dry, clean roadway. 2. Collect data in direction of traffic flow. 3. Measurement. units are mcd/mZ/lux. 4. Wait at least two (2) weeks from date of placement of the markings before taking initial readings. ~~ 5. Randomly select test segments unless night reviews or other knowledge supersedes a random selection process. 6. The Engineer may request additional readings or test segments. 7. 8 Measure each line type separately. I th t LASE . n e even RLUX is not available, the Engineer may require the use of the portable retroreflectometer or establish an alternative evaluation plan. Contents of Retroreflectivity Report The R eport shall consist of: State Project number. Trunk Highway number. Test date. Geographical location of the test site(s), including distance from the nearest permanent site identification; such as a reference point. Identification of the pavement marking material tested: type, color, age, and transverse location on the road. Identification of the retroreflecfiometer. Remarks concerning the overall condition of the lines, messages and symbols such as carryover of asphalt, uneven distribution of beads, etc. Average of the readings for each test segment with one standard deviation calculated. Average of the readings for each type of message and symbol. Page 9 of 6 ~` TR1669.r1 i January 16, 1998 MINNESOTA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION SPECIFICATION HIGH SOLIDS WATER BASED TRAFFIC PAINT I. SCOPE This specification covers fast-d white and ellow a rY y crylic latex traffic marking paints for use with drop-on-glass beads for application on concrete and bituminous pavements at spray temperatures of up to 160°F. When applied with glass beads at pavement temperatures above 50°F and at relative humidities of up to 75 percent, the paint shall dry to a no-track condition within 3 minutes. The paints shall be free of lead mercury cadmium hexavalent chromium or any other toxic heavy metals This paint is intended for use with dual coated drop-on glass beads, having both a silicone moisture resistance coating and a silane adherence coating. Glass beads are to be applied at a rate of eight pounds per gallon. II. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ~~ A. Quality The paint shall be formulated from first- rade materials and shall be suitable i 9 n all respects for application at elevated spray temperatures with drop-on glass beads using conventional traffic striping equipment. The finished paint shall be smooth and homogeneous, free of coarse particles, skins or any ~~ other foreign materials that are detrimental to its application or appearance. B. Package Stability Within a eriod of twelve mon p the from the time of delivery, the paint shall not cake, settle, liver, thicken, skin, curdle, gel or show any other objectionable properties which cannot readily ,~ be corrected with minimal stirring. Any paint with properties that make it unsuitable for use within the specified twelve months shall be returned to the supplier for credit. It shall be the manufacturers responsibility to add sufficient anti-settling agents, stabilizers and other additives to insure proper storage stability. ~- n i Mn/DOT High Solids Water Based Traffic Paint C. Manufacturing and Packaging January 16, 1998 Manufacturer shall be capable of producing paint in batches of 1,000 gallons or larger. The paint shall be screened with a 40 mesh or finer screen to remove any coarse particles, skins or foreign material The paint shall be acka ed in lined new 55 anon r P g g o 5 gallon containers as specified. To prevent formation of "skins", the manufacturer shall use a "float" of ammonia water on the paint surface, or a "floating type" plastic liner on the top of the filled container, or some other means that will effectively prevent skinning. Drums shall be Full Removable-Head Universal meeting the requirements of DOT-17H; covers shall have one 2-inch and one 3/4 inch fitting. Each container shall be marked with the manufacturer's name, type of paint, batch number, date of manufacture, gross weight and container weight. '~ III. SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS Properties of the finished paint. The exact composition of the paints shall be left to the discretion of the manufacturer, provided . the finished paint meets the requirements of this specification. The vehicle shall be composed of a 100% acrylic polymer such as Rohm and Haas E-2706, or an approved equal Wgt per gal, 77°F, IiJS, min 12.0 Viscosity, Krebs Stormer, 77°F, K.U. 80 - 100 Grind, Hegman, minimum 3 Total Solids, % by weight, minimum 73 Non-volatile vehicle, % by weight, minimum 43 Pigment, % by weight 45 - 62 >~ Titanium Dioxide, white paint, Ibs/gal, minimum 1.0 Dry Time,12 mil wet film, @ 65% RH, minutes, max 12 Dry Through, @ 90 % RH, minutes, max 130 Daylight Directional Reflectance, white, minimum 83 Daylight Directional Reflectance, yellow, minimum 50 Contrast Ratio, minimum O.gg Bleeding Ratio, minimum 0,97 1 Mn/DOT High Solids Water Based Traffic Paint ~~ Flexibility and Adhesion Water Resistance ~' .Settling Skinning, 48 hrs Track Free Time, minutes, maximum !~ pH, minimum Lab Retro-reflectivity, white, minimum, mcd/m2/lux Lab Retro-reflectivity, yellow, minimum, mcd/m2/lux Field Retro-reflectivity, white, minimum, mcd/m2/lux Field Retro-reflectivity, yellow, minimum, mcd/m2/lux January 16, 1998 No cracking or flaking No blistering or loss of adhesion Rating of 6 or better None 3 9.6 300 200 275 180 Organic Yellow Pigment. The prime pigment in the organic yellow paint-shall be Colour Index Pigment Yellow Number 65 or Number 75. Color. The color of the dry white paint shall be a pure flat white, free of tint. .The color of the yellow paint shall closely match Color Number 33538 of Federal Standard 595 and shall conform to the following CIE Chromaticity limits using illuminant "C" x 10.470 10.485 10.520 10.480 y l 0.440 10.460 10.450 10.420 Heavy Metals. The white and organic yellow paints shall be free of lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chromium and other toxic heavy metals as defined by the United States Environmental Protection Agency. IV . TESTING Weight Per Gallon ASTM D 1475 _ Viscosity ASTM D 562 Fineness Of Grind ASTM D 1210 Total Solids ASTM D 2369 Total Pigment ASTM D 2371 Titanium Dioxide ASTM D 4563 ; D 1394 Dry Time(12 mils wet) ASTM D 711 (modified) Daylight Directional Reflectance ASTM D 2805 Contrast Ratio(15 mils wet) ASTM D 2805 ' Bleeding Ratio Federal Specification TT-P-85 Color ASTM D 2805 PH Retro-reflectivit ASTM E 70 M y n/DOT Method t Mn/DOT High Solids Water Based Traffic Paint January 16, 1998 `~ Flexibility and Adhesion. Appl 15 mil wet film thickness to 3" by 5" tin panel. Dry at 77°F for ,~ 24 hrs followed by 2 hrs at 122 F. When bent over a 1/2" mandrel the paint shall adhere firmly without evidence of cracking or flaking. Water Resistance. Apply 15 mil wet film thickness to 4" by 8" glass plates; dry at 77°F for 72 hrs. Immerse in distilled water at 77°F for 24 hrs. Allow to air dry for 2 hrs on a flat surface. ~i Paint shall show no blistering or loss of adhesion. Skinning. After 72 hrs in a tightly sealed 3/4 filled container, the paint shall be free of lumps and skins when strained through a 100 mesh screen. Settling. A homogeneous sample of paint in a full one-pint friction-top can shall be inverted for one hour to insure a complete seal between the cover and body of the can. After one hour the can shall be placed upright in a 120°F oven. After 5 days the can shall be cooled to room temperature for 4 hours. When evaluated according ASTM D 869, the degree of settling shall have a rating of 6 or better. Track Free Time. When applied under the following conditions, the -ine shall show no visual `~ tracking when viewed from 50 feet after driving a passenger vehicle over the line at a speed of 25-35 mph. Fifteen mils wet film thickness. Eight pounds of glass beads per gallon of paint. Paint temperature at nozzle between 110 - 160° F. Pavement temperature of 50 to 120° F. Dry Time. Tested according to ASTM D 711, except wet film thickness shall be 12+1 mils. The applied film shall be immediately placed in an humidity chamber controlled at 65+3 R.H. and 72.5±2.5°F and with minimal air flow. Dry Through. The film shall be applied to anon-absorbent substrate at a wet film thickness of 12+1 mils and placed in a humidity chamber controlled at 90+5 % R.H. and 72.5+2.5°F. The dry through time shall be determined according. to ASTM D 1640, except that the pressure exerted shall be the minimum needed to maintain contact with .the thumb and film. Retro-reflectivity. The lab will draw three - 4 inch wide lines, with wet film thickness of 15+1 mils. Glass beads will be dropped on at a rate of 8 pounds per gallon. A total of 3 readings will be conducted on each sample with a 30 meter geometry LTL 2000. The average of those ~ 9 readings will be the retro-refectivity of the system {paint and beads). The Field studies will , be conducted using a 30 meter geometry Laserlux®. These studies will be conducted at random throughout the year. V. MANUFACTURERS CERTIFICATION P] ~; MNDOT High Solids Water Based Traffic Paint January 16, 1998 Manufacturer-shall submit certified test results with each batch of paint produced for use in Minnesota under this specification. Tests conducted on each batch shall include; weight per gallon, viscosity, and' drying time. Testing for all other parameters in this specification shall be carried out annually at the start of production. Certified test results shall be promptly submitted to the Mn/DOT Materials Laboratory at 1400 E. Gervais, Maplewood, Minnesota, 55109. VI. SAMPLING All paint manufactured under contract for Mn/DOT shall be inspected at the factory by Mn/DOT personnel or representatives at a frequency determined by Mn/DOT. When the place of manufacture is located outside the boundaries of the State of Minnesota, the manufacturer shall bear all costs of sampling and plant inspection. For paint ordered by private contractors for use on Minnesota painting contracts, the manufacturer shall submit aone-pint sample of each batch along with a letter certifying the sample represents the full manufactured batch. The department reserves the right to base acceptance upon samples taken at the point of delivery or from a contractors supply. Sample size shall be one pint. r 1 e ' I. SCOPE 0 January 16, 1998 MINNESOTA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION SPECIFICATION DROP-ON GLASS BEADS This specification covers treated glass beads for reflectorizing traffic marking paint. II. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Beads for use with solvent-based paints will have a "dry flow" type surface treatment. Beads for use with water-based paints will have a dual surface. treatment consisting of a moisture resistant silicone treatment, and a silane adherence surface treatment. Beads for use with epoxy paints will have a moisture resistant silicone surface treatment. ' The beads will be made from clean colorless transparent glass. They will be smooth, spherically shaped, and free from milkiness, pits, excessive air bubbles, chips and foreign material. .The beads will be suitable for application using conventional striping equipment, and will produce a retro-reflectorized line when viewed at night with automobile headlights. III. SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS ' The glass beads will meet the requirements of AASHTO M 247 Type 1 "standard gradation" except the beads will have a minimum of 80 percent true spheres. The dual treated beads will meet the moisture resistant requirements of AASHTO M ' 247 Section 4.4.2 and pass the adherence treatment Dansyl Chloride Test. The moisture resistant silicone treated beads will meet AASHTO M 247 Section 4.2.2. 0 Mn/DOT Glass Beads January 16,1998 IV. SAMPLING AND TESTING A. SAMPLING The beads will be sampled at the rate of one sample per 4,000 kg (10,000 ]bs) of beads. For beads shipped in 22 kg (50 lbs) bags a sample will consist of two bags selected at random and reduced to approximately one quart using a sample sputter. For bulk shipments, sampling will be by means of a perforated tube type "sampling thief." Three samples from each of three separate containers will be combined for one sample. B. TESTING Testing will be according to the requirements of AASHTO M 247. ,Adherence coating will be tested by the Dansyl Chloride Method on file at the Mn/DOT Materials Laboratory. Retroreflectivity will be determined by the Mn/DOT Method 1. 3 draw downs (]00 mm wide, 15 mil wet thickness) will be conducted in the lab for each color of paint. 2. Glass beads will be dropped on at a rate of 3.6 kg (8 lbs) per gallon. 3. 3 readings will be taken per draw down. 4. The average of those 9 readings will be the retroreflectivity of the system (paint and beads). Roundness will be determined by the Mn/DOT Method detailed below. Mn/DOT Method for Determining Roundness of Glass Beads 1. Reduce sample to 25 to 50 grams by means of a sample sputter. Weigh to the nearest 0.01 grams. 2. Split the reduced sample into two fractions using a 297 µm (No. 50) sieve. 3. To separate rounds from imperfects, a smooth, 30 mm by 45 mm (12 in by 18 in), inclined glass or aluminum plate is used. The plate is inclined at approximately 3 degrees for the +297 µm (+50) fraction and at approximately 10 degrees for the -297 µm (-50) fraction. ii Mn/DOT Glass Beads January 16,1998 Slowly apply part of the beads to the top of the plate. Tap the plate with a wooden pencil or brush to cause round beads to roll down the incline into a collecting pan. Brush the remaining beads into a separate collecting pan. Continue with small. applications .until the entire sample is processed. Repeat the process with beads that rolled off plate at least three times for the +297 µm (+50) fraction and at least four times for the -297 µm (-50) fraction. 4. Weigh the separated fractions of round beads and calculate percent rounds. V. PACKAGING Unless otherwise specified the beads will be packaged in moisture-proof multi-wall shipping bags. Each container will be marked with name and address of the manufacturer, type of moisture treatment, batch number and date of manufacture. The containers and contents will be delivered in a good, dry condition. Any beads not meeting the requirements of this specification or delivered in an unusable condition will be rejected. 3 ~. y ~u ~ dN " 3~° -a +~ E ~ o ~ Q o 3 V LL +~ C~ ° J N ~~ . - ~ ~' v ln~ _p c b (n N•+ N~ . (n N ~ _ Q~Q ~0 ~ ~`r ~~ N ' cV ~~ S ~ LL ~ ° ~ m ~- to ~ S ~ L ~ I- `* ' ~- ~ -6 ,~ a0 x ~ ~ ~ a L ~lQ ~rr ~L r N 0 ~ q0 ~,,, ao v. N 9 ENCLOSURE STTC 1-12-94 P. 1 OF 7 Z iI V Q N 1 N r{ I o O C ~ L 1 ~ t m p - N ~ .0 ~ f {~, d ~ uI m D £ m ~ ~: o ~ ~ c , m ~ 3 ~ ~ c ~ ~ y c Q "O C I c - m _ ~ v m ~ r ~ i ~ m c ~ ~ ~~ . ~ O ~ li) ~ ~ ~ m D ~ O ~~ ~ E m m .~ i v o .~ ~ ~! a v° o o L - ~ ~ . N ~ ~ ~ ~ z ~ ;, ~ C aS _ ~ m _ ~ C ~ . O ~ ~ ~ - lt. 3N L ~N d ~ L ~` ~ L -' ao -~ ~ N s r ~ ~ .....~~ r, ~ N w '' p '•~~ ~ ~~N ~ ~ ~~ ~ •~ to ~ -~.~ _ d CA ~ N ~ ~~ _ ~ ~-~- ~- (~ $ H ~~ N ~ J' W/ ~~ J O 2 J m d' 00 EI~CLOSURE STTC 1-12-94 p. 2 OF 7 GENERAL GUIDELINES. Minimum Minimum Number Lamp Minimum Type Minimum Size of Lamps Candlepower Legibility Distance A 24" x 48" 12 1 000 '/z Mile g 30" x 60" 13 7000 ~/a Mile C 4fl" x 96" 15 8800 1 Mile BOARD COLOR -Non-reflective black MINIMUM MOUNTING HEIGHT - 7 feet to the bottom of the panel except vehicle mounted boards may be 6 feet. OPERATION MODES - (1) Left Arrow (2) Right Arrow (3) Left and. Right Arrow (4) Caution (4 or more lamps which do not indicate any direction) DIMMING CAPABILITIES -Provision to reduce lamp voltage to 50 percent (± 5%) for night and reduced light operation. FLASHING RATE -Not less than 25 nor more than 4o times per minute. WHEN THE FLASHING ARROW BOARD IS LOCATED IN THE TRAF- FIC LANE ON HIGH SPEED STREETS OR HIGHWAYS, A BLACK ON ORANGE ARROW SIGN SHALL BE USED EXCEPT ON MOBILE OPER- ATIONS. >GENERAL USAGE Type A recommended for low-speed (0-35 mph) urban streets. Type Band/or C required for all high-speed (40 mph or greater) roadways. Arrow Mode shall be used only to designate lane closure. .)udgment should be txereised in selecting the "TYpe" of arrow board for the particular location and actual work situation. On divided highways. arrow boards Should be placed on the. roadway shoulder at the start of the taper or upstream of the- start of the taper rather than centered in the closed lanes in the middle of the taper. Where the shoulder is narrow the board may encroach on the traveled lanes down- stream of the start of the taper only to the extent necessary_ FIGURE 10 Flashing Arrow Boards 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ~. ENCLOSURE S'1'TC ~1,pTcs: 2-24=94 L Atl vehicles shop disptoy 2-360 P - 3 OP 7 oepree ftoshinp ligh7s or _ 5lrobes. Z. The odvonce worninp orrow j ' ponels shot) De type B or type C. i 3. The spocinp and loterot I ' position of the vehicles shat! be determined by the ~ field supervisor, pIRECTION OF TRAVEL J ~` V [ ' 1NI'If Z31V1 ] 1MiT7i URE I - _ - - Z 'L~! F- I C) ~ ~ I I J I -------- ---i-- -------.--~ C (; ~ « W C l~ c ' ~~ gyn. ~, ^~ ~ ,~ ~,.~ ..~.~ i ~ ~~ ~ - i ~ ~ w J ' _ ( U I----- I < J > o ~ I I~. z ' -= lxnl tin I ^ wsr -.axt J O J I C tI~TS _ _ -~ C YVfTN GRE FRONT FACING SIGNS ~ ~ ~ REAR FACING SIGNS • ~ Figure 2 -CENTERLINE - EDGELINE STRip[NG ' TWO OR THREE VEHICLE STRIPER Tri=SIN TWO-LANE TWO-WAY STREET OR HIGHWAY ---- -- - ENCLOSIIRE STTC NOTES: 2-24-94 ~ i 1. Ap vehicles shoe disploy 2-360 ~ P _ 4 OF 7 degree floshinq tights or strobes. ' 2. the odvonce worninp orrow poneis shot) be type B or ' type C. 3. the spocinp and ioterol position of the vehicles ~ , shop be determined by the fielC supervtsor. DIRECTION OF TRAVEL l ~' ~_ ~ -------- - -- - , - ~ -------I l J I o~ I I ~ ~ ~ i 1NIYJ L41N 1- I o i I ~ I < I ( J I i - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~ - - - - T - 1-' I I .~ I I 0?TIONt,L ., ~~ ~ ~ ARROW30ARD ~~ C M1ET rurrr ~- r~.ss ~ VYTS}{ WtE i I I ' I i u., J J----- ~ w z I ' ® ~ ? wfr r~cxr ~-- lxnd t~ ( J ri.ss O I I I ~ wrrx cv~ ! ~ - - - - - ~ c n r- S FRONT FACING SIGNS ~ I ~ u (~ RcAR FACING SIGNS Figure 5 -CENTERLINE -LANE LINE STRIPING TWO OR THREE VEHICLE STRIPER TRAIN , FOUR LANE UNDIVIDED STREET OR HIGHWAY ~n-OTES: !!. All vehlcles sno11 disploy 2-360 degree floshinq pghts or strobes. 2. .The odvonce wornlnq orrow ponels shop be type B or type C. 3. The spocinq and loterol ' position of the vehlcles shatlbe determined by the field supervisor. Z ~. O ,- - ~I 1Td~J 13/A Q----- ~. Z ~ u+n~ ~ ~ O L____ __. r RONT FACING SIGNS ~~ DIRECT ION OF TRAVEL ~' ~ ~,~ - ---I-- -~-- I ~I --- 1~ I I .. ~ . i I I I I #~ I I I I I I I i~ I V ~j V ENCLOSURE STTC 2-24-94 P. S OF 7 W J V r~ss ~~ O ' < ' W ` C W C C rvET r~stlT r- N !'+tiSS VYC[14 GRE i Lil J U W J t~ Z ~ wfr r~urrt J ~~ ~ YYi7}i C.-FtE C 1- REAR FACING SIGNS Figure 7 - LAftE LINE -EDGE LINE STRIPING TWO OR THREE VEHICLE STRIPER TRAIN FOUR LANE UNDIVIDED STREET OR HIGHWAY i{ 1 iJ t\OTES: 2. At- vehicles snots dispioy 2-360 degree floshinp 1lghts or strobes. 2. The advonce worninp arrow poneis sholl be type B or type C. 3. The spocinq and lotero! position of the vehicles sholl be determined by the field supervisor. 1 PRIMARY POSITION D I RECTION. OF TRA VEL I I I i ~~~ -+r-mss: r ` I i ! I ,,~. I i I I i t~~ I ~l~ I~I I I ~I~i~ ENCLOSURE STTC 2-24-94 P . 6 OF 7 PRIMARY ALTERNATE POSITION POSITION SIGNS SIGNS Z w~ riurrr w~ r~urrt ~ '^u C~~ I ~~ c 0 ALTcRNATE POSITION J V YYET /I1tKT WET -AtHT r~ss /~r,~ wrrx uxE ~°-"- REAR FACING SIGNS J r Figure 8 -LANE LINE STRIPING THREE VEHICLE STRIPER TRAIN MULTI-LANE DIVIDED STREET OR HIGHWAY ~~~ ~~ '~ ''~ i r M r i ENCLOSURE STTC NOT=S: 2-24-94 . i. An vehicles snort disDtoy 2-360 P • ~ OF ~ i degree ftoshtnp lights or strobes. 2. The odvonce worninp orrow~ ponels sholt be type B or '' type C. 3. The spoclnq and loterot °' position of the vehicles shoA be determined Dy the field supervisor. i iI 1 i DIRECTION OF TRAVEL - ~ ~-~ ' I PRIMARY ALTERNATE , POSITION POSITION SIGNS SIGNS t = -~ C r ~ ~ c f-----------~ C ~ I I N Z rvFT r,uM wET r,~rrr I O rtiss '~""~ 1- VKT}1 UftE ~ I I ° _ _ J ALTERNATE POSITION PRIMARY POSITION ~ _.~ w ~~ ~ _ ~ w I ~ rv~ ~r~mcr wEr~~r~vx~r Z riss C""'1/ ~ ~~ a ~ REAR- FACING SIGNS Figure 9 -LANE LINE -EDGE LINE STRIPING THREE VEHICLE STRIPER TRAW DIVIDED STREET OR HIGHWAY _ PRELIMINARY GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION PROPOSED NORTHWEST INDUSTRIAL PARK ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA GME PROJECT NO. 9535 t ~~ ~ t' t t, `' AEG ~ 1 ~~~ ~`~ S~;..~~ t;t : i~ ,: .~ ' ;~ 1 ZQ01 I _..____. _._-- --.------ .1 il, t.i ! ILii V. its P;i; - ='. GME CONSULTANTS, INC. MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA i 1 July 27, 2001 GliilE CONSULTANTS, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 14000 21st Ave. No. / Minneapolis, MN 55447 Phone (763) 559-1859 / Fax (763) 559-0720 Mr. Kevin Kawlewski Short Elliott Hendrickson, Inc. 10901 Red Circle Drive, Suite 200 Minnetonka, Minnesota 55343 GME Project No. 9535 RE: Preliminary geotechnical exploration for the proposed Northwest Industrial Park off County Road 19 in Albertville, Minnesota Dear Mr. Kawlewski: Following your acceptance of our. proposal of June 20, 2001, we have completed this geotechnical exploration. In this report we present the results of our field and laboratory testing, and our recommendations for feasible methods of foundation and earthwork design and construction. Since siting and structural design of the buildings have not yet been completed, this report is preliminary, and additional field exploration should be carried out as design development continues. This report is the instrument of service defined in our proposal.. We are submitting four copies of this report to you.. We have enjoyed working•with you on this phase of the development. If you have questions regarding this report, please contact us. Sincerel , , i I GME ~J T TS , INC . ~, 1 Wi 1 _ C. Kwasny, P.E. Pr~i cipal En ~ eer Pfres WCK:ms W:\wCK\9535.dtr.ms t WILLIAM C. KWASNY, PE. THOMAS P VENEMA, PE. GREGORY R. REUTER, PE., PG. BRYAN J. RIPP, PE., PG. MARK D. MILLSOP, RG. TIMOTHY F. McGLENNEN • An Equal Opportunity Employer TAMMY A. LANDERS, PE. WILLIAM E. BLOEMENDAL, PE. ERIN J. O'BRIEN, PE. TABLE OF CONTENTS PRELIMINARY GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION PROPOSED NORTHWEST INDUSTRIAL PARK ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA GME PROJECT NO. 9535 SECTION PAGE ASFE Notes Regarding Geotechnical Exploration Reports INTRODUCTION 1 SCOPE OF SERVICES 2 FIELD EXPLORATION 3 LABORATORY TESTING 4 SITE CONDITIONS 5 Topography/Surface Features 5 Soil Conditions 6 Groundwater Conditions 7 REVIEW AND RECOMMENDATIONS 8 Discussion 8 Site. Preparation 10 Foundation Design 12 Geopier Option 13 Floor Slab Subgrade 14 Exterior Underground.tJtilities 16 Exterior Entry Slabs and Sidewalks 16 Pavement Subgrade 17 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDEP,ATIONS 18 Groundwater 18 Equipment Selection/Soil Disturbance 19 Winter Construction 20 Construction Safety 21 Construction Testing 21 GENERAL QUALIFICATIONS 22 STANDARD OF CARE 23 APPENDIX GME CONSULTANTS, INC. i 1 1 1 1 1 'I GME CONSULTANTS, INC. ' IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REP RT ' As the client of a consulting geotechnical engineer, you should know that site subsurface conditions cause more construction problems than any other factor. ASFE/The Association of Engineering Firms Practicing in the Geosciences offers the following suggestions and observations to help you manage your risks. A Geotechnical Engineering Report Is Based On A Unique Set Of Project-Specific Factors Your geotechnical engineering report is based on a subsurface exploration plan designed to consider a unique set of project-specific factors. These factors typically include: the general nature of the structure involved, its size, and configuration; the location of the structure on tl~e site; other improvements, such as access roads, parking lots, and underground utilities; and the additional risk created by scope-of-service limitations imposed by the client. To help avoid costly problems, ask your geotechnical engineer to evaluate how factors that change subsequent to the date of the report may affect the report's recommendations. Unless your geotechnical engineer indicates otherwise, do not use your geotechnical engineering report • when the nature of the proposed structure is changed, for example, if an office building will be erected instead of a parking garage, or a refrigerated warehouse will be built instead of an unrefrigerated one; ' • when the size, elevation, or configuration of the proposed structure is altered; • when the location or orientation of the proposed structure is modified; • when there is a change of ownership; or • for application to an adjacent site. Geotechnical engineers cannot accept responsibility for problems that may occur if they are not consulted after factors considered in their report's development have changed. ' Subsurface Conditions Can Change A geotechnical engineering report based on conditions that existed at the time of subsurface exploration. Do not base construction decisions on a geotechnical engineering report whose adequacy may have been affected by time. Speak with your geotechnical consultant to learn if additional tests are advisable before construction starts. Note, too, that additional tests may be required when subsurface conditions are affected by construction operations at or adjacent to the site, or by natural events such as floods, earthquakes, or ground water fluctu- ations. Keep your geotechnical consultant apprised of any such events. Most Geotechnical Findings Are Professional Judgments Site exploration identifies actual subsurface conditions only at those points where samples are taken. The data were extrapolated by your geotechnical engineer who then applied judgment to render an opinion about overall subsurface conditions. The actual interface between materials may be far more gradual or abrupt than your report indicates. Actual conditions in areas not sampled may differ from those predicted in your report. While nothing can be done to prevent such situations, you and your geotechnical engineer can work together to help minimize their impact. Retaining your geotechnical engineer to observe construction can be particularly bene- ficial in this respect. A Report's Recommendations Can Only Be Preliminary The construction recommendations included in your geotechnical engineer's report are preliminary, because they must be based on the assumption that conditions revealed through selective exploratory sampling are indicative of actual conditions throughout a site. Because actual subsurface conditions can be discerned only ~ during earthwork, you should retain your geotechnical engineer to observe actual conditions and to finalize recommendations. Only the geotechnical engineer who prepared the report is fully familiar with the background information needed to determine whether or not the report's recommendations are valid and whether or not the contractor is abiding by applicable recommendations. The geotechnical engineer who developed your report cannot assume responsibility or liability for the adequacy of the report's recommendations if another party is ' retained to observe construction. Geotechnical Services Are Performed For Specific Purposes And Persons Consulting geotechnical engineers prepare reports to meet the specific needs of specific individuals. A report prepared for a civil engineer may not be adequate for a construction contractor or even another civil engineer. Unless indicated otherwise, your geotechnical engineer prepared your report expressly for you and expressly for purposes you indicated. No other than you should apply this report for its intended purpose without first conferring with the geotechnical engineer. No party should apply this report for any purpose other than that originally contemplated without first conferring with the geotechnical engineer. _ _ _ _ _ rnnc r_nnfsu~raiuTS ANC. Geoenvironmental Concerns Are Not At Issue Your geotechnical engineering report is not likely to relate any findings, conclusions, or recommendations about the potential for hazardous materials existing at the site.. The equipment, techniques, and personnel used to perform a geoenvironmental exploration differ substantially from those applied in geotechnical engineering. Contamination can create major risks. If you have no information about the potential for your site being contam- inated, you are advised to speak with your geotechnical consultant for information relating to geoenvironmental issues. A Geotechnical Engineering Report Is Subject To Misinterpretation Costly problems can occur when other design professionals develop their plans based on misinterpretations of a geotechnical engineering report. To help avoid misinterpretations, retain your geotechnical engineer to work with other project design professionals who- are affected by the geotechnical report. Have your geotechnical engineer explain report implications to design professionals affected by them, and then review those design professionals' plans and specifications to see how they have incorporated geotechnical factors. Although certain other design professionals may be familiar with geotechnical concerns, none knows as much about them as a competent geotechnical engineer. Boring Logs Should Not Be Separated From The Report Geotechnical engineers develop final boring logs based upon their interpretation of the field logs (assembled by site personnel) and laboratory evaluation of field samples. Geotechnical engineers customarily include only final boring logs in their reports_ Final boring logs should not under any circumstances be redrawn for inclusion in architectural or other design drawings, because drafters may commit errors or omissions in the transfer process. Although photographic reproduction eliminates this problem, it does nothing to minimize the possibility of contractors misinterpreting the logs during bid preparation. When this occurs, delays, disputes, and unantici- pated costs are the all-too-frequent result. To minimize the likelihood of boring log misinterpretation, give contractors ready access to the complete geotechnical engineering report prepared or authorized for their use. (If access is provided only to the report prepared-for you, you should advise contractors of the report's limitations, assuming that a contractor was not one of the specific persons for.whom the report was prepared and that developing construction cost estimates was not one of the specific purposes for which it was prepared. In other words, while a contractor may gain important knowledge from a report prepared for another party, the contractor would be well-advised to discuss the report with your geotechnical engineer and to perform the additional or alternative work that the contractor believes may be needed to obtain the data specifically appropriate for construction cost estimating purposes.) Some clients believe that it is unwise or unnecessary to give contractors access to their geotechnical engineer- ing reports because they hold the mistaken impression that simply disclaiming responsibility for the accuracy of subsurface information always insulates them from attendant liability. Providing the best available information to contractors helps prevent costly construction problems. It also helps reduce the adversarial attitudes that can aggravate problems to disproportionate scale. . Read Responsibility Clauses Closely Because geotechnical engineering is based extensively on judgment and opinion, it is far less exact than other design disciplines. This situation has resulted in wholly unwarranted claims being lodged against geotechnical engineers. To help prevent this problem, geotechnical engineers have developed a number of clauses for use in their contracts, reports, and other documents. Responsibility clauses are not exculpatory clauses designed to transfer geotechnical engineers' liabilities to other parties. Instead, they are definitive clauses that identify where geotechnical engineers' responsibilities begin and end. Their use helps all parties involved recognize their individual responsibilities and take appropriate action. Some of these definitive clauses are likely to appear in your geotechnical engineering report. Read them closely. Your geotechnical engineer will be pleased to give full and frank answers to any questions.' Rely On The Geotechnical Engineer For Additional Assistance Most ASFE-member consulting geotechnical engineering firms are familiar with a variety of techniques and approaches that can be used to help reduce risks for all parties to a construction project, from design through construction. Speak with your geotechnical engineer not only about geotechnical issues, but others as well, to learn about approaches that may be of genuine benefit. You may also wish to obtain certain ASFE publications. Contact a member of ASFE for a complimentary directory of ASFE publications. THE ASSOCIATION QF ENGINEERING FIRMS PRACTICING IN THE GEOSCIENCES 8811 COLESVILLE ROAD/SUITE G106/SILVER SPRING, MD 20910 TELEPHONE: (301) 565-2733 FACSIMILE: (301) 589-2017 rMCf`fl NC111TwwITC ~w~r t t it 1 L~ u NTRODUCTION I Short Elliott Hendrickson, Inc. (SEH) is preparing designs for the Northwest Industrial Park. The site of the park is located west of County Road 19 and north of the Outlet Mall, to the north of I-94, in Albertville, Minnesota. The site covers approximately 30 acres. Preliminary plans call for developing this. site into lots ranging from about 2 acres to 4.5 a cres in size. We anticipate the types of .buildings would be one to two-story industrial, manufacturing, and warehouse buildings. These would typically be steel frame structures with masonry bearing walls or precast concrete bearing walls, and floor slabs cast on-grade. Structural loads for buildings of these .types could range from 2 to 10 kips per lineal foot, with column loads from 50 to 200 kips. The finished floor elevatio ns of the buildings have not yet .been set. For typical industrial bu ildings, we estimate floor loads in the range of 200 to 500 pound s per square foot, probably with forklift traffic. Higher floor loads are possible for some warehouse GME CONSULTANTS, INC. - L Mr. Kevin Kawlewski 2 ~ July 27, 2001 GME Project No. 9535 applications. Depending on the tenants, it is also possible that dynamic loads could be imparted to the foundations or the floor slabs, such as impact, rotary, or vibratory loadings. A municipal street will be constructed through the Industrial Park in the east-west direction. Paved parking and drive areas will surround each building, and most of the buildings would probably have truck docks. The traffic pattern on the paved areas would probably consist of numerous daily passes of automobiles and light trucks (pick-ups and vans}, •along with daily passes of heavy vehicles, such as semi- tractor trailers of HS 20 and HS 25 loadings, and delivery trucks and waste collection trucks. Given the proximity to Interstate 94, there probably would be no seasonal limitations on the axle loads driven on the pavements, and maximum legal allowable axle load of 26,000 pounds would be permitted. OPE OF SERVICES The purposes of this report are to describe the soil and groundwater conditicns encountered in our subsurface exploration; to review and evaluate these conditions with respect to the proposed project; and to present recommendations for feasible methods of foundation and GME CONSULTANTS, INC. Mr. Kevin Kawlewski GME Project No. 9535 3 July 27, 2001 earthwork design and construction. Our scope of work was limited to the following elements. 1. Drill and sample nine borings to depths of 20 and 25 feet t 2. Perform routine laboratory testing on selected samples, visually/manually classify the soil samples, and prepare the boring logs 3. Prepare the preliminary geotechnical report FIELD EXPLORATION We drilled nine borings for this project, as shown on the enclosed Soil Boring Location Diagram. SEH specified the number, depths, and locations of tre borings, and an SEH survey crew staked the boring locations and shot the surface elevations in National Geodetic Vertical Datum (NGVD). We contacted Gopher State One Call before drilling to locate public underground utilities. We drilled the borings with a CME 550 all-terrain rig, using hollow stem augers to advance the boreholes and sampling by the split barrel method (ASTM: D 1586) with an automatic hammer. Our crew kept field logs noting the methods of drilling and sampling, along with the Standard Penetration values (N-values, "blows per foot"), preliminary soil classifications, and observed groundwater levels. Representative portions of the recovered soil samples were sealed in jars to reduce GME CONSIIITANTS_ INC Mr. Kevin Kawlewski 4 July 27, 2001 GME Project No. 9535 moisture Loss, and submitted to our laboratory for examination, testing and final classification by a Geotechnical Engineer. In borings 1 and 6, we obtained bulk samples of soil cuttings from the 2 to 10 foot depth. These samples were obtained for laboratory Standard Proctor tests. We backfilled all the boreholes with soil cuttings to comply with current Minnesota Department of Health regulations. LABORATORY TESTING The laboratory testing program caas initiated by a Geotechnical Engineer examining each of the recovered samples to determine the major and minor soil components, while also noting the color, degree of saturation, and lenses or seams found in the samples. The Engineer directed that selected samples be tested. for moisture content. and unconfined compressive strength (by hand penetrometer). The results of these tests are shown on the respective logs_ We also performed that two Standard Proctor tests (ASTM: D 698); the results of these tests are presented in the Appendix. f.MF f`f1N SIIIT~IUTC IN [' 1 1 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 Mr. Kevin Kawlewski 5 July 27, 2001 GME Project No. 9535 The Engineer visually/manually classified each sample on the. basis of texture and plasticity in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS). The capital letters in parentheses following the written soil descriptions on the boring logs are the estimated group symbols based on this system. A chart describing this classification system is included in the Appendix of this report. The Engineer grouped the soils by type into the strata shown on the boring lots. The stratification lines shown on the logs are approximate; in situ, the transition between soil types may be gradual or .abrupt in the horizontal or vertical directions. 4~de will retain the soil samples from this program for 60 days after the date of this report. If you wish to have the samples retained beyond this time, we ask that you please advise us; otherwise, the samples will be discarded. SITE CONDITIONS Topography/Surface Features The site covers approximately 30 acres, located north of I-94 and west of County Road 19, north of the Outlet Mall in Albertville, Minnesota. r~uernumurnoTC cur Mr. Kevin Kawlewski 6 July 27, 2001 GME Project No. 9535 At the time of our field exploration, part of the site was planted in corn, and there were several wetlands on the site. The topography was gently rolling; there was about 7 feet of elevation difference among our borings, but the topographic map indicates that there is possibly as much as 10 to 12 feet in elevation difference across the site. Soil Conditions The soil conditions we found in the borings are shown on the logs in the Appendix of this report. The conditions that we describe and discuss in this report are pertinent only at the boring locations and under the environment at the time of our field exploration. Ir. each of the borings, we encountered a topsoil layer. The topsoil varied from a mildly organic brown sandy silt with roots and trace. organics, to dark brown to black silty clay with roots and organics. The topsoil varied in thickness from about 1 foot to as thick as 4.4 feet at our borings, but it is probable that the topsoil° thickness varies significantly across the site; thus, the depth of topsoil in our borings should not be used to compute topsoil stripping thicknesses for site balancing or bidding purposes. r_~ucr-n ~u c~~~TewTC ~w~r Mr. Kevin Kawlewski 7 July 27, 2001 GME Project No. 9535 It is also possible that there is a "plow zone" below the topsoil, where through years of agricultural plowing, the topsoil has become mixed with the naturally-occurring non-organic near-surface soils. Underlying the topsoil (and the plow zone), we encountered interbedded strata of gray and brown silty clay, .sandy clay, silty sand, and clayey sand. Theses soils were not uniform from boring to boring. In some of the borings, the cohesive soils were stiff to-very stiff, with N-values of 6 to 10 and moisture contents of 15% to 25%, whereas in other borings, such as boring 3, the cohesive soils were soft, with N-values of 3 to 4 and moisture contents of 27% to 290. The granular soils were generally medium dense. for specific conditions on the site. Groundwater Conditions Please refer to the boring logs. We encountered groundwater while drilling only in boring 4 to a depth of 4.4 feet. In our opinion, this may represent a perched condition in which water infiltrating the surface is trapped in seams of more permeable soils above very stiff and relatively low permeability silty sandy clay. Mr. Kevin Kawlewski 8 GME Project No. 9535 July 27, 2001 It is our opinion that the groundwater table conditions on this site are complex. For the supplementary geotechnical exploration, we strongly recommend the installation of piezometers to allow long-term monitoring of the groundwater table. This would be especially true in areas where deep utility lines and/or basements are under consideration for the buildings. The groundwater tables, perched and hydrostatic, will vary in elevation seasonally and annually, depending on local amounts of precipitation, evaporation, surface runoff, and infiltration.- REVIEW AND RECOMMENDATIONS Discussion Based on our understanding of the project and the soil conditions that we have found in our preliminary borings, it is our opinion that after proper site preparation, the buildings can be supported - on conventional spread footing foundations. In portions of the site where stiff to very stiff cohesive soils or medium dense granular soils were encountered, the site preparation should include stripping of topsoil .and vegetation, densification of the exposed subgrade, and placement of new compacted fill to form building pads. In areas with GME CONSlli7e11175. INC Mr. Kevin Kawlewski 9 July 27, 2001 GME Project No. 9535 soil conditions such as those found in boring 3, conventional soil correction could be considered; we also recommend that you consider a special method of site preparation, by GeopiersT"". Geopiers are columns of highly compacted rock that stiffen loose or soft soils and reduce post-construction settlement to acceptable limits. The earthwork contractor should expect some difficulty in working with the cohesive soils on this site. Much of the cohesive soils have high moisture contents, and are extremely sensitive to disturbance from construction equipment and foot traffic of workers. Care must be exerted working on or with these soils. If the contractor is not careful, excessive amounts of soil disturbance will occur, requiring remedial subcutting and backfilling. In our Standard Proctor tests, we found optimum moisture contents of 16.0% and 16.4%. The natural moisture content of the clays in our borings ranged from 20% to 29o. Clays with moisture contents of about 180 or higher would require discing and drying, or treatment with Class C fly ash or hydrated lime if you wish to avoid discing and drying. Details of these recommendations are presented below. f.MF rf1N 4111TANTC INf_ Mr. Kevin Kawlewski GME Project No. 9535 10 July 27, 2001 Site Preparation 1 1 We recommend stripping the topsoil, vegetation, and near-surface soft or unsuitable soils from under each building footprint and from under new pavement areas, for municipal streets and private parking lots, extending to a distance of at least 5 feet beyond the outside edge of the building perimeter footings, and 2 feet beyond the edge of the pavements. The topsoil would not be reusable as fill under .the buildings or pavements. It could be used for landscaping or hauled from the site. We recommend that the excavators bidding on this project be required to carry out their own exploration to determine topsoil depths at specific building locations; our borings should not be used fcr this purpose. 1 1 Ll In most of_ the borings, the estimate subcutting deptris ranging as deep . as 4 feet. However., where conditions such as in boring 3 were found, subcutting to as great as 14 feet would be required. Wet non-organic clays would require discing and drying, or treatment with Class C-fly ash or hydrated lime before they can be reused as compacted fill. If you wish to explore the soil treatment .methods, we ask that you please contact us for further recommendations. GME CONSULTANTS, INC. f Mr. Kevin Kawlewski 11 July 27, 2001 GME Project No. 9535 i i i i R i i The calculation of whether there is a sufficient volume of suitable on-site soil to construct the building pads is beyond the scope of our services. If imported soils must be used as fill, we recommend non- organic clay of low plasticity (Unified Classification: CL), or select granular soil such as Mn/DOT 3149.2B1, 2B2, 2C, or 2D. If the contractor wishes to propose a different gradation of granular fill, a sample should be submitted to our laboratory for gradation testing and review. We recommend that granular soils such as silt, sandy silt, uniformly graded very fine to fine sand, or silty sand-not be used as fill material. After the exposed soil has been surface compacted, the fill may be placed. Fill under roads and buildings should be placed in loose lifts about 6 to 8 inches thick, with each lift uniformly compacted to at least 98a of the maximum Standard Proctor dry density. Perched or hydrostatic groundwater may infiltrate into subcut excavations, utility trenches, and possibly footing excavations. This groundwater should be completely removed before fill, concrete, or utility placemer_t. In our opinion, it is likely that water could be controlled by pumping from a suitable number of sump pits extending below the subcuts. However, the selection of the method of dewatering GME C~NSl1LTANTS_ INC Mr. Kevin Kawlewski 12 July 27, 2001 GME Project No. 9535 required to properly remove water from the excavations is the contractor's responsibility. Foundation Design As of the date of this report, specific foundations, loadings, elevations, and locations are not known. Based on our understanding of "typical" industrial park buildings, it is our opinion that the I~ foundations could bear on suitable naturally-occurring non-organic soi:is that are undisturbed during excavation, or on compacted. fill placed over a suitable subgrade. For preliminary design purposes, we recommend using an allowable design bearing pressure of 2,000 to 2,500 pounds per square foot in order to limit post-construction settlement '~ to 1 inch or less. When specific building locations are chosen, we recommend that additional borings be drilled and an extended analysis be carried out. We recommend that the bottom of perimeter footings for the heated portions of the buildings bear at least 4 feet below final ,outside grade, for protection from frost penetration. Interior footings would typically bear .about 18 to 24 inches below finished floor elevation, provided that they would not be subjected to freezing conditions during or after construction. Exterior footings for signs, light ~~ GME CONSULTANTS. INC. _- i Mr. Kevin Kawlewski ~ 13 July 27, 2001 GME Project No. 9535 t poles, wing walls, and loading docks should bear at least 5 feet below final grade, because deeper frost penetration can occur in areas away from heated buildings, especially in areas kept free of snow or ice. i We recommend that all continuous wall footings have a minimum width of 2 feet, and that isolated column footings have a minimum width of 3 feet, regardless of the contact pressure, to avoid excessively narrow ~I footings. i 1 Geopier Option With the Geopier option, it would not be necessary to subcut all soft non-organic soils from under buildings. Rather, all organic topsoil should be stripped, and replaced with compacted fill as described above. - The determinations should then be made about .the number, spacing, and depth of Geopier locations. This would be carried out 1 under the design-build process by the GeopierT"' Foundation Company. For preliminary design purposes, with Geopiers properly placed under continuous wall footings, column footings, and floor slabs, and with a layer of select granular fill placed as needed to grade the site, conventional spread footings with a design bearing pressure on the order of 4,000 to 5,000 pounds per square foot could be used with the Geopier design. If you wish to explore the Geopier option, we r_u~crnrua~uTn~uTa ~ur_ Mr. Kevin Kawlewski 14 July 27, 2001 GME Project No. 9535 recommend that you contact us for further discussion. We would then have you contact the GeopierT"" Foundation Company through their local representative, Mr. Charles Allgood, P.E. Floor Slab subgrade The recommended methods of site preparation, either by conventional soil correction or the Geopiers, would provide a subgrade with adequate support for floor slabs, if the soils are not disturbed or frozen. We recommend that backfill around footings and in underslab utility trenches be granular soil, for relative ease of compaction in confined spaces. This backfill should be placed in loose lifts about 4 to 6 inches thick, and should be compacted with rnanually-operated vibratory plate or impact equipment to at least 95% of the maximum Standard Proctor dry density. We recommend not using-heavy towed or self-propelled compactors within 4 feet of newly constructed foundation walls or. loading dock walls; such equipment can damage the walls. For. preliminary design purposes, we recommend the slabs- on this site be designed with a modulus of subgrade reaction of 150 pounds per cubic inch. We recommend that the final 6 inches of fill under the floor slabs we well-graded granular soil having less than 5% passing the No. 200 GME CONSULTANTS, INC. Mr. Kevin Kawlewski 15 July 27, 2001 GME Project No. 9535 sieve to reduce the migration of moisture upward through the base of the slab. A crushed gravel base (such as crushed Mn/DOT Class. 5) should be used for warehouse slabs with heavy floor loads. The design of the-slab and thickness of the base should be determined by the Structural Engineer, based on the slab loading We also recommend the placement of vapor barriers under the slabs because of the generally cohesive nature of the soils. The purpose of a vapor barrier is to reduce the potential for the upward migration of water vapor from the soil into and through the concrete slabs. Water vapor ..migrating upward through the slabs can damage floor coverings such as tile, carpeting, or wood, or sealers, paints, or coatings. One method for construction of a vapor barrier is given in Part 2, Section 302, or the Manual of Concrete Practice of the American Concrete Institute. There is-also a commentary on alternative methods of vapor barrier construction in the April 2001 issue of Concrete International. We recommend that you contact the manufacturers of -the specified coatings or coverings to determine how they wish to have the vapor barrier constructed, Their preferred method of vapor barrier construction may differ from the ACI method. C.MF [_1'IN SlllTANTS INC 1 Mr. Kevin Kawlewski 16 July 27, 2001 GME Project No. 9535 We recommend that the floor slabs be designed and built in accordance with the recommendations given by the Portland Cement Association and the American Concrete Institute. The slabs should have construction joints and control joints at appropriate, spacings to reduce the potential of uncontrolled shrinkage, cracking, and curling. The slabs should be cast independent of the any foundations, or walls to permit relative movement to occur without structural distress: Exterior Underground Utilities The excavated non-organic soils can be used for backfill in the new utility line trenches. These soils should be dried or treated as described above, and then placed in loose lifts not exceeding 6 inches, compacted to at least 950 of the maximum Standard Proctor dry density. Within 3 feet of pavement subgrade elevation, the compaction should be increased to at least 1000. Exterior Entry Slabs and Sidewalks The silty clay soils on this site are frost-susceptible; they can heave upon freezing each winter, raising slabs built over such soils. Exterior slabs that abut the buildings should be cast on select non- frost susceptible (NFS) sand having less than 5o passing the No. 200 GME CONSULTANTS, INC. 1 [l e Mr. Kevin Kawlewski 17 July 27, 2001 GME Project No. 9535 sieve. The-NFS sand zone should be at least 5 feet thick, tapered out to no NFS soil over a distance of about 15 feet. Plastic drainpipes should be placed at the base of the sand, connected to the storm sewer system, to remove infiltrating water. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I As an alternative, the slabs and sidewalks could be constructed as structural stoop slabs, supported on frost footings bearing at least 5 feet below final grade. The sidewalks and slabs should have a minimum 4-inch thick air gap between the slab and the subgrade. Insulation should be placed along all sides of the vertical foundation walls to prevent adfreezing of the backfill to the walls. To avoid a tripping r:azard where the sidewalks abut the stoop slabs, the drained NFS tapered as discussed above should be placed adjacent to the- stoop slab... Pavement subgrade Preparation of the pavement subgrade has been described previously. in the Site Preparation section of this report. Based on a subgrade consisting of silty clay, we recommend using a Stabilometer value (R- value) of 6 for the pavement design. You may use this value, along with your predicted. traffic volumes and the City's desired pavement life, to design the sections. We strongly recommend designing the r:MC rnw~ei~ire~uTC ~~r Mr. Kevin Kawlewski 18 July 27, 2001 GME Project No. 9535 streets with a subbase of select, .free-draining NFS sand at least 2 feet thick. As a second alternative, but one which would not. provide the same degree of internal drainage, a geofabric could be placed over the subgrade before the granular base course is placed. The geofabric's primary function would be to prevent fouling (mixing) of the clay with the Class 5 base course. Prior to placing the subbase or base course, the subgrade .should be test rolled with a fully loaded dump truck. Soft soils detected during test rolling should be subcut and replaced. Fill used to replace the subcuts and to reach design subgrade elevation should consist of cohesive soils, moisture conditioned as previously described, to avoid "birdbaths" in the subgrade if .granular fill were used. ONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS Groundwater Based on the conditions. found in our borings, it is our opinion that groundwater might be encountered during excavation of foundations and. utilities for this project. Any water that enters excavations from groundwater seepage, surface runoff, or precipitation should. be promptly pumped out. Water should not be allowed to stand ponded over GME CONSII LTGNT S_ INC 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Mr. Kevin Kawlewski 19 July 27,-2001 GME Project No. 9535 the foundation bearing :soils, or the floor slab or the pavement subgrade soils, since this water can soften and disturb the soils. The contractor should not be permitted to place fill or concrete into standing water or over softened soils in an attempt to displace these materials. This technique can result in trapping softened soils under the building causing excessive post-construction settlement, even if the softened zone is only a few inches thick. Equipment Selection/Soil Disturbance The soil types at this site can be easily disturbed by construction equipment, especially when the soils are. saturated or during freeze/thaw conditions. It is the earthwork contractor's responsibility to .choose equipment and work procedures that will not disturb the subgrade soils. The contractor should also route construction traffic away from foundation soils, and areas of pavements and slabs, to minimize soil disturbance. If the equipment the contractor selects causes .rutting or pumping, it is the earthwork. contractor's responsibility to switch to other types of equipment or methods. The responsibility to properly select construction equipment to avoid disturbing soils on the site lies GME CONSULTANTS, INC. Mr. Kevin Kawlewski 20 July 27, 2001 GME Project No. 9535 solely with the contractor. A note to this effect should be included in the project, specifications. Winter Construction We strongly.. recommend that the project specification contain a section dealing .with winter earthwork, foundation construction, and masonry/concrete construction for the project. The contractors should be required to submit documentation that they have read and understand the conditions. Only unfrozen fill and backfill should be used, and contractors may charge extra for importing unfrozen soil or keeping backfill from freezing. Placement of fill and/or foundation concrete must not be permitted on frozen soil, nor should bearing soils under footings or slabs be allowed to freeze after concrete is placed, because excessive post-construction settlement .could occur as the frozen soils thaw. The concrete and masonry used in the building must-be placed and protected in accordance with pertinent industry standards for winter construction. GME CONSULTONTS.INC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Mr. Kevin Kawlewski GME Project No. 9535 21 July 27, 2001 Construction Safety 1 All excavations for this project must comply with the requirements of 1 OSHA 29 CFR, Part 1926, Subpart P, "Excavations and Trenches." This document states that excavation safety is the sole responsibility of the contractor. Reference to this OSHA requirement should be t 1 i i 1 included in the job specifications. The responsibility to provide safe working conditions on the site, for earthwork, building construction, or any associated operations, is not borne in any manner by GME Consultants, Inc. Construction Test we recommend -that the Owner. retain the services of a geotechnical engineering firm at the time of construction to provide full-time observation and testing during site preparation. This should include observation and documentation of topsoil stripping, subcutting-of unsuitable soils, and placement of compacted fill for the building pad and pavement areas. The Geotechnical Engineer or Materials Technician should also test the foundation bearing soils before forming and placement of the footings and slabs.. Testing of building materials in accordance with Chapter 17 of the 1.997 Uniform Building GME CONSII LTANTS_ IN C_ Mr. Kevin Kawlewski GME Project No. 9535 22 Code should also be carried out. July 27, 2001 We welcome the opportunity to provide the observation and testing services for this project. GENERAL QUALIFICATIONS This preliminary report has been prepared based on the soil and groundwater conditions found in our borings, and on the design data available from SEH. As of the date of this report, specific building locations, size, elevations, or loads have not been selected. Thus, we have prepared our recommendations based on our experience with similar types of developments, and the soil conditions we found on the sites. Additional exploration with an appropriate number of borings should be carried out on each site when building locations and designs are chosen. We determined the soil and groundwater conditions at nine locations for this project. The conditions that we describe and discuss in this report are pertinent only at the boring locations and under -the environment of our field exploration. Variations in the subsurface conditions were found, and it is probable that additional variations exist that cannot be determined from our borings or from our site reconnaissance. These variations will not become apparent until excavation is started. No warranty, express or implied, is presented GME CONSULTANTS, INC. 1 1 r Mr. Kevin Kawlewski 23 July 27, 2001 GME Project No. 9535 in this report with respect to the soil and groundwater conditions on this site. STANDARD OF CARE The recommendations contained in this report represent our professional opinions. The soil testing and geotechnical engineering services performed for this project have been conducted in a manner consistent with that level of skill and care ordinarily exercised by other members of the profession currently practicing in this area, under similar budgetary and time constraints. No other warranty, express or implied,~is madey Prepared by: (William C. Kwasny, P.E. Principal EngiI~ee~resi ent ~_~ Reviewed by: Thomas P. Venema, P.E. Principal Engineer/Vice President WCK:ms w:\wck\9535 dtr.ms.doc I hereb erti th this pla ,specification, or report pr ar me or under my direct supe is t t l a a duly Registered Prof si I n eer der the laws of the Stat of so ~ William C. Kwd'snyk. Dat : ~ ~~ D'~~ Reg. 1427 w ~tuc en~ciuTwuTC ~wtc 1 t 1 u Cl 1 1 GENERAL NOTES DRILLING & SAMPLING SYMBOLS: SL SS with Liner SS Split Spoon - 1'/e" I.D., 2" O.D., unless OS Osterberg Sampler - 3" Shelby Tube otherwise noted HS Hollow Stem Auger ST Shelby Tube - 2" O.D., unless otherwise noted WS Wash Sample PA Power Auger FT Fish Trail DB Diamond Bit - NX: BX: AX RB Rock Bit AS Auger Sample BS Bulk Sample JS : Jar Sample PM Pressuremeter test - in-situ VS Vane Shear Standard "N" Penetration: Blows per foot of a 140 pound hammer falling 30 inches on a 2 inch OD split spoon, except where noted. WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENT SYMBOLS: WL : Water Level WCI : Wet Cave In DCI Dry Cave In WS While Sampling WD While Drilling BCR : Before Casing Remvoal ACR : .After Casing Removal AB After Boring Water levels indicated on the boring logs are the levels measured in the boring at the times indicated. In previous soils, the indicated elevations are considered reliable ground water levels. In impervious soils, the accurate determination of ground water elevations is not possible in even several days observation, and additional evidence of ground water elevations must be j sought. , GRADATION DESCRIPTION & TERMINOLOGY Coarse Grained or Granular Soils have more than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; they are described as: boulders, cobbles, gravel or sand. Fine Grained Soils have less than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; they are described as: clays or clayey silts if they are cohesive, and silts if they are non-cohesive. In addition to gradation, granular soils are defined on the basis of their relative in-place density and fine grained soils on the basis of their strength or consistency, and their plasticity. Major Descriptive Term(s) Component (Of Components Also Percent of Of Sample Size Range Present in Sample) Dry Weight Boulders Over 8 in. (200mm) Trace 1 - 9 Cobbles 8 in. to 3 in. Little 10 -19 (200mm to 75mm) Gravel 3 in. to #4 sieve Some 20 - 34 (75mm to 2mm) Sand #4 to #200 sieve And 35 - SO (2mm to .074mm) Silt Passing #200 sieve (0.074mm to 0.005mm) Clay Smaller than 0.005mm CONSISTENCY OF COHESIVE SOILS: RELATIVE DENSITY OF GRANULAR SOILS: Unconfined Comp. Strength, Qu, tsf Consistency N -Blows/ft. Relative Density 0.25 Very Soft 0 - 3 Very Loose 0.25 - 0.49 Soft 4 - 9 Loose 0.50 - 0.99 Medium (Firm) 10 - 29 Medium Dense 1.00 - 1.99 Stiff 30 - 49 Dense .2.00 - 3.99 Very Stiff 50 - 80 Very Dense 4.00 - 8.00 Hard 80 + Extremely Dense 8.00 Very Hard 1 1 1 GME CONSULTANTS, INC. 1 1 t u 1 1 r 1 1 t t 1 i LOG OF BORING B-1 PROJECT Northwest Industrial Park SITE County Road 19 Albertville, Minnesota . CLIENT SEH ARCHfrECT-ENGINEER SEH ~ W w tL W F:: ~- fn UNCONFINED COMPRESSNE 5TFtENGTH TONS/FT? --- 0--- 1 2 3 4 5 ~ w LL m ~ W~ d J j J W z = V Fa- DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL F- w J~ Q J ~ m W J WATER CONTENT °,6 --- ~_-- - STANDARD PENETRATION (BLOWS/FOOT) w o r Q Z cn a ¢ S Q ~ ~ SURFACE ELEVATION 956.4 W ~ ~ ~ Q ~ z ---~-- ~o zo ao ao So B SANDY SILT t i S rown , race organ cs -loose - 1 S (ML) (topsoil) $ 22 ~ Brown and dark brown SILTY CLAY, trace sand ~ 2SS -firm - (CL) s 4.0 ~ 3SS Brown and gray SILTY CLAY, trace sand, gravel -firm - (CL) s ' 6.0 `, Brown SILTY CLAY WITH SAND, trace gravel - ~a 4SS stiff - (CL) - is ~ • ~ 9.0 ` 5SS Gray SILT WITH SAND, thin brown sand seams -medium dense - (ML) 18 ~ r I I ' 14.4 Gra brown SILTY CLAY t ac d l 6SS y , r e san , gray c ay 15 seams at 19.8 feet -stiff to very stiff - (Ct) ` , 7SS 24 • ~. ~ ~~ ` ~ 23.4. Gra SILTY CLAY WITH SAND t l ~ 8SS y , race grave - 47 hard - (CL) End of boring at 25 feet Hollow stem auger used full depth Borehole backfilled with cuttings WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS BORING STARTED 7/ 12/O1 W.L. Groundwater not encountered GME CONSULTANTS, INC. BORING COMPLETED 7/12/O1 W.L. while drilling or after HSA removal Geotechn'~cal Materials Environmental 1400021st Avenue No. RIG CME-SSO DRILLER TA W.L. Minneapolis, MN 55447 nom) s5s-,sss DRAWN I(I~B APPROVED JPB JoB ~ 9535 SHEET 1 of 1 Boring caved at 23.1 feet after HSA The stratification lines represent appro~amate boundaries between removal soil types; insitu the transition may be gradual. LOG OF BORING B- 2 PROJECT Northwest Industrial Park SITE County Road.19 Albertville, Minnesota CLIE SE NT H ARCHITECT-ENGINEER SEH ~ lL tWi - ~ ap (tsf) - -Q- - 1 2 3 4 5 I- w w m g z w ~ ~ w w ~ ~ Q U ~ DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL ~ ~~ Q ~ ~ ~ m J WATER CONTENT --~-- STANDARD PENETRATION (BLOWSlFOOT) w o f- Q z to ¢ W Q ~ ~ to SURFACE ELEVATION ~' 953.1 nw. w to ~ > z _ _ ~- to zo ao 4o so Dark brown to black SILTY CLAY WITH z 1 SS 7 ~Q, ~ O ORGANICS -firm - (CL-OL) (Topsoil) z 2ss s ~ ~ 4.4 t 3SS Gray and brown fine to medium SILTY SAND g 6.0 -loose -damp - (SM) and brown SILTY CLAY trace sand Gra z 4SS , , y 6 ~ gravel -firm - (CL) ~ 9.0 1 SILTY SANDY CLAY ravel sand trace Gra z SS , g , y ~~ 5 10.6 seams -stiff - (CL) ILTY SAND l t , trace c ay -damp - Gray fine S (SM) 1 1 ~ 14.0 el - Gray SILTY CLAY WITH SAND trace ra S , g v 14 ~ z 6S stiff - (CL) 19.4 \ ~ Brown fine to medium CLAYEY SAND trace 55 7SS , silt, gravel -dense -damp - (SC) 23.0 z Gra CLAYEY SANDY SILT - ve hard - ML End of boring at 23.4 feet Hollow stem auger used fuA depth Borehole backfilled with cuttings 0.4 WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS BORING STARTED 7/ 12/01 W.L. Groundwater not encountered GME CONSULTANTS, INC. BORING COMPLETED 7/12/01 W.L_ while drillin or after HSA g Geotechnical Materials Environments{ 14000 21st Avenue North RIG CME-550 DRILLER TA W.L. remova ~ Minneapolis, MN 55447 Pte} sss-less DRAWN I~(~/IB APPROVED JPB Joe # 9535 SHEET 1 of 1 Boring caved at 21.7 feet after HSA The stratification lines represent approximate boundaries remova between soil types; insitu the transition may be gradual. 1 1 r r 1 t 1 1 t ~~ 1 1 1 1 i 1 f 1 t LOG OF BORING B- 3 Offset 100' E PROJECT Northwest Industrial Park SITE County Road 19 Albertville, Minnesota CLIENT SEH ARCHrrECT-ENGINEER SEH 1-- W w ~ ~".'. LL UNCONFINED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TONS/FT? --- 0--- 1 2 3 4 5 w w _ w ~ Z W ~ a W w ~ ~ Q V ~ DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL ~ Fw- Q ~ ~ ~ °~ J WATER CONTENT°,6 --- •--- STANDARD PENETRATION (BLOWS/F00T) w o Q~ cn ¢ Q 3 ~ m SURFACE ELEVATION 952.3 a w m o: > z -~ io so 3o ao so Dark brown CLAYEY SILT WITH ORGANICS 1SS , a z trace sand seams -soft - (ML-OL) (Topsoil) l i 2SS 4 4.3 I 3SS Brown SILTY CLAY, trace sand -soft - (CL) a ~ s 1 I I 4SS 7.2 z7 Gray brown SILTY CLAY -soft - (CL) ~ l I I 5SS s 2 ~~ ~~ \ \\ 14.0 ` SILTY CLAY WITH SAND t a e v G l ` 6SS 15.4 . , gra ray r c e , sand seams- ve stiff - CL 19 Gray brown CLAYEY SANDY SILT trace gravel ~ , ~ ` =very stiff to hard - (ML) , ~~ \ 7SS 29 • i l ` 33 ~ 8SS End of boring at 25 feet Hollow stem auger used full depth Borehole backfilled with cuttings WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS BORING STARTED 7/ 12/01 W.L. Groundwater not encountered GME CONSULTANTS, INC. BORING COMPLETED 7/12/O1 W.L. while drilfin or after HSA removal 9 Geotechnical Materials Environmental iaooo 2,~t Avenue No. RIG CME-550 DRILLER TA W.L. Minneapolis, MN ssaa7 ssa,ess a DRAWN KMB APPROVED JPB p d JOB A 9535 SHEET 1 of 1 Boring caved at 21.8 feet after HSA The stratification lines represent approximate boundaries between removal soil types; insitu the transition may be gradual. LOG OF BORING B- 4 PROJECT Northwest Industrial Park SITE County Road 19 Albertville, Minnesota CLIENT SEH ARCHITECT-ENGINEER SEH W W ~ F-: LL UNCONFINED COMPRESSIVE Sr12ENGTH TONSJFi? --- 0--- 1 2 3 4 5 ~ tL _ w ~ > Z W ~ a w > W ~ ~ ¢ = U ~ DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL N w F- Q ~ ~ ~ m J WATER CONTENT°,6 --- •--- STANDARD PENETRATION (BLOWS/FOOT) o Q Z m Q Q ~ F ~ SURFACE ELEVATION 956.2 a w rn ~ > z -~-- 10 20 3o ao so Dark brown SANDY SILT WITH ORGANICS - S 7 ~ 1s • 1S loose - (ML-OL) (Topsoil) 2.2 2 S Brown SILTY CLAY, trace organics, sand -stiff s 1 S SILTY CLAY trace sand sa d B t 3S , , rown seam a n a ~ O s S 4.4 feet -soft - (CL) 6.4 s ' 4S Brown fine to medium CLAYEY SAND trace s S , silt, gravel -loose -wet - (SC) ~~ ~ 9.0 ` SILTY SANDY CLAY tr B l ~` rown , ace grave -very 17 O SSS stiff - (CL) l t 20 • 6S5 15.6 , Gray CLAYEY SANDY SILT, trace gravel -very ; stiff - (ML) ~ 7SS 15 O l l I l l ~ 8SS 17 O End of boring at 25 feet Hollow stem auger used full depth Borehole backfilled with cuttings WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS BORING STARTED 7/ 12/01 W.L. ®4.2 feet before casing removal GME CONSULTANTS, INC. BORING COMPLETED 7/12/01 W.L. = 14.4 feet after HSA removal Georechn'~cal Materials Environmental ~ 4000 21st Avenue No. RIG CME-550 DRILLER TA W L Minneapolis, MN 55447 pss~ 551 ase DRAWN I'(MB APPROVED JPB JOB # 9535 SHEET ~ Of 1 Boring caved at 19.8 feet after HSA The stratification lines represent approximate boundaries between removal soi{types; insitu the transition may be gradual. 1 1 1 t t 1 1 1 1 ~. LOG OF BORING B- 5 PROJECT Northwest Industrial Park SITE County Road 19 Albertville, Minnesota CLIENT SEH ARCHITECT-ENGINEER SEH F- W u- ~ -`- UNCONFINED COMPRESSNE STRENGTH TONSlFT? 1 2 3 4 5 I- w LL _ w ~ ~ Z w ~ }a w > J ~ ~ Q = v ~ DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL ~ ~ w J~ Q ~ N ~ ~ m w J WATER CONTENT °,6 __ ~___ STANDARD PENETRATION (BLOWS/FOOT) w o I- ¢ z cn ¢ W ~ ~ ~ ~ .SURFACE ELEVATION 956.3 a w cn ~ > z -~ io so 30 4o so 0 8 trace or anics - (ML) Brown SANDY SILT 1 SS . g , sr o oil 2.0 trace sand -firm - Brown mottled SILTY CLAY ~` , z2 CL ; b, ~ 2SS grown and gray SILTY CLAY, trace sand, 13 , Y.~ CL tiff t fi o rm - ( ) gravel - s 3SS s ~ ~ . 6.0 n and dark brown SILTY CLAY trace sand B 4SS , row 2s -very stiff - (CL) ~ 9.4 1 SSS trace gravel -medium Brown fine SILTY SAND 29 , M ) dense -.damp - (S I I . ' 6SS 25 r i ! r i i 7 ~ SS ~` ~ _, \ 8SS 26 End of boring at 25 feet Hollow stem auger used full depth Borehole backfilled with cuttings WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS BORING STARTED 7/ 12/01 W.L. Groundwater not encountered GME CONSULTANTS, INC. BORING COMPLETED 7/12/01 W.L. while drilling or after HSA removal Geotechnical Materials Environmental ,400021stAvenueNo. RIG CME-550 DRILLER TA W.L. Minneapol'rs,MN55417 ssl ssa, ass DRAWN ICMB APPROVED JPB p JOB ~ 9535 SHEET 1 Of 1 Boring caved at 21.5 feet after HSA The stratification lines represent appro~omate boundaries between removal soil types; insitu the transition may be gradual. LOG OF BORING B- 6 PROJECT Northwest Industrial Park SITE County Road 19 Albertville, Minnesota CLIENT SEH ARCHITECT-ENGINEER SEH W <L W -~ UNCONFINED C.OMPRESSNE STRENGTH TONSlFT? 1 2 3 4 5 ~ W W _ fY ~ ~ z W ~ a w > W ~ z _ U ~ DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL ~ w ~ Q ~ (n ~ m ~ WATER CONTENT °.6 --- e--- STANDARD PENETRATION (BLOWS/FOOT) w o Q z ~ a ~ Q ~ Q ~ ~ SURFACE ELEVATION 958.5 U ~ a w u> ~ Q > z ---~-- 10 20 3o ao eo d B SILTY CLAY WITH SAND S rown an gray , 2a 1 S trace gravel -firm to stiff - (CL) 7 ~ Oe 2SS s ~ O T 3SS 8 O 6.0 ttl B d SILTY CLAY WITH rown mo e SAND, trace 4SS gravel -very stiff - (CL) ~s ~ O t I I I 5S S 17 O I I I I r 14.0 G b SILTY CLAY WITH S ND S rown ray , trace A 18 6 S gravel -very stiff - (CL) 21 O I 1 I I . I 1s 7SS 19.6 ~ e e Gray brown fine to m dium SILTY SAND, trace a - m - Hollow stem auger used full depth Borehole backfilled with cuttings WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS BORING STARTED 7/ 12/01 W.L. GfOUndWater nOt enCOUntered GME CONSULTANTS, INC. BORING COMPLETED 7/12/01 W.L. while drilling or after HSA removal Geotechnical Materials Environmerstai 14000 21st Avenue No. RIG CME-550 DRILLER TA W.L. Minneapol"rs,MN55447 (7~) sse.,ass DRAWN IQd16 APPROVED JPB Job ~ 9535 SHEET 1 of 1 Boring caved at 15.2 feet after HSA The stratification tines represent appro~omate boundaries between removal soil types; insitu the transition may be gradual. A 1 t 1 1 1 t r n t i t r t t r 1 1 i A LOG OF BORING B- 7 PROJECT Northwest Industrial Park SITE County Road 19 Albertville, Minnesota CLIENT SEH ARCHITEC SE T-ENGINEER H W ~- ~ UNCONFINED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TONS/Fr? 1 2--- 0--- 4 5 ~ w "~ w ~ > z w w a- w > w ~ O Q U ~ DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL ~ ~ Q ~ ~ ~ m ~ WATER CONTENT % --- •--- STANDARD PENETRATION (BLOWS/FOOT) w o Q Z ~ ¢ ¢ ~ ~ cn SURFACE ELEVATION 955.3 a w cn o: j z ---~--- 10 20 so ao so k b CLAYEY SILT WITH ORGANI D S SS rown ar C - ~s 1 soft - (ML-OL) (Topsoil) 4 2.2 2SS Brown and gray SILTY CLAY, trace sand -firm ,p~ 5 SILTY CLAY t B d d 3SS , race san rown , coarse san layer at 6.4 feet -stiff - (CL) B O 6.6 ` ` 4SS Brown SILTY CLAY WITH SAND -stiff - (CL) 15 ~ 9 0 ` SILTY CLAY B t d ` rown , race san -very stiff - » 5SS (CL-ML) ~ 2s • /~ ' ~ 14.4 SILTY CLAY WITH SAND Gra trace ravel - ' ~ 6SS y , g 12 stiff - (CL) , 18.0 SILTY CLAY G t d ' , race san ray , gravel -stiff - s ~ 7SS (CL-ML) ~a - O End of boring at 20 feet Hollow stem auger used full depth Borehole backf~lled with cuttings WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS BORING STARTED 7/ 12/01 W.L. Groundwater not encountered GME CONSULTANTS, INC. BORING COMPLETED 7/12/01 W.L. while drillin or after HSA removal g Geotechnical Materials Enrinmmenlal ~ 400021st Avenue No- RIG CME-550 DRILLER TA W L Minneapolis, MN 55447 n~ 55a,ase DRAWN I(M$ APPROVED JPB JOB # 9535 SHEET 1 of 1 Boring caved at 16.8 feet after HSA The stratification lines represent approximate boundaries between removal soil types; insitu the Vansition may be gradual. LOG OF BORING B- 8 PROJECT Northwest Industrial Park SITE County.Road 19 Alberivllle, Minnesota CLIENT SEH ARCHITECT-ENGINEER SEH F- W ~- .-. ~- UNCONFINED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TONS/FT? 1 2 3 4 5 1- w ~ _ w ~ ~ Z W ~°}' w > j ~ ~ ¢ _ U H DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL ~ w f- ~ a ~ 'S ~ m J WATER CONTENT °,b _-- ~_-- STANDARD PENETRATION (BLOWS/FOOT) w o 1- a Z m Q w Q ~ ~ cn SURFACE ELEVATION 954.5 a w ~ ~ > z ,o~ -`~`-- io so 3o ao so Dark brown CLAYEY SILT WITH ORGANICS - SS s 2a 1 stiff - (ML-OL) (Topsoil) 2.3 ~ 2SS Brown and dark brown SILTY CLAY, trace sand 7 r0, -firm - (CL) 4.4 , '~ 3SS Brown and gray SILTY CLAY trace sand -stiff - ~~ a , (CL) ` ~ zz ~ 7.0 \ 4SS Dark brown fine to medium CLAYEY SAND ~s , trace silt, gravel -medium dense -damp - (SC) ; 9.0 ra SILTY CLAY WITH SAND trace Dark 5SS y , g 10 ~ gravel -stiff - (CL-ML} 4 ~ 13.5 SILTY CLAY WITH SAND stiff G CL i - ray - ( ) 6S ~5 S I I I I I I 1 18.8 7SS Gray fine to medium SILTY SAND, trace clay, d d ium ense -dam - S ravel -me End of boring at 20 feet Hollow stem auger used full depth Borehole backfilled with cuttings WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS BORING STARTED 7/ 12/01 W.L. GfOUndWatef nOt enCOUntered GME CONSULTANTS, INC. BORING COMPLETED 7/12/01 W.L. while drilliR or after HSA removal g Geotechnical Materials Erni~onmental 14000 21st Avenue No. RIG CME-550 DRILLER TA W.L. Minneapolis, MN 55447 (763) 55&1858 DRAWN KMB APPROVED JPB JoB g 9535 SHEET 1 of 1 Boring caved at 17.7 feet after HSA The stratification lines represent approximate boundaries between removal soil types; insitu the transition may be gradual. t y 1 1 t 1 t r i i 1 r E w i t 1 r i i i r LOG OF BORING B- 9 PROJECT Northwest Industrial Park SfTE County Road 19 Albertville, Minnesota CLIENT SEH ARCHITECT-ENGINEER SEH W W LL - ^ ~ N UNCONFINED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TONSIFr? ' 2 --- Q--- 4 5 t- w ~ = W ~ ~ Z W W} J F- w W J ~ z ¢ = (J Q ¢ DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL h- w J~ ? p m W J WATER CONTENT°,6 ___ •___ STANDARD PENETRATION (BLOWSIFOOT ~ ~ Q Z ~ Q a ~ ~ rn SURFACE ELEVATION 958.6 U wa w cn o; > z ) _ to 20 -~_- m so Brown mottled SILTY CLAY, trace sand, gravel is 1SS -firm - (CL) ~ ~ • 2.0 , Brown and gray SILTY CLAY, trace sand -stiff - ' 2SS (CL) $ O 4.0 , Brown SILTY CLAY WITH SAND, trace gravel - ' 3SS stiff to very stiff - {CL) s 4SS ~~ i 9.0 Brown SILTY CLAY, trace sand -very stiff to ' ~ 5SS hard - (CL-ML) ~s ~ . ~~ ~ \ S ~ 6S 32 i i i i 7SS 25 i End of boring at 20 feet Hollow stem auger used full depth Borehole backfilled with cuttings WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS BORING STARTED 7/1 2/O1 W.L. Groundwater not encountered GME CONSULTANTS, INC, BORING COMPLETED 7/12101 W.L. while drilling or after HSA removal Geotechnical Materials Environmenml ,aooo st~c A N RIG CME-550 DRILLER TA wanue o. W,t_, Minneapdis, MN 55447 DRAWN KMB APPROVED JPB ns3155s-,ass JOB # 953$ SHEET 1 of 1 Boring caved at 17.3 feet after .HSA The stratification lines represent approximate boundaries between removal soil types; insitu the transition may be gradual. r r r r t r i i r 140 135 130 125 ~- 0 0 120 ~ m U w a 0 115 z 0 o_ } ~- 110 z w 0 r 0 105 100 95 90 85 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 MOISTURE CONTENT -PERCENT OF DRY WEIGHT GME CONSULTANTS, INC. Geotechnical-Materials-Environmental 14000 21st Avenue North Mi li Mi 5544 nneapo s, nnesota 7 [6121 559-1859 MOISTURE -DENSITY RELATIONS OF SOILS AND SOIL-AGGREGATE MIXTURES ~/30/01 DATE 9535 : GME PROJECT NO. PROJECT: Northwest Industrial Park LOCATION: Albertville, Minnesota GRAPH NO. B- 6 SAMPLE N0. B- 6 SOURCE OF MATERIAL: __ On site: Auger sample, 2-10 feet B SIL rown TY CLAY WITH SAND SOIL DESCRIPTION: U CL NIFIED CLASSIFICATION : METHOD OF TEST: ASTM: D 698 Method B CLAY PREPARATION: Yes NATURAL MOISTURE CONTENT: % PERCENT PASSING NO. 200 SIEVE: OPTIMUM MOISTURE CONTENT: 16.0 % MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY: 108.7 pcf Zero air void curve for specific gravities of 2.80 2 70 . 2.60 CLASSIFICATION OF SOILS FOR ENGINEERING PURPOSES (ASTM: D 2487 and 2488) Major divisions I Group Typical names Laboratory classification criteria symbols w d GW d c >= c ~ 0 0 °c ~m 16m ro- Q m O v GP w w V ~ y W i N > p O ~, ~° _ z > O r m `c d N a ~ t ~ o GM o t d _ E A a m 0 0- -3a ~ Z ~ w'~~ w C d V O - w > m b t ~ n GC vm ~Q m t .°i m W ~ ~ m m w_ o ~ w d sw O w v c E c ca o O O d w C w i0 m '» ~ O L ~ d N m L m O ` SP m m w O ~ = O Z ,,,, `° c N m W d t L C c w o SM m d L ~ 5 E m E L w w u `o ~ 3~ c ~ - m ~ V O C N in Q SC m 'm 0 0 Z m L w ~' m v E m w c m °' rn m c °.' ~` E `o m L c L w O ML 0 c m j. L m V q c . CL w E in n J OL c MH c A w L ~ ~ V ~ ~ °i CH c ~ a _ ='• E in v ~ OH V w w m o Pt _ ~ w O Well-graded gravels, gravel-sand mixtures, little or na tines Poorly graded gravels, gravel- sand mixtures, little or no fines Silty gravels, gravel-sand-silt mixtures Clayey gravels, gravel-sand-clay mixtures Well-graded sands, gravelly sands, little or no lines Poorly graded sands, gravelly sands, little or no tines Silty sands, sand-sill mixtures Clayey sands, sand-clay mix- tures Inorganic silts and very tine sands, rock flour, silty or clay- ey tine sands or clayey silts with slight plasticity Inorganic clays of low to me- dium plasticity, gravelly clays, sandy clays, silty clays, lean clays Organic silts and organic silty t a clays of low plasticiiy ~ Inorganic silts, micaceous or c `a diatomaceous tine sandy or silty soils, elastic silts Inorganic clays of high plas- ticity, fat clays Organic clays of medium to high plasticity, organic silts Peat and other highly organic 5011 X60 (~30)Z C~ -greater than 4; C~= between 1 and 3 ~ ~ c Om OroX06o o+ W c rn w ~~ W m ot meeting all gradation requirements for GW O (~ y V O . ~ N - N v 3~~ N N ~ 0 C ~ m ~ Atterberg limits below "A" ~ 0 3 ~ o ~ E line or P.I. less than 4 Above "A" line with P.1. ~ ~ n ~ ~ m w between 4 and 7 are border- ~ z line cases requiring use N ,c, Atterberg limits below "A^ of dual symbols L line or P.I. greater than 7 o,a 0 N ` c - - X60 (~so)a C~=-greater than 6; C~= between 1 and 3 ~ Oio OtoX06o C w ' A W ~ C C ~ .. of O w o ~ o ~ Not meeting all gradation requirements for SW w ~o O C a+ d C ~- y V _ W u W V W ~ v d n c m a w o_ N ~ a c ~ ~ c ~, Atterberg limits below "A" n o 1° t0 m n L ~ line or P.I. less than 4 Limits plotting in hatched W N V r c ~ m ~ zone with P.1. between 4 E ~ a o _° ~ y QwJ~,n and 7 are borderline cases - 0 'N requiring use of dual sym- Atterberg limits below "A" bols_ line or P.1. greater than 7 F l ifi ti f ti -- or c ass ca on o ne-grained - soils and fine fraction of coarse- ___ grained soils. Atterberg Limits plotting in hatched area are borderline ciassi- C lications requiring use of dual symbols Equation of A-line: PI=0.73 (LL - 20) ~e V •P~ . OH and MH CL ~ CL-ML __ ; - --- ML and OL i 10 7 4 0 0 10 20 30 40 SO 60 70 80 90 700 Liquid Limii Plasticity Chart t 1 1 1 1 i I t 1 1 1 r r SPECIAL NOTES ON PLACEMENT OF COMPACTED FILL SOIL GENERAL The placement of compacted fill for support of foundations, floor slabs, pavements, or earth structures should be carried out by an experienced excavator with the proper equipment. The excavator must be prepared to adapt his procedures, equipment,-and materials to the type of project, to weather conditions, and the structural-requirements of the architect and engineer. Methods and materials used in summer may not be applicable in winter; fill used in dry excavations may not be suitable in wet excavations or during periods of precipitation; proposed fill soil may require wetting or drying for proper placement and compaction. Conditions may also vary. during the course of a project or in different areas of the site. These needs should be addressed in the project drawings and specifications. EXCAVATION/BACKFILL BELOW THE WATER TABLE It is common to have to excavate and replace unsuitable soils below the water table for site correction. As a general I rule of prudent construction technique, we recommend that excavation/backfill below the water table not be permitted, unless the excavation is dewatered. Numerous problems can develop when this procedure is attempted without dewatering. Inability of the equipment operators and soil technicians to ,~' observe that all unsuitable soil/materials have been removed from the base of the excavation. - Inability to observe and measure that proper lateral oversizing 'is provided. -Inability to prevent or correct sloughing of excavation sidewalls, which can result in unsuitable soils trapped within the .select backfill: - Inability of the contractor to adequately and uniformly compact the backfill -Possibility of disturbance of the suitable soils at the base of the excavation. The dewatering methods, normally chosen at the contractor's option, should follow prudent construction practice. Excavations in clay can often be dewatered with sump pits and pumps; this technique would not be applicable for excavation extending into permeable granular soil, especially for depths significantly below the water table. Dewater- ing granular soils should normally be done with well points or wells. When dewatering is needed, we strongly recommend that the procedures be discussed at pre-bid or pre-construction meetings. The dewatering technique chosen by the contractor should be reviewed. by the architect and engineer before construction starts; it should not be left until excavation is under way. The selection of proper backfill materials is important when working in dewatered excavations. Even with dewatering, the base is usually wet and the contractor must be careful not to disturb the base. We recommend that the first lifts of backfill be a clean medium to course grain sand with less than 5% passing the #200 sieve. The use of silty sand, clayey sand, or cohesive/semi-cohesive soils is not recommended for such situations: The excavator should be required to submit samples of the proposed material(s) he plans to use as backfill before the fill is hauled to the site, so that it can be tested for suitability. ' WINTER EARTHWORK CONSTRUCTION . Winter earthwork presents -its owri range of problems which must be overcome; the situation may be complicated by the need for dewatering discussed above. During freezing conditions, the fill used must not be frozen when delivered to the site. It also must not be allowed to freeze during or after compaction. Since the ability to work the soil while keeping it from freezing depends in part on the soil type, the specifications should require the contractor to submit a sample of his proposed fill before construc- tion starts, for laboratory testing. If the soil engineer and structural engineer determine that it is not suitable, it should be rejected. In general, silty sand, clayey sand, and cohesive/semi-cohesive soils should not be used as fill under freezing conditions. All frozen soil of any type should be rejected for use as compacted fill. ~~ It is important that compacted fill be protected from freezing after it is placed. The excavator should be required to submit a plan for protecting the soil. The plan should include details on the. type and amount of material (straw, blankets, extra loose fill, topsoil, etc.) proposed for use as frost protection. The need to protect the soil from freezing is ongoing throughout construction and applies both before and after concrete is placed, until backfilling for final frost protection is completed. Foundations placed on frozen soil can experience heaving and significant settlement, rota- tion, or other movement as the soil thaws. Such movement can also occur if the soil is allowed to freeze after the concrete is placed and then allowed to thaw. The higher the percentage of fines (clay and silt, P-200 material) in the fill, the more critical is the need for protection from freezing. rnncr_nmcinTn~urc liar f~ MOISTURE CONTROL OF FELL The contractor should be required to adjust the moisture content of the soil to within a narrow range near the optimum moisture content (as defined by the applicable Proctor or AASHTO Test). In general, fill should be placed within about 2% of optimum. The need for moisture control is more critical as the percentage of fines increases. Naturally-occurring clayey sand or cohesive/semi-cohesive soil are often much wetter than the optimum. Placing and attempting to compact such soils to the specified density may be difficult, or not possible. Even if compacted to the specified density, excessively wet soils may not be suitable as floor slab or pavement subgrades due to pumping under applied load. This is especially true when wet cohesive/semi-cohesive soil is used as backfill in utility trenches under streets. Excessively wet soil in thick fill sections may cause post-construction settlement beyond that estimated for fill placed at or near (+2%) the optimum moisture content. An exception to this would be low permeability soil placed as a pond liner or for a dam. Such soil should usually be placed at 2% to 4% above the optimum moisture content, to provide for a lower insitu permeability. Also, shrinking/ swelling soils (expansive clay} should be placed at about 2% to 4% above optimum moisture to reduce the possibility of soil expansion. Clayey silt, silt, or very silty fine sand should be placed excessively dry. Such soils can undergo post-construction consolidation upon being wetted, even if the specified density had been achieved. This is caused by the collapse of flocculant soil particle arrangement, and can result in settlement of buildings or slabs constructed over the soil. Proper control of fill soil moisture is the responsibility of the excavator. The excavator should evaluate the need for wetting or drying the soils, based either on the data in the soil report, or his own site testing. If the excavator is bringing in off-site fill, it is also his responsibility to evaluate the moisture content of the soil, and the need for wetting or drying. We recommend that this matter be addressed in the project specifications. CONSTRUCTION ON COMPACTED SOIL After the select fill has been placed, compacted, and tested, it must be maintained and protected in order to properly support structures. The suitability of compacted fill soil can be greatly diminished if it is allowed to freeze, become saturated while unconfined (such as in footing excavations or at the surface of slab/placement sub.grade), or disturbed by construction equipment. The responsibility for protecting the soil, or for correcting any disturbance, should be clearly defined in the specifica- tions. Soils which become wet and soft after compaction testing do not necessarily reflect inaccurate field density tests. Especially with non-expansive cohesive/semi-cohesive soils, saturation when unconfined can severely reduce the shear strength while the density remains adequate. The reduced shear strength can cause footings, floor slabs, or pavements to settle or fail under load. We strongly recommend that all pavement subgrade be test rolled (MN/DOT Specification 2111) immediately before paving to determine if the subgrade has not been protected and soft spots have developed. FLOOR SLAB SUBGRADE AND UTILITY TRENCHES This facet of construction presents special problems, especially if the slab subgrade is allowed to freeze. When the soil thaws, it undergoes a period of temporarily lower shear strength. Floor slabs should not be cast over soil in such a weakened or frozen condition (reference pertinent PCA and ACI publications). To do so can result in cracked and failing slabs. The time period to heat and thaw a building may place the construction schedule and/or costs in jeopardy. We strongly recommend that this matter be reviewed in pre-bid and pre-construction meetings. Backfilling of utility trenches in the floor slab subgrade can be difficult. If the soil is wet, compaction to the specified density may be difficult, or not possible. The narrowly cut trenches may preclude the use of proper compaction equipment. With the use of small equipment in.confined areas, the contractor must place the soil in thin lifts (4 to 6 inches), with the soil at the proper moisture Content. This work is typically carried out by contractors other than the mass grading or earthwork contractor. We strongly recommend that the responsibility to carry out the compaction be clearly detailed in the applicable section of the specifications, and reviewed with the appropriate contractor and subcontractor. 1 1 r ti r t i i I~ 1 GME CONSULTANTS_ INC. 1 c DUCTILE-IRON & COMPACT FITTINGS Weight in Pounds per ANSUAWWA C1531/A21.53-94 The following table contains the weights of compact ductile iron fittings as listed in the AWWA C 153 specification. The weights of fitting sizes not listed in the AWWA tables were obtained from the Tyler/Union Utilities Catalog, dated 05/01/97. t r 1 r 1 7 BENDS(MJ-MJ) SLEEVES CAP PLUG SIZE 90 45 22-1/2 11-1/4" SHORT LONG 4" 27 23 18 16 17 20 10 10 6" 39 32 32 30 28 36 17 18 8" 57 46 46 42 38 46 25 26 10" 89 70 64 58 49 62 35 36 12" 108 86 84 74 56 76 44 46 l4" 210 164 148 130 111 140 85 79 16" 264 202 178 158 130 172 93 100 18" 335 250 255 205 160 225 122 130 REDUCERS (LARGE-END MJ xSMALL-END PE) SIZE x4 x6 x8 - x10 x12 x14 x16 x18 x20 6" 26 - - - - - - 8" 34 - - 32 - - - - - - 10" 43 46 50 - - - - - 12" 60 60 62 64 - - - - - 14" - 104 98 92 92 - - - - 16" 136 128 123 119 132 - - - 18" - 195 185 175 190 190 - - r REDUCERS (SMALL-END MJ x LARGE-END PE) SIZE x4 x6 x8 x10 x12 x14 x16 x18 x20 6" 26 - _ - _ 8" 33 35 - - - _ _ _ _ 10" 44 46 49 - - - _ _ 12" 60 58 61 61 - - - - _ 14" - 100 99 96 90 - - - - 16" 125 l24 124 122 133 - - - 18" - - 170 -165 150 175 170 - - MECHANICAL -JOINT TEES SIZE x4 x6 x8 x10 x12 xl4 x16 x18 x20 4" 32 - - _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ 6.' 46 56 _ - - - - - 8" 60 72 86 - - - _ _ 10" 78 90 105 120 - - - 12" 94 1l0 125 140 160 - - - 14" 172 182 206 228 234 280 - - - 16" - ~ 228 248 264 280 ~ 316 322 - - 18 - 275 295 315 335 380 405 435 REDUCERS (MJ - MJ) SIZE x4 x6 x8 x10 x12 x14 x16 6" 24 - _ - 8" 32 36 10" 46 47 50 - - - - 12" 58 60 60 64 - 14" - 100 100 l00 ]00 - - 16" - l24 124 124 124 140 - 18" - - 190 195 180 190 ]95 1 i i 1 1 1 1 1 V 1 1 i 1 1 i 1 l r r t REDUCERS (PE x PE) SIZE x4 x6 x8 x10 x12 xl4 x16 6" 22 - - - - _ - 8" 32 33 - - - - - 10" 46 46 49 - - - - 12" 58 57 59 59 - - - 14" - 102 94 90 88 - - 16" - 124 119 119 113 129 - ]8" - - 170 160 150 160 145 CROSSES (MJ x MJ) SIZE x4 x6 x8 x10 x12 x14 xl6 x18 6" 62 80 - _ - _ - - 8" 84 -108 120 - l0 98 l18 138 l55 _ - - _ - _ - - 12" 123 140 162 187 212 - - - 14" - 210 231 255 269 299 - - 16" - 250 264 286 3l0 - -~ I i ~ - 18" - - - - - Fittings Fittings shall be measured on a pound basis of compact ductile iron fittings as published in AWWA C153 excluding the weight of glands, gaskets, bolts or other accessories. t